''Iuii-T'T  ; •   ■'■■■'■' i:■■■     ' •■•:  ;
irrinrm ;;;: ::-\y.:-iU\v^-r ^   ; -■■■- v.
tltfelfv.;^';>-.^:>Vi■ fr*-Vp 7;:;;,:-_- y_i:'7-
               ^:-u< r.jvi-'.rtu v;rv ;■■..;■•.'..- ,■.' ■ ■ ■
^rp®UlSp,:kKfUH>}Lu\:''  :   'T.::/.-'
3^5^52 2^*^
ij 
 

#<&
W AJU \V'DI)\/Ad W o^xy

A 
 
      ENGRAVINGS








           OF THE









BONES, MUSCLES, and JOINTS. 
 
O H*SPENCER.MD.
ENGRAVINGS
OF THT
BONES,  MUSCLES, and JOINTS,
ILLUSTRATING
THE
FIRST  VOLUME
OF THE
ANATOMY of the HUMAN BODY.
BY
JOHN BELL, Surgeon.
^econti enttion. u
7 I (/(J
         i
         I
LONDON:
PRINTED FOR T. N. LONGMAN AND O. RBES, PATERNOSTER-ROW,
       AND T. CADELL AND W. DAVIES, STRAND.
1804.
J* 
Med.  Kis+.


  |3f 35e
     l?of
BIGGS, PRINTER, CRANE-COURT, FLFF.T-STREET. 
r o
      DR.  DANIEL   RUTHERFORD,

              PROFESSOR  OF MEDICINE AND BOTANY,
                              A V D
           PHYSICIAN TO THE ROYAL INFIRMARY,
                        EDINBURGH.


  SI R,

            In prefenting  this Book of Plates to one  who is fo well able
as you are  to judge of their defects, 1  ought to add  fome value  to the
offering, by declaring the motives of it.—It is a mark of gratitude for
the friendly care  with  which, in company with  my worthy Mafter, you
watched over me during a  long and dangerous  illnefs.  Perhaps there
can be no higher  compliment betwixt medical men, than this confidence
in time of ficknefs; and furely,  if I may judge  from my own feelings,
nothing can be more grateful than the remembrance of kindnefTes be-
ftowed at fuch a time.----May your fkill be long ufeful to your  fellow-
citizens ; and may it be always valued as I value it,

                            I am,
                                 S  I R,
                                      With refpcd:,
                              Your  Friend, and Humble Servant,
JOHN   BELL. 
 
   In a Book containing fo many thoufand technical terms, it will not be particular though the Student fhould
find more to correct than what is"here put down.—But thefe are fome of the chief errata; and,  fince  many
of them affect the fcnfe, the Student fliould touch them with the pen before he begins to read.
R   R
A,
 31-
 35-
Ibid.
Ibid.
 54-
 55-
 69.
 72.
 97
Ibid.
 98.
loo.
Ibid.
line 7. for ftretches read unites it.
line I. for lefs read letter.
line 15. for 4 read 6.
line 13. for futures read future.
line 13. for feparate r<Wfeparates.
line 14. for CEthmoid raz^Clinoid.
line 20. for d. d. read 2. z.
line 17. for Pubis read Ifchium.
line %%■ for inner read outer.
line 7. for Radius read Humerus.
line 15. for cartilages read cartilage.
lines 18, 19 for 44. 45. 46. read 54. SS- 5*5-
line 4. for  ix. read x.
line I. for Sterno-hyoideus read Sterno-thyroideus.
line z%  f*r Arytenoideus obliquus read Arytenoi-
        deus lateralis
line  16. for Styloid mufcle read Styloid procefs.
 Page
 no.

 119.

 134-
 146.
 156.
 159*
 168.
 173-
 174.
 175-
  177.
 Ibid.
i 190
 Ibid.
 191.
lin. ult.for uncovered by the fkin read uncovered
        of the fkin.
line 7. dele Below the fpine is feen  the Infra-
        fpinatus.
line 6. for where read whence.
line 14. for d. d.  read b. b.
line 18. for iii. read W.
line 2. from foot, for 188. read 186.
line 7. for Coraco brachialis read Biceps,
line 4. for wrift read creft.
line 7. for cancellae read lamellse.
line 6. for (g) read (9).
line 15.  for (m) read («).
///is 21. for (j) read  (»*)■
line 2. for outer rea</inner.
line IO. <&■/<? often.
fl« 4. /or fubflained raw? fuftained. 
 
TREF^tCE.
W/ HEN  a young man, who had been blind from his childifh
       years, had his fight reftored to him by our celebrated fur-
geon Chesselden, all his thoughts, and feelings, and pleafures,
and pains, were very interefting to  his friends; for that raoft de-
lightful of all our fenfes was to him as a dream of fairy  vifions,
confufed,  yet delightful, beyond  all that  the  fancy can conceive,
" Ke was like one newly born  into the world, needing to learn
" anew all  the objecls around him,  knowing nothing by the eye,
" but all by the touch.  It was  long before he found out that pic-
" tures reprefented folid bodies,  and then he was much furprifed
" that thofe things, which to the eye feemed prominent and round,
" were to the touch quite even and flat; he afked his friends whicli
" was  indeed the lying fenfe, feeling or feeing."
a
" Being 
ii                      PREFACE.
  "  Being mown  his father's picture  in  a locket, at his  mother's
" watch, and told what  it was, he acknowledged a likenefs, but
" was vaftly furprifed ; afking, how it could be that a large face
t{ could be exprefTed info  little  room; faying, it mould have feemed
" as impoflible to him,  as to have put a bufhel of any thing into a
  pint.

   Now there are many, who having enjoyed and ufed this precious
fenfe during  all their  lives, have  never come to know, like this
young man, that, even within the narrowed circle, the reprefenta-
tion is as perfect and true, as-in the full  fize of the human body ;
fooliihly imagining that  nothing can be drawn but of its natural
fize. If a man  were to take this fancy, that  nothing of anatomy
 could be drawn but of the full  fize of life, with what high contempt
mud he look down upon  thefe little plates ; where I have endea-
 voured  to reprefent, in this miniature form, what it mud be con-
 fefled, might be  more fully reprefented on a larger fcale: and yet
 I am fenfible,  that thofe, who cannot  underdand thefe  plates,
 will hardly profit even by that (lately anatomical  figure of  full
 fix  feet  high, which, being cut in copper, with googes,  and chif-
 fels, and mallets, and all  kinds of inftruments, mud edablifli a re-
 putation  for its author;  which, if not high, will  not  fail to be
 at lead of a lading  kind  ; neither apt  to be  forgotten,  nor liable
 like other difcoveries, to  go adray.
     2                                                       As 
                      FREFAC E.                     in
   " As I proceeded in writing a book of anatomy, I felt more
"  and more, at every dep,  the  neceflity  of giving plates to  it;"
for a book of anatomy without thefe  feemed to me no better than
a  book of geography without its maps ; it was, in my mind, like
teaching  mathematics without diagrams, or folving Euclid's pro-
blems without the help of figures or  lines, by the mere force of
imagination alone.  Indeed any one,  who,  ftudying without fome
help of plates, tries to underdand and to remember an anatomical
defcription  with no other reprefentation than words merely, will
feel,  that he is like one  attempting to work a rule  of  arithmetic
without  the ufe of cyphers,  trying to  remember the  value and
denomination of each part throughout the whole train of num-
bers ;  he  is ingenious in difficulties,  making an  abdract fubject
of one belonging  to the fenfes chiefly, and attempting to obtain
by words, thofe ideas which mud come to him only through the eye.

   It was while I was  writing anatomical defcriptions that I fird
thought  of drawings, and of placing my fubjects in  thofe very
fhapes andpoflures in which they were explained :—ajid I conceiv-
ed, that the defcriptions  and the drawings might thus be wrought
into one perfect whole; being as two parts of one idea, or as one idea
prefented in a double form, once to the eye, and onee  again to.the ear.
If, in  any material points, my drawings and defcriptions fliall thus
agree, then mud the ideas be made out to my reader clear and fair j
and mould infinuate themfelves  into his mind without labour or
                         a   2                        thought 
iv                    PREFACE.
thought on Ills' p-rt; while lie is not toiling from defcriptions to
drawings ; not harraiTed with continual interruptions, incongruous
idcaf, parts  dcfcribed but not reprefented, or reprefented and not
defcribed ;  not travelling far and wide from the  ideas of one au-
thor, to the reprefentation of another; never trying to aflbciate ideas
which  have no  affinity, nor driving to  bring drawings and de-
fcriptions together which are as far, as may be, from being parts of
the fame idea, or from  being capable of that clofe  companion
which the fludent feeks, and miffes with a difappointment which is
continually renewed.  Such muP be the dudent's  labour, (a labour
which  might  well  opprefs  the mod  active mind,)  if the teacher
be  not careful to preferve for him this correfpondence  of  ideas;
whether he be employed in comparing his lecture with the fubject
lying before him,  or his drawings with his book.

   From the fird dawnings  of anatomical knowledge, or at lead
from the very earlied invention  of anatomical plates, this -virions
practice has prevailed, that each author, carelefs of this correfpond-
ence of ideas ;  never thinking of the harmony that ought  dill to
fubfifl  between thofe notions which are to be conveyed by words
and thofe which fpeak to the eye, in the truer language of this fub-
ject; intending merely to write a book, and rather with  the  hopes
of  procuring himfelf a name, than with  the  prouder expectation
of multiplying and varying the fources of indruction, writes  his
                                                          book 
                      PREFACE.                      v
book after his own way; and takes his plates, perhaps, where he is
directed  by  his bookfeller, or where he may mod  fafely  deal;
 ?nd often chufmg them of  a  faflrion  fifty years older than that
book, into the gaps and interdices of which, they are to be  nitch-
ed and duck up,  wmerever they will  make the  handfomed figure,
not where they will be of the mod ufe.

  This  ironical praife  may  be very  fafely given  to  the  older
anatomids for their love of original drawings, that having once fet
their tade to one certain fydem of plates, they have been very con-
dant and true to their fird choice.   It is thus that the plates of Ve-
falius, Fallopius, or Eudachius, have  defcended, with fome didor-
tions and abridgements indeed,  but dill unpolluted with any dain
of originality, nor vitiated by any one improvement of reprefenta-
tion or of thought, through the books of Vidus Vidius,  Pareus,
Stephanus, Blanchardus, Veflingius, Riolanus, Verhein, Palfin, Dio-
nis, and  a thoufand others.  Thus have the once beautiful plates of
Vefalius, (mangled and  deformed, cut down to fuit books of all
fizes, twided and accommodated to all fubjects and all forms of ex-
planation,) defcended to us in fuch didorted fhapes, that while we
are looking over their books to fix upon them  this indictment of
 plagiarifm,  we can hardly recognife the original drawings fo fairly
as to prove the deed.
                                                         Even 
vi                   PREFACE.
  Even in the fir it invention of our bed anatomical figures, we
fee  a continual druggie  between the anatomid and the painter ;
one  driving for elegance of form, the other infiding upon ac-
curacy  of reprefentation.   It  was thus  that the celebrated Ti-
tian  confented to  draw for Vefalius : Though it is but too  plain
that there can  be  no  truth  in drawings,   thus  mondroudy
compounded betwixt the  imagination of  the  painter,  and  the
fober remondrances  of the anatomid,  driving  for accurate ana-
tomy,  where  the thing  cannot be ; for thofe figures, which are
fuppofed  to  be  drawn  truly from the  anatomical table, are
formed from  the imagination of  the painter  merely ;  durdy
and active  figures, with  a ludicrous contrad of furious counter
nances, and active limbs,  combined with  ragged  mufcles, and
naked  bones,  and diiTected bowels, which they are bufily em-
ployed in fupporting, forfooth,  or  even demondrating with  their
hands.   This vitious practice of drawing from imagination  mere-
ly is well examplified in this, that anatomids have, with one con-
fent, agreed to borrow  the  celebrated Torfo  for putting  their
bowels into, to explain them there ; a praftice which  has defcend-
ed from the time of Vefalius down to ChefTelden, and from him
to the fydems of the prefent day.

  No painter in natural hidory, in botany,  in mechanics, nor  in
any  thing that relates  to fcience, would dare  to draw  without
                                                          his 
                      PREFACE.                    vii
his fubject immediately before him:  but anatomids,  who mot of
all need this  clearnefs and truth, have been mod of all arbitra-
ry and loofe in their methods ; not reprefenting what they faw, but
what they themfelves imagined, or what others chofe to report  to
them:—hence the carelefs copying from book to book, the interpo-
lations of anatomids, the interference of painters in a fubject de-
grading to their higher art,  the errors and  midakes of engravers,
and the fubjection of true anatomical drawing to the  capricious
interference  of the artid, whofe rule it has too often been to make
all beautiful and fmooth, leaving no harflinefs  nor apparent blurr
in all his work.  Even the celebrated book of Albinus has been thus
abufed ; and though he is fparing of cellular fubdance, and glands,
and  fat,  and veflels ; of all that gives a drawing its likcnefs to the
human body; even the little that he had given,  is now rounded
down into the fmoothnefs of ivory,  as if a model had been made
and  drawn from.   Albinus,  (naturally fparing of ornament,  and
wanting in the natural character of parts) lived to fee his drawings
thus robbed of the little that they poflefled of grace or nature ; and
then produced, as  if in mere  wantonnefs  and fport,  undar the
high title  of Anatomy of Painting ; but by one, who feems too
grave to have intended any droke of irony, fo refined as  this.

  A higher tade  prevails in the  prefent age; and  the fplendid
and noble works of Morgagni, Haller,  Bidloo, and Albinus,  and
                                                            of 
 viii                     PREFACE.
 f.fc Chedelden,  Hunter and  Cowper, are drawn truly,  and from
 nature, and cannot be forgotten, while anatomy, and the arts de-
 pending on it,  continue to be  edeemed.  Yet even, among thofe
 great men, we  have {ten an idea gradually improving, till at lad
 it was brought by  Haller to the true point.  For  Albinus's draw-
 ings are merely plans:  Bidloo's tables are beautiful and maderly;
 but being wanting in regularity and order, they want altogether
 the clearnefs of a plan;  Haller's drawings are as fair as Bidloo's, as
 regular as thofe of Albinus  ; and combine in one the truth   and
fometimes the elegance of drawing, with the plainnefs and accuracy
 of a mere plan.

  If  an anatomid (hall fet up a  fkeleton, and draw  it in pof-
tures  refembling thofe of life; if he fhall difTect the human  bo-
dy, dudying and drawing it in parts; if he fhall continue draw-
 ing mufcle after mufcle,  and one part after  another,  till  he have
 gone through the whole; if he fhall proceed then to take thefe draw-
 ings and notes of individual  pirts, and lay  them  over his fird
drawings of the bones ; if he fhall try to match the parts belong-
ing to fifty individual bodies of different fizes,  of various forms
dying, fome fuddenly, and others flowly, fome full and  mufcular
others emaciated and poor; what will the refuk of all this be, but a
mere plan ? It is apian merely, through all the procefs,  and in all
its parts; it cannot be other than a plan when the whole work  is
                                                  accomplifhed 
                     PREFACE.                      ix
accomplifhed  and fet up.   It  was an unlucky theory of this
kind that carried the great Albinus, for fifteen years, through a
courfe of  laborious difiections, painful and  ufelefs  to  himfelf;
but  ufeful  to all thofe  who  have to follow  him:  Still  each
drawing of  his is but  a mere plan,  refembling no  individual
body,  refembling in nothing the general drawing of the body; it is
fuch a view as never is to  be feen in a diiTection.  It is not, like our
Couper's nor like Bidloo's,  a true drawing of mufcles dafhed
with touches of glands, and fat, and cellular fubdance, which are
the natural didinctions of parts; nor mixed with the branchings of
arteries or nerves, the chief objects for which we dudy the mufcles;
but it is like a datue anatomifed, where all the irregularities of fub*
dance, all the gradations of bones, ligaments,  tendons, and  flefh,
are rounded down with a dudied  fmoothnefs;  it is a figure which
the  dudent can never compare with the body as it lies before him
for  difTection ;  it is a figure fuiting more the  eye  of the painter
than the eye of the anatomid; nor  even pleafant to his eye, fince
 it  dands  in attitudes, which no fwelling of particular mufcles-
 feems to fupport.

   In the other extreme is Bidloo ; for,  in his plates, the mader-
 hand of  the  painter  prevails  almod alone; while whole fheets  of
 infinite labour ferve  only to explain the joinings of the clavicles, or
 perhaps the form of one  trifling mufcle or gland.  The  formal fi-
                              b                           gures 
x                    PREFACE.
gurcsofAi.BIN us are more defireable than thefe. But, in either book,
we regret either extreme ;  in Albinls we think that we under-
dand every mufcle of the human body! but our knowledge hardly
bears the ted of difTection; the drawings and  the fubject never can
be  directly compared:—In Bidloo,  we have the very fubject be-
fore us!  the  tables, the knives, the apparatus,  down even to the
flies that haunt the places of  difTection, all are prefented with the
main object of the plate; and thus we have  perfect  confidence in
the drawing; in which alfo the parts are laid out in a bold and maf-
terly dile, fo that the dead fubject and the engraving can well  bear
to be compared. But in Bidloo there  is often no claflification nor
arrangement, no breadth of parts, by which we can underdand a
whole limb; a thigh is prefented with no one marked point; neither
the haunch nor the knee are feen: His plates are all elegance in re-
fpect of drawing;  in refpect of anatomy,  they are all diforder and
confufion; and one mud be both  anatomid and painter  to guefs
what is meant, how the limb is laid, and what parts are feen.

   It is to Haller that we mud give  the palm ;  who having to do
with parts chiefly, and not with a whole, has feldom offended by
drawing adifTected body, after a living form;  nor by  planning and
dividing a living form into the parts of a diflected body; but has
given his drawings truly from the anatomical table ;  and with the
trued  drawing, has given,  very  often,  all  the diftindnefs of a
plan.
                                                         Now 
                          PREFACE.                          xi

    Now we fliould always remember that anatomy is to be learnt only
 by difTection*; difTection is the  fird and  lad bufinefs of the flu-
 dent; and when drawings are made  for his ufe,  the  body fhould
 belaid out, as he is to order it in difTection;  the belly fliould  be
 difplayed, as he can difplay it in his fubject;  an arm fhould be  fo
 drawn, that, when he difTects  the arm of the fubject, it may fall na-
 turally upon the table, exactly as he finds it in his book;  and dill
 the podure of arms, and legs,  and  heads,  fliould  be  preferved  di-
 ftinct  and clear: enough of  the  general figure  fhould be kept  to
 explain the podure of parts;  there fhould be kept  up  a natural
 correfpondence  among the feveral drawings} and  while  the true
 anatomical drawing is delivered  upon  one plate, a  plan, if  it  be
 required, fliould be added upon the next.
                                    B 2                                 I

   *  If anatomy is to be acquired in this way only,  then  muil we underftand by a fchoo!
of anatomy a fchool of diffedlion : Yet thofe who have had the  happinefs of profecuting their
ftudies in foreign univerfities, or in the London fchools, will hardly believe it, that there is at
leaft one place of education much celebrated, and worthy to  be fo, where the ftudy of anatomy
is  denied  or profcribed.—Where  not only it is not praifeworthy, but even da-ngerous to
propofe difledions; where the  man who may be fo bold as to do his duty in that mod import -
tant ftudy, (hall be traduced in filthy pamphlets, thruft offLiwily, and with intentions not of the
pureft kind, into the hands of every young man who comes to fchool.  If 1 have felt this, it has
been ftill in ftlence ;  till I now fpe;:k of it, not formally, but by chance ;  not with the moan
thought of prefenting myfelf as a perfecuted man, nor of indulging a refentment which were loft
upon fuch people, or upon fuch an occafion; but to make my acknowlegeraents to one, whofe ge-
nerous conduct ib not unknown; who is truly interefted in the honour and reputation of that uni-
verfity to which he belongs ; who is at once an honour and defence to it; and whofe fingle praife,
(may I  be allowed to fay what touches myfelf fo nearly,)  «  fhall  outweigh  a whole theatre of
" others." 
xii                   PREFACE.
   I know but too well that few will fubmit to learn anatomy, as
riiey fhould do, by  the dry reading of anatomical defcriptions, and
the  tedious comparing of thefe  with the fubject, or with their
plates; and there  are very few, who have learned this  ufeful truth,
that they are to become acquainted with parts only by being maders
of the whole.   One propofes to himfelf to learn  the  bones only;
another defigns to attend chiefly to the joints ; a  third will dudy
the arteries only,  "  for the arteries are of chief ufe to the furgeon;"
another  delights  in  dudying  the vifcera, and  is  forely  disap-
pointed if he fail to underdand the  brain; while anatomy abfb-
lutely is not to be dudied in parts, but is  one fair and continued
circle, where fuch is the correfpondence, and mutual connection of
all the parts, that he who would know the mufcles,  mud fird  du-
dy the  bones;  and  he who would learn the blood vefTels,  and
nerves,  (which  are indeed the mod important to the furgeon,) mud
know the mufcles  thoroughly.   It is according to  the mufcles,
that all  the other  parts are to be defcribed ; for when we  trace the
courfe  of  a blood vefTel, it is  by purfuing  its intricate wan-
derings among the  mufcles: it gives its fird branch to one mufcle,
its fecond  branch  to another;  it  forks into two, under the belly
of a third; it goes through the fubdance of a fourth mufcle,  or ac-
companies its tendon, or runs along the edge  of its  flefhy belly :
So that in defcribing a great vefTel, we mark  its exit from  the trunk
of the body, its entrance into the arm-pit or  groin, its courfe down
the arm or thigh ; the dangers, the wounds,  the operations of each
great artery or nerve, are recorded according to the parts which
                                                         their 
                      PREFACE.                    xiii
 their feveral  branches fupply.   And befides  thefe confiderations,
 which cannot but have their weight,  we mud not forget, that the
 wounds of the mufcles,  the fprains of tendons,  the rupture of li-
 gaments, the collections  under the general fafciae or broad tendons
 of the limbs, are of themfelves fufEcient and direct  motives;  the
 only ones, indeed, that need be afligned for  teaching the anatomy
 of the mufcles with particular care.

   Yet, labour it as we will, how poorly ought we to think  of our
 own diligence, when we find Statuaries or Painters dudying  the
 anatomy  of the  human body,  with a perfeverance  and  fuccefs
 which may well put us  to fhame!  Painters merely, who  having
 no object fo important, nor fo intereding, as the injuries and acci-
 dents of the body,  defire nothing more than to  underdand its ex-
 ternal beauty and its form.

   The Greeks lived in the mod delightful countries of the world; the
 mod beautiful people; fometimes happy, and always free.  Among
 them the arts grew and flourifhed, and were to all ranks the chief
 bufinefs and pleafure of life:—for moderation and Simplicity was in
 their dwellings,  while  all their riches were referved for fhows and
 fedivals, for adorning their native city, for the public ufe.  Their
 temples, and dreets, and halls were filled with reprefentations of a
 beauty, which never exided but among that happy  people, or lives
now only in their works,  the admiration and reproach of our lag-
gard times.—They faw, in their public games,  the  lovely forms of
                                                         their 
xiv                  PREFACE.
their  youth  moving  in  dignity  and grace:  For  there were  feen
in mixed affembly ;—in their women, the pured models of female
beauty ;—in their young men, the granded difplays of the manly
form ; moving and in action ;  infpired by every noble emulation,
exulting  in their drength;  or advancing  into the  public view,
only to fliow  the beauties of their form.----Their artids  needed
no helps of anatomy ;  but in  thofe delightful  fpectacles  collected
all the modes  and forms of beauty, to combine  them into one high
ideal form. *

   The moderns have  come poorly after, in this great career; copy-
ing  coldly  thofe  half-animated  forms,  which  are  feen  in our
fchools of the arts fixed in laborious podures, " felling their igno
t; ble beauty  for a price." Senfible of this great defect, our artids
have  taken the help of anatomy  to correct  this tame unmeaning
form; fludying with a noble perfeverance, (but as their own critics
acknowledge  to us,) with but poor fuccefs. They dudy each muf-
cle ; they note down  its direction and ufe ;  they guefs at its office,
and power in certain podures of the body ;  and try to mark it in
its jud place.  The  modern datuary,  is like  one wandering a-
mong the ruins of  fome noble  city, who finding the remains of
 a temple, traces its lines  among  the  ruins, and, upon this flender
knowledge,  tries  to  imagine  and coldly reprefent to  us its  lod
form and antient grandeur.
                                                              It
   * "  We are taught by philofophy, the natural pre-eminence and high rank of fpecific ideas
"  above individual forms."——Harris, 
                        PREFACE.                   xv
  It was thus  that Michael Angelo  dudied our  profeflion :  and
dudied it fo, that the lefTons of that great mader are a reproach to
thofe who profefs anatomical knowledge.  His knowledge of ana-
tomy gave  to all his works a cad " approaching  more  nearly  to
" the Etrufcan  dyle,  than to  the  purer tade  of the  Greeks ;"
marking them too harfhly with traits of learning.   His  violent  di-
ftortions and  fudden fhortenings of the limbs are lefs pleafmg to
thofe who delight in the delicate and higher beauty;  fitting him lefs
for reprefenting the female form, than for giving bold and  terrible
pictures of action and drength.  But dill he is correct and  true in
all that belongs to the anatomy of the human body ; and  his dudies
are atrial of the anatomid's {kill;—for in looking upon one of thefe,
we find that the knee,  the ancle, the neck, the wrifl, each head and
projecting  point of  bone,  is  truly marked;  while  the didortion
of  the   figure,  the  violent  action  of the  limbs,  the  fhorten-
ings and bending of  the joints,  and the intricacy of the whole
podure are difficult in  the  extreme; but dill  each limb is true,
and every individual  mufcle fwelling in its jud degree, fo as
to  preferve correctly  the  proportions  and  balance  of  the whole.
Should not we be afhamed  to compare our languid endeavours with
the perfect knowledge of this great painter, the very notes of whofe
deeper dudies in anatomy we are unable to read ?

   But in our profeflion, though the very fcience might almod be de-
fined a knowledge of parts, indudry and knowledge are but of low
      2                                                 repute, 
xvi                     PREFACE.
ivpute, an.l the very name of diligence and mere labour, a term of
reproach; while genius is in truth  nothing but a drong defire of
knowledge,  and the fpirit of indudry  its trued mark.  Let not
the dudent of anatomy  defpife labour,  nor hope  to  acquire his
knowledge by other means.  In  judice to his own  genius, he
mud take all advantage of defcriptions, and  drawings, and difTec-
tions, and plans ; feeling, no doubt, in his fird difficulties the need
of every help, but driving to mount, by flow degrees,  from fuch
elementary books, as that which I now prefent him with, to  thofe
noble and fplendid works, which were the beginning of correct ana-
tomy, and will not be forgotten, while that branch of knowledge is
refpected or known.  And here may I not complain, that, in  fche-
ming thefe  plates,  I  am curbed and bound  in by the oecono^
my of my plan? If, indeed, by wifhing merely, the thing could be
accomplifhed, this word oeconomy  fhould never more be heard of
in all that relates to fcience; but many are to Audy our profeflion
who cannot command thofe  noble  works; and every young man
who is to fludy an art in which the intereds of fociety are fo im-
mediate  and fo drong, fhould have the  means of  inflruction put
within  his reach.   If there be any teacher, then, who  being cir-
cumfcribed  in point of time, would confent to offer his help and
indructions in that form in which he could give them,  regarding
more his duty than his good name,  to him this motive fhall be my
apology ;  ir fhall be my apology to all thofe who can feel with me
a fincere defire to do good and to be ufefulj—but not  to all!—for
                                                      dudents 
                      PREFACE.                    xvii
 dudents have been already warned, that they mud be jealous of thofe
 who pretend to give them plates; " that fome are capable of making
 plates  for them, and  fome are not;  that thofe  who  are  bed able
 to give them plates, either will not undertake the labour, or can-
 not find time."  And fo,  the half only of  this delicate argument
 was left unpronounced, which was already but too  plain.   Now,
 although  fome  unfortunate publifher of  Anatomical  Drawings
was thus left impaled upon the horn of this broken dilemma, any
 implied reproach  could  not be  aimed at me particularly,  fince
 my book  was not  publifhed;  it was  only advertifed.   This is
 perhaps a fort of caution, which it might in certain circumdan-
 ces be  very  right, or very dutiful, or very  convenient, perhaps,
 to give; as young men,  no doubt, need fome careful  perfon  to
 indruct  and  help  their  judgements,  efpecially  in  fuch  tender
 points  as this  is.   But fhould it ever happen, that a man of high
 rank and character fhould be found,  driving to hurt  any poor en-
deavours of mine,  I  might feel that  rifing  within me,  which
it  were  almod  a  meannefs to  fupprefs *;  and reply to  him
in the  words of  Lord  Shaftfbury:   "  You,  Sir,  have a cha-
" racter,  which   fets  you above  us  far,  and releafes   you
" from thofe  decorums,  and   condraining  meafures  of  beha-
                                                      " viour

         * Ille fapit, qui te fie utitur, omnia ferre
        Si potes ac debes.                      Juvenax. 
 xviii                    P  R  E F  A  C E.
 "  viour,  to which we  of an inferior  fort are bound; you may
 "  liberally deal out your compliments and falutations in what  Ian-
 "  guage you think  fit; for  I fhall but drive  with myfelf to  fup-
 "  prefs whatever vanity might naturally arife in me for fuch a fa*
 " vour bedowed ;  for, whatever may in the bottom be intended by
 " fuch treatment, it is impoflible for me to term it other than a fa-
 "  vour, fince there are certain  enmities which it will ever be edeem-
 "  ed an honour to have deferved *."
    The author furely will not be accufed of fuch want of tade,  and
 relifli for elegant drawing or engraving,  as to hold thefe plates  out
 as  excelling  in what is beautiful; yet, may he not hope, that they
 are not wanting in what is ufeful ?   They  want that fize  which
 gives  fplendor to  a grander  work,  and  of courfe that propor-
 tion, which gives the full idea of the human body ;  they want that
 elegant drawing, and careful engraving, which fhould do any idea
 judice, which is fo necefTary in delivering the minuter parts with
 character and truth ;  all is wanting  that belongs  to the idea of a
 grander work ;  an  idea,  which the author could not  but feel,  yet
 durft not indulge.   But dill he  hopes they may be found fimple,  in-
                                                        telligible,

  *  Perhaps it was fome fuch critic as this that contrived that great anatomical drawing, which
either I fhould not have mentioned at all, or mould have given fome fhort account of.__Indeed
it is  not  eafy to deliver a fair hiftory of even the moft trivial improvement, and very fel-
dom eye  we able to difcover by what  happy chance an  idea firft fprang up in the mind of
                                                                its 
                         P REFACE,                     xix
teliigible, and plain ;  having whatever belongs to a little lydem of
plates,  intended merely  to accompany  a book of anatomy,  and
chiefly defigned for thofe who are entering on their dudies, -diid but
little advanced; and he trufls that he will be indulged,  in trying
fairly,  whether by attending  to the correfpondence of ideas and
reprefentations, whether by ordering his drawings fo as to fuit his
book, whether by a careful combination of defcriptions, drawing-,
and plans, he fhall not be able  to deliver a fyftem of anatomy, intel-
ligible, or perhaps eafy for his pupils;  enabling them to enter the
diflecting room with confidence, and to leave it, not without indruc-
tion; and qualifying them alfo for underdanding thofe illuflrations,
which he fliall continue  to give, or the corrections and remarks of
other teachers :—for that dudent has  but a mean idea of the value
of  his  profeflion, who does not feek all means of instruction;  and
the teacher mud have a poor conceit of his prefent knowledge,  who
does not hope, by his  own diligence, to correct himfelf;. or to re-
ceive lefTons from  others, fometimes friendly, too often,  in this
world  tinctured with its enmities  and paffions;  fuch  as are  not
pleafantin receiving,  which dill it is a duty to receive.
ks author ; but perhaps the hiftory of this grand figure might go in the following terms.  The
Ingenious Mr Cruikfhanks, with the dcfign of explaining all that he or Dr Hunter had injeded,
of the lymphatic fyftem, in one confident  view, took a delicate and elegant drawing of the
hu.nan body, and laid his lymphatics upon it, explaining  at the fame time his intention, and
making his apologies for this little plan ;  but he could not forfee that the idea thus firft fuggef- 
XX
PREFACE.
                            ——"^^THflfli'lHli M"

YT/H1LE  I have  ventured to  fpeak  fo  fully concerning  the general
        defign of thefe plates, it  is very  natural for me to fay alfo  a  few
words concerning the mechanical labour.
   I have drawn  my  plates  with my own hand.   I have engraved fome of
thefe plates,  and etched almoft the whole of them:  Which I mention only
to fhow, that they have their chance of being correct in the anatomy, and
that whatever,  by my interference, they may have loft in elegance, they
have gained, I hope, in truth and accuracy.—And while I mention this, I
muft not be ungrateful to Mr Beugo,  whofe fkill will, I hope, be fhown on
fome higher occafion,  and whofe  character muft not be hurt by any thing
that may be feen here ;  for wherever in thefe plates all is fair and clean, it
is owing to his care ; and thofe blots of execution which are not fairly co-
vered, have not come through his correcting hand.—Whatever he has done
alone has been hurried,  allowing no time for artful or laborious engraving,
though ftill all that is here,  I hope, is correct and true.
                                                                          I
ted was to receive, in pafling through a greater mind, a grander form.—The expedient was tried
again, and the fecond anatomift refolving to outdo at one ftroke all his rivals, and knowing of no
furer way than this, had an engraving made of a moft gigantic fize ! An Afliapart!  A figure of full
fix feet in height ; which (bating the clumfinefsof conception) has turned out to be a drawing
of fr.ch fingular beauty, that it will not be rivalled; and as there can be no reprefentation of the
human body of more than 6 feet high, it pofitively cannot be excelled.—All thofe who understand
the intention and effeft of engraving, or who have any idea of the bold and free manner  which
clafs  drawings require, muft wonder even at the report of fuch a thing; but not as our poet
Young wonders, " for wonder is involuntary praife j" if the emotion be involuntary, it will moft
likely be of another  kind. 
                          PREFACE.                      xxi
   I have endeavoured, alfo, to keep the explanation of thefe plates to the
 moft fimple and natural form; knowing, by long experience, that anato-
 •mical defcriptions are, even to the moft earneft and diligent ftudent,  very
 tedious and hard to be underftood. The loading of fuch a ftudy as Anatomy
 with peculiar or affected language, and with needlefs terms of art, where
 too many  are really needful,  has a tawdry  and  vulgar  appearance, of
 which we have much reafon  to be afhamed ;  it is a barbarous jargon, to
 which our ear is fubdued only by long and  inveterate cuftom:  and our
 continual ufe of this trafhy language in fchool books,  prefents to the  ftu-
 dent  the difficult  and  harraffing talk of learning at once a  new fcienc?
 and a ftrange language.
   Swift,  who commends fimplicity of language, and enforces his lefifon
 by the  moft beautiful examples,  fays, " When the water is clear you will
 " eafily fee to the bottom;"  but  anatomifts have ftirred up their techni-
 cal terms fo thick,  that  the ftudent has but a poor chance of feeing to the
 bottom, unlefs  we  fhall agree in  letting this fediment quietly fubfide a-
 gain.
   The  medical ftudent is, indeed, fo accuftomed to hard words, that he can
 fcarcely think any book accurate or complete that is  without them;  and
 however well he may underftand its defcriptions, cannot believe them  true.
 He is not only accuftomed to know the moft  difficult parts by the harden:
 names,  but to have the detail given to him in fuch expletives, as the Pofterior,
 Anterior, Superior, Inferior *; and often after all, this Superior Anterior por-
                                                                  tion
   * Our fcience in this country has got this vile farrago, of Anterior, Superior, &c. through
bad tranflations of Latin and  Trench,  where fuch words  as Superieure or  Superior are in th-ir
place. 
xxii                     PREFACE.
tijn is but one extremity forfooth, or one portion of a part,  which having
other pofterior extremities, or anterior portions, has  to pafs ftill through a
long declenfion of thefe curious terms, which have not, like the terms in
any other fcience, the property of conveying more regular and clear ideas,
nor of faving fuperftuous words. They ftand in place of the fimple expref-
lion of upper or lower ends.—Now this clutter of hard names confounds the
ear, as well as puzzles the  judgement  of the ftudent, and is truely a dif-
grace to the fcience ;—it  looks as if we  believed  Anatomy to confift in
firange terms, and that we could not write in true character of Anatomifts,
but by departing as widely as poflible from the language of gentlemen.  I
have ventured, inftead of " fetting up this rank and file of tall opaque words
"  betwixt the reader's imagination, and my own  conceptions,"  to make
every defcription as  fimple  as may be,—ufing  no hard words,  but the
pure names  ; choofing rather that my book  fhould be plainly underftood^
than admired as a piece of unintelligible  profound anatomy'. 
THE
FIRST     BOOK
OF THE
BONES. 
 
 
BOXES
Outline /or PL. I.
II
Fubluhtd far Longman J- Stn J804.
^^^y&^_ 
 
Boxes
PL. I.
u
 
BOOK       FIRS    T.

                       OF  THE

       BONES.



                 PLATE    I.
This Plate explains the Text Book, from Page 35, to Page 52.
J!4 this Plate are  reprefented  the  Adult and  Fcetal  Sculls,  that  they  -
   may  be fairly compared with  each other;----and  there  is  explain-
   ed  here, not  the minute  anatomy of the  individual  parts, but the
   general view only, viz. the Bones of which the Cranium is  compofed;
   _____the Sutures  by which the feveral  bones are joined.  And, in the
   Fcetal Scull, the form and procefs  of  Offification;  and the interftices-
   called Fontanelles, which  are always  left  membraneous, during  the
   flow offification  of the child's  head.
A
FIGURE  L 
OF  THE EONEJ.
                           FIGURE    I.






                    THE  ADULT  SCULL.






 The Frontal Bone, where (a) fhows the ferrated edge which  forms  the  Co-



ronal Suture;---(b)  the natter part behind the Eye,  which is plain  and hollow



for lodging the Temporal  Mufcle;----(c)  is the acute  angle of the  bone,  which



is  called the External Angular  Procefs, from its forming the outer angle or  cor-



ner  of  the  eye;----and -(d)  is  that prominence  over the nofe,  under  which



there is a fmall  cavity  within the bone,  called  the  Frontal Sinus, which the



furgeon avoids in performing the operation of  trepan;  though it  is rather from



the difficulty of perforating this  part that he fhuns it, than from any danger in the



perforation.







 The Parietal Bone.   The letter B "points to that great line,  which  running ac-



cording to  the length of  the  bone, with  a  rainbow-like arch, divides  the  fur-



face into two equal parts, of  which the  upper and fmooth-part  (*) is covered



with the  thin  expanded  tendon  of  the Occipito-Frontalis  Muscle, while the



lower  part (f) has its furface  radiated;  and thefe  radii are  the impreffions of the



particular  bundles of  which the  Temporal Mufcle  confifts ;  fo that  " the white



<l  femicircular  line (B) reprefents  the origin of the  temporal mufcle; and the  con-



"  verging  lines on  the furface (/") exprefs the manner, in which the fibres  of



"  the  mufcle  are gathered into  a fmaller compafs  to pafs under the  ju<mm."



Vid. P. 61.— (g)  points to a  fmall hole  in  the  back  part of this  bone,  which



is  fometimes  large, fometimes  wanting ; and which  gives paffage  to  a fmall vein



of  the  integuments, (going  inwards to  the  longitudinal finus or  great  vein  of



the  head)  and alfo  to a  fmall artery,  which  accompanies  the vein  : (&) marks



that corner  which, running down  fharper and longer  into  the temple, is often




             2                                                              called 
                          E00K FlilST,  PLATE  FIHST.                          3





   called the Spinous Procefs of the Parietal  Bone ;  and  this corner is the more  to



   be  obferved, that it is under  it that the great  artery of the  Dura Mater runs.



                               *




C   The  Occipital  Bone, of  which  but a very  fmall  part is  feen  in  this direc-



   tion.








D  Is the Tei.iporal Bone, feen full  and  direcT;  from one fide; where  (7) marks



   that thin  upper  edge, which forms  the  fquamous  future ; (ij) the  deep  and flat



   part of  the  bone, on which  the temporal mufcle lies ; (/) the  Maftoid or Mamil-



   lary Procefs, named  from its  refemblance  to  a  nipple;  (jn) the  Styloid  Procefs,



   which ftands out over the back part of the throat to give origin  to  feveral muf-



   cles of the  throat  and  tongue ;  («)  is the  Zygomatic  Procefs,  which, joining



   with  a  fimilar  procefs of the cheek  bone, forms the zygoma or arch ; (0) marks



   the Ring of the Meatus Auditorius  Externus,  or outward  ring  of the  ear; and



   fp) fhows  a fmall hole,  which, like that  of the parietal bone, tranfmits  a  vein



   pafiing  from without  into the  great finus or  vein  within  the fcull, and which be-



   longs fometimes  to  the temporal,  fometimes  to the occipital  bone, or  fometimes




   is in the future betwixt them.








E   The  Os  Malae,  or bone  of the  cheek, which forms-  the lower  and fore  part



   of  the  focket for the eye,  and fupports the cheek;  and by  its  prominence  or



   flatnefs  gives  the form of the face ;---one  procefs  rq)  is feen here  going up



   to meet the angular procefs of the frontal bone, and fo is  named the Angular  Pro-



   cefs of  the  Cheek Bone ; while (r) another procefs, called the Zygomatic Procefs



■   of  the  Cheek Bone,  goes to meet  the zygomatic  procefs of the temporal bone,



   forming the complete jugum,  or yoke,  under which  the temporal  mufcle paffes ;



   and from that  prominent part of the cheek bone, which  is marked (s), there  go



   two remarkable mufcles,  ©ne the Maffeter or  Grinding Mufcle, which paffes from



                                        A  2                                   f!'is 
A
OF  THE BONES.
   this part of the cheek bone  into the angle of the lower jaw to pull it  upwards ;
   while  another,  a  very (lender  and  delicate  mufcle,  goes from  the  fame  point
   inwaids  towards the angle of the mouth,  and is called Zygomaticus,  or Diftor-
   tor Oris.

F  Points to  the fmall bones of the  Nofe, named Nasal  Bones ; for  there  are
   two of them  forming the root of the nofe,  and  the  left one is feen here ;  the
   fmall letter (*) points to  what is called the Lateral Nafal  Suture, which ftretches
   to  the upright  procefs of the upper jaw bone.

G  Points to the UrPER Jaw  Bone,  of which fcarcely any  thing is feen in  this
   view, except  the  circle called the Alveolar or Socket  Procefs,  in  which  the teeth
   are fet.

H  Marks  the Lower Jaw  Bone ; and the letter  is placed  upon that  point of the
   Bone which  is called the Angle, into which the Maffeter  Mufcle is  fixed ;___
    (u)  marks  that  procefs  of  the  jaw which is called  Coronoid or  Horn-like*
   which goes  up under the Zygoma to  receive the  great temporal  mufcle as it
   paffes under  the arch ; — and (y) is the  Condyloid Procefs, or that branch of the
   lower jaw bone, which is  crowned with the condyle  or head, forming the joint or
   hinge upon which the jaw moves; which head of the jaw bone is felt  by putting
    the finger before the flap  of  the ear.

                                The  Sutures  are,
 z. The  Coronal  Suture, running acrofs the  head, joining the frontal to the parietal
   bones, extending from  ear to ear; and going down into  the Temple, where it joins
   the Squamous Suture, and, like it, is fcaled,  (i. e.) wants the indentations of a re-
   gular future.

                                                                            2.  Th- 
                          BOOK FIRST, PLATE FIRST.                          5





u. The  Lambdoidal Suture, joining  the  occipital  to the  parietal  bones ;  ftriding



   over  the  occiput, refembling the Greek letter  A.—But the refemblance  is a little



   hurt  by the accident of an Os Wormianum,  or irregular  bone, fuch  as  is found



   more frequently  in this future than in any other; fometimes fingle, as in the fcull



   from which this was drawn; but fometimes in great numbers, and not unfrequently



   of the fize  of a crown  piece ; thefe Offa Wormiana  may difplace  the Lambdoidal



   Suture fo, that being out of the ufual diredion, it may be miftaken for a  fra&ure.







3. The  Sagittal Suture, joining the  parietal bones to each other;  extending from



   the  Lambdoidal  to the Coronal  Suture, as an  arrow  lies betwixt the firing and



   the bow,







4. The  Temporal  or Squamous Suture, belonging chiefly to  the  temporal bone;



   and  called  fquamous or fcaled,  becaufe  the  edges  of the temporal and  parietal



   bones are there  extremely thin,  and are laid  over  each other like  the  fcales  of



   armour.  One part marked (w) lying  betwixt  the occipital and parietal bones,  is



   named  the  Additamentum  Suturse  Squamofae,  or  fupplement of  the  Squamous



   ■Suture.







5, Marks a part of  the Sphenoidal Suture, joining the wing of the Sphaenoid Bone,



   to the temporal,  frontal, and parietal bones, for, in this hollow under the zygoma,



   all thefe  bones meet by  thin  fcaled edges, and lap over each other; fo that  all



   the  futures in the Temple are fquamous.







6. The  Transverse Suture, is one which  runs  acrofs the face, through the middle



   of  the  orbits,  and over  the root  of the nofe, and the end of it appears here,



   joining the  angular proceffes  of  the frontal bone, and of the cheek bone.
jy. The Zygomatic Suture.
FIGURE  IL 
6
OF  THE  BONE5.
                              FIGURE    II.

                       THE   FCETAL  SCULL.

 JCXplains the FceTAL  Scull ;----where we find  the  holes, proceffes, and  other
    marks, very  imperfect :  Of courfe a  fhorter and more  fimple explanation  will
    ferve.

 A  Is The Frontal Bone;  and  the letter is fo placed, as to mark the central point,
    where the offification begins; the offification being more perfect at this point, and
    going in  a radiated form  towards all the edges  of the bone, leaves the offification
    very imperfect  all  round the edge of the bone ; and  at (^) there is  a  difference
    betwixt  this  and the Adult  Scull, for here  the  cavity  of  the Frontal  Sinus  is-
    not  yet  formed.

B   The Parietal  Bone; where alfo  the  letter marks the center  of  offification; the
    radii  are  very plain; and  the  edges are feen imperfect,  and  membraneous, leaving
    all the futures imperfect.  The ridge, which divides the  bone, is not yet formed;
    for the Temporal Mufcle  has  not yet  begun  to mark  the bone.

C   The  Occipital Bone ; where the letter  again in this bone, points to  an  offifying
    central point.

D   The Temporal Bone ; where many  parts, marked in  the Adult Scull, as the
    Styloid and Maftoid proceffes,—the fmall hole,—and  the  marks of the Temporal
    Mufcle, are all wanting.   And the ring (o) of the Meatus  Auditorius Externus,
                                                                                is 
                           BOOK FIRST, PLATE FIRST.                         7




   is merely a ring;  is fixed to the bone only, and not joined with it;  and is here



   feen covered with the  fmooth Membrane of the Tympanum, or  Drum of  the




   Ear.







E   The Cheek  Bone ;  which, like all the other bones, is very round, and  its edges




   blunt and  ill defined.







F  The Small  Bones  of the  Nofe.







G  The Upper  Jaw Bone ; where,  fince the teeth are not yet come up, the Alveolar



   or  Socket Procefs is not  formed, nor even marked.







H  The Lower Jaw Bone; where  alfo the Alveolar Procefs is  wanting, and where



   the  branch of the jaw bone does not rife  from the  bafis, or lower line, with a



   bold and acute angle, but  goes  obliquely off, more horizontal, and more in  the




   fame diredion with the  reft of the bone.







And laftly, the  chief  point to be  obferved, in  the  fcull  of a  child,  is  the  open-



   ings of the head ;  for the parietal  bone is  fo incomplete  round all its edges,



   that it leaves  all the  futures imperfed  and membraneous, and leaves fome open-



   ings particularly  large,  (aaad) mark the four corners of  the greater  opening



   upon the top of  the head; which, from  the hypothefis  of its ferving  as  a  drain,



    is called the  Fontanelle, or  Fountain of Moifture.  It has four angles, is formed



   by  four croffing futures ; the Sagittal Suture, defending quite to the nofe.  The



    Fontanelle is covered  only with a  thin and delicate  membrane; it  is named the



    Greater Anterior, or  True Fontanelle, the opening of the head.







                                                                       (b) Marks 
 8                               OF THE  B)NES.





(I)  Mraks  a  lefs  opening,  which  is  formed  by the  meeting of  the Lambdoldji'J



    and Sagittal Sutures ;  but, as  they do  not  crofs,  there are here but 3 converg-



    ing  lines ; three angles or points  of  bone; no perceptible  opening, but  the bones



    rather lappirg  over  each  other.   It  is  over  this  point that  the  hair turns  in a



    fort of vortex,  if we may be  allowed to explain  it  fo ;  and  though the  greater



    Fontanelle was  thought to prefent in labour,  this back Fontanelle  is the  true pre-



    senting point.








(<:) Marks  a fmall  Fontanelle, or  membraneous  interflice before the  ear; and







(d) Marks another fmall Fontanelle behind the ear, in the place of the Additamentum



    Suturae  Squamofae;  and  it  is  the more to  be remarked, as  it  is  through this



    little Fontanelle, that  the accoucheur opens the head in  the rare coincidence  of



    preternatural pofture  of the child, and deformed Pelvis;  where after delivering the



   body,  it is impoffible to get the head  out: and he  prefers  this  opening,  and fhuns



   the  back Fontanelle,  left,  in piercing there, he fliould cut  the  ligament of the



   neck, and fo lofe his hold of the head.
PLATE  II. 
 
BOXES
I'L.U.
j+ifofrf?*
V
IV
FiaUtludjyrZmupnan k JUu 1604
Br>t/f {culp 
BOOK FIRST, PLATE SECOND.
9
PLATE     II.
This Plate explains tbt Text Bxob, from Page 5a, to Page 65.
-fcxpLAiNs the  individual bones of  the Cranium,  the Frontal,  Pari-
    etal,  and Occipital Bones.
                      FIGURES   I.   and    II.

XLXplain the Os Frontis,  or  bone of the forehead.  The numbers  apply  equally
   to either figure;  and every number wanting in  the firft figure,  muft be fought
   for in the  fecond.

1. The Superciliary Ridges, on which the eye  brows are placed, and which  form
   the frontal finufes.   The  ikin is  very  firmly attached to the bone, all along this
   ridge; and the Frontal Mufcles arife  here. The many fmall dots, which are feen all
   along this  ridge,  are the marks of  many little arteries, entering here  to  nourifh
   the bone.

2. Points  to that hole which  is  called the Superciliary  Hole, for  it permits the
   fmall Superciliary Artery  and  Nerve to come out from the focket of the eye to
                                      B                                   turn
Jl 
  I0                            OF THE BONES.
    turn  upwards upon the  forehead, where they take the names  of  Frontal Arterj
    and Nerve. On the one fide it is a fair  round hole, on the  other fide it is a notch
    only.

 3.  The  two Internal Angular Processes.

 4.  The  two External Angular Processes.

 5.  The  Hollow behind the External Angular Procefs, in which the Temporal  Mufcle
    lies.

 6.  The  Nasal Process ; Handing  up  fharp  and rough, betwixt the two  internal
    angular proceffes.

 7.  The Bump, at the inner end of the Superciliary Ridge,  marking the  place  of
    the Frontal Sinus,  and indicating alfo the fize of that cavity,  by the degree  of
    rifing.

 8.  The Mouth of  the Frontal Sinus ; where  it opens into the Nofe.

9.  —is to be  found on  Figure II.  only,  and marks the Spine,  or Ridge  to which
    the falx, or perpendicular  partition of the Dura Mater is fixed;  and (a) fhows
    the groove, in which  the ridge very generally terminates.

 ic. The  two Orbitary Plates; which  are thofe two thin parts of the bone, which
    extend over the eye, fo as to form the roof for the eye, and the floor  for the fore
    lobes  of the brain; and it  is by the continual preflure betwixt thefe two parts,
   that the Orbitary Proceffes become  fo extremely thin, that they are quite tranfparent.
         z                                                            (J>) Marks 
                         BOOK FIRST, PLATE SECOND.                       II
(b) Marks the fpace or diftance betwixt the two Orbitary Processes ;  which fpace
   is occupied by the (Ethmoid Bone, which thus lies over the root of the Nofe.

11.  The mark of the Cartilaginous pully, through which  the tendon of  the Obliquus
   Oculi  runs; and

12.  Is the Superficial hollow  for  lodging the Lachrymal Gland in  the upper part of
   the Orbit.

(c) Upon Figure II. fhows the blind hole where the falx begins. This blind hole fome-
   times belongs  to  the  Frontal  Bone,  fometimes to the CEthmoidal Bone, but lyes
   moft  commonly in  the middle,  betwixt the (Ethmoid and Frontal Bones.
                            FIGURE    III.

OHows the two Ossa Parietalia, or Parietal Bones, feparated from the other bones
   of the Cranium, and alfo parted a little from each other,  fo as to ihow that ferrated
   edge, which  forms the Sagittal  Sutures.

i.  Shows  the ferrated edges, forming the Sagittal Suture.

2.  The  edge of both bones,  which, in a femicircular form,  produce by  their  union
   with the Frontal Bone,  the Coronal Suture.
B  *                               3- The 
 12                             OF THE BONES.
3.  The thin femicircular edges, to which  the Temporal bones are joined, forming the
   Temporal or Squamous Suture.

4. The Spinous  Process ; or largeft and moft  pointed corner of  the Parietal Bone.

5. The Radiated Surface, upon  which the great Temporal Mufcle lies; (a)  mark-
   ing that ridge of the  bone, which divides it into two parts, and beyond which the
   origin of the  Temporal Mufcle does not extend.

 6.  The place where the Artery of  the Dura Mater firft makes its impreffion, t>i%.  at
    that fharp corner of the  bone,  which ftioots down into  the temple.

 N. B.  The  only hole, which  belongs to the Parietal  Bone, cannot be feen  in this
    view, but  is  to be found in the  firft plate.
                      FIGURES   IV.  and  V.

.EjXplain the Os Occipitis.  It is here fliown in two oppofite points of view, from
   within, and from without; the letters and figures  apply to either figure ; and the
   fourth figure naturally takes the lead, as  the defcription of the Occipital Bone al-
   ways begins with the external furface.

Figure IV. The outer furface.
1.  The 
                          BOOK FIRST,  PLATE SECOND.                      13
1.  The  Upper  Transverse Spine,  formed for the implantation of the Trapezius and
   Complexus ;  or produced, according to fome, by the adion of thefe great mufcles.

2.  The  Smaller and Lower Spine, formed  by the Redi  Mufcles;—fmall  mufcles
   which come  up from the firft Vertebra to lay hold on the Occiput.

3.  The  Perpendicular Spine, which divides the mufcles of the oppofite fides from
   each  other ; and by  this croffing, thefe two  fpines are named,  1:1 general terms,
   the Crucial Spines.

4.  The  Great  Tuberosity,  fometimes called the  Spinous  Procefs  of  the Occipital
   Bone.  («)  The Cuneiform Procefs, which meets the Os Sphaenoides.   (£)  The
   Condyle, or Joint Procefs, on which the head moves, at leaft in the nodding motion. '
   (c)  The Foramen Magnum,  through  which  the  fpinal  marrow paffes out from.
   the  fcull.   (d)  The Hole  for  the 9th,  or  Lingual,  pair of Nerves.   fe)  The
   fmaller Hole behind the  Condyle, for the paffage not of any nerve, but of a cervi-
   cal vein going in towards the  Great Lateral Sinus.

In Figure V.  is explained the inner furface of  the OccipitdpBone ;  and the figure* are
   continued,  that  the  defcription  may go on ftill in the fame order.

}.  Is the ridge to  which the Tentorium,  or membrane which fupports the brain, and
     efends the Cerebellum,  is fixed.

6.  The  two  furrows, in which  lie the  Right and Left Lateral  Sinufes, making this
   broad groove.

7.  The  two hollows  for lodging the backmoft  lobes of the brain,  above the place
   of the Tentorium or fupporting membrane.
         2                                                               8. Two 
J4                              OF  THE BONES.





8.  Two fimilar  hollow:-, for lodging the two lobes of the Cerebellum, below the place




   of the Tentorium or crofs membrane.







 9. The mark of a fmall falx or procefs  of the Dura  Mater ;  which is like the great



    one, and like it contains a fmall finus or vein in it, the groove of which fmall funis




    is  eafily feen  here.







 (a)  The Cuneiform Procefs.   (c)  The  Foramen  Magnum.    (d) The  hole  for  the



    ninth pair of Nerves.   (/)  The hollow or  thimble-like  cavity, in  which  the



    end of  the Lateral Sinus lies ; for at this point the finus  turns  fuddenly round,



    efcapes  from the fcull,  and getting down into the neck,  lofes the name of Sinus,



    and takes that of Internal Jugular Vein.







 (V) There was  left fticking to  the end of  this bone  a fragment of  the Sphoenoid



    bone, fo that at this  point the  Cuneiform proceffes  of  the Occipital and Sphoenoid



     bones  are fo united, that to  feparate them (in the adult at leaftj, we  muft break



     them ;  and in breaking thefe bones, the great cell of the Spcenoid bone, or part of it,



     ftuck to the Cuneiform procefs of the Occipital bone ; and this cell is marked (g).
PLATE 
 
BOXES

/*/,.  ///.
2     g
tuhluhtdjor Longman k JUti. jSo4.

 
BOOK FIRST,  PLATE THIRD.
*5
PLATE      III.
This Plate explains the Text Book, from  Page 65, to Page 94.
HxplAins much of the difficult Anatomy of the Scull;  for thefe bones,
   the Temporal, CEthmoid, Sphoenoid. and Upper Jaw Bones, have
   many curious  and intricate  parts.
                      FIGURES   I.   and  II.

Hxplain the Temporal Bone ; and now again the letters  and numbers belong in
   common to both figures; to Figure I. which explains  all the parts that are upon the
   outfide of the Temporal Bone, and alfo to Figure II. which explains all that  fide
   of the Temporal Bone which is towards the brain.

The  Great Divisions  of the Temporal  Bone, are; (a) The fquamous, or thinner
   part, forming the Squamous or  Scaled Suture.   (F) The Pars  Petrofa, or Rock
   Part, which  is,  indeed, in the child, a diftind bone,  (c) The Occipital Angle, or
   that  corner of the bone,  which is joined to the Os-  Occipitis,  by the Additamen-
   tum Suturse Squamofae.
                                                                        The 
I ft
OF  THE  BONES.
                  The Processes of the Temporal  Bone  are,

i .  The Zygomatic Process, ftretching forwards to meet that of the cheek bone.

2.  The Styloid Process, ftanding downwards over the throat, to give origin to ma-
   ny of the mufcles of the throat.

3.  The Vaginal Process, which is  a kind of rough  rifing  at  the root of the Sty-
   loid Procefs.

4.  The Mastoid or Mamillary Process,  which is not formed  in the child; which
   confifts of cells ; it is felt immediately behind the ear, belongs to that organ,  and
   is perforated (fo it  is propofed at leaft) in certain kinds of deafnefs.

5.  The Auditory Process, which  is 'named a procefs, becaufe it is in the child a
   diftind part, and ftill is in the adult (as reprefented here) a prominent ring.

          The Holes of the  Temporal Bone relate chiefly to  the Ear.

1.  (d) Marks the  Meatus Auditorius Externus, the outer Auditory  hole, upon
   which the drum of the ear  is braced down.

2.  (/) The Internal Auditory Hole, or Meatus Auditorius Internus, by which the
   Auditory Nerve has  accefs to the Ear.

3.  (f)  A fmall  hole for admitting a delicate thread-like nerve,  which returns from
                                                                        without 
                           BOOK FIRST, PLATL THIRD.                        I 7





    without into the Cranium  again, and joins  the Portio Dara, or hard  part of  the



    Auditory Nerve while it is going along the paffages within the Ear.








4. (g)  The Stylo-Mastoid Hole; which has its name,  from its being at the root of



    the  Styloid and Maftoid proceffes ; it  gives paffage to the Portio Dura, or that fmall



    hard Nerve, which  accompanying the Auditory  Nerve,  goes along wTith it into  the



    paffage of  the  Ear; but,  while the Portio Mollis, or proper Auditory Nerve  re-



    mains within the Ear,  this  Portio Dura, a diftind Nerve,  and deftined for the face,.



    comes out by the Stylo-Mastoid Hole,  under the ear, and fpreads  upon the cheeks








5. (fc)  Marks  the ragged end  of the Petrous Portion.   The  bony part of that canal,



    named the  Eustachian Tube  ends  here; but  the  Tube  is chiefly Cartilaginous,



    and  therefore in this the dried bone, its openings  appear quite irregular  and rough;



    and  when  the  ftudent looks for the  Euftachian  Tube, he  finds  nothing but con-



    fufed  and   ragged  openings.   The mouth of the Euftachian Tube, as  it appears



    when dried, is feen in  its right place, Vid. PI. VI.








6. (i) The hole for the Carotid  Artery  is  alfo to be  looked for at  this  point,



    though it  cannot be  feen in  this particular  view,  unlefs  the end  of the Petrous



    Portion  were  turned  more diredly  towards the eye.







(£) Is the Great  Furrow,  which  the  Lateral  Sinus,  or  great internal vein makes,



    forming a  thimble-like cavity  at (/),  by  the laft fudden turn which it makes



   before leaving  the fcull.







(tn)  Is a very fmall Furrow, formed by a fmall Sinus, or vein,  which  goes along the



   ridge of the Petrous Portion.
C
7. («) I* 
 l3                              OF  THE BONES.





7.  (»)  Is the laft or  7th hole of  the Temporal Bone.  This is the fmall hole,  formerly



   motioned for  the paffage of a trifling vein from without into the Lateral  Sinus.








Ar. B.  The  joint  or Condyle of the. lower jaw  is  fet  in  the  hollow (0) juft under




    the root  of the  Zygomatic  Procefs.
                      [  I  G  U 11 E S   III.   AND   IV.







JC,Xplain the (Ethmoid  Bone ; Figure  III.  fhowing chiefly  the upper furface of



   the bone,  which fupports  the fore  part  of  the  brain, and  which  is marked by



   the C rift a Galli  (3) ; and  Figure  IV. fhows  that  confufed furface, which  hangs



   over  the  root or upper part  of.. the  Nofe,  and whofe fpongy  bones, (dd) form a



   part of the Organ of Smell.







fa)  The  Cribriform  Plate is  the center, as it were,  of this bone, to which all the



   other parts are referred ; this  plate is perforated by the  Olfadory  Nerves, and it



   is from this horizontal  and perforated plate,  that the whole  bone has its name.







The parts belonging to  the CEthmoid Bone are,







 1. (£)  Is the Perpendicular Procefs, which  ftands  up from the Cribriform  Plate, to-



    wards the brain ; and is named Crista Galli.








 2. (c)  Is the Nasal Plate; which forms the Septum or  partition of the Nofe,  ftand-



    ing perpendicularly downwards  and forwards, as the C rift a Galli ftands upwards :



    the  Crifta Galli and the Nafal Plate,  are exadly oppofite to each other.




                                                                      3.  (dd) The 
                           BOOK FI3.ST,  PLATE THIRD.                         19


 3. {dd) The two upper Spongy B. nes ;  they are named fpongy, from their conftitution,

    for  th^y  confift of cells ; they  are called  OiTa  Spongiofa  Superiora, to diiluiguiih

    them  from  two fimilar bones, which  hang in the lower part of  the Nofe.   They

    are  fpoken  of as diftind bones, while  they  are  but parts of the (Ethmoid  Bon?.




 4. (e)  The  Orbitary  Plate  of  the (Ethmoid Bone ;  which, as  it  is inclofed a-

    mong the other bones  of  the Orbit, feems  to  be a diftind bone furrounded by  a

    peculiar  future,  and fo is  named the Os  Planum ; though  it is merely the fiat fide

    of the (Ethmoid Bone.




 5. (/*)  Marks the  place v/here the Os Unguis  fhould be  i'esn ; but it is  pulled away

    to fhow  the numerous cells of the  (Ethmoid Bone.  Thefe cells are divided into

    two fets,  one fet attached  to  the  Orbitary  Plate, or flat  fquare fide of the (Eth-

    moid  Bone,  the other fet to  the Spongy  Bone.




6. Qj-)  Figure IV.  fhows that fet of the cells, which more particularly belongs to the

   Spongy Bone,   and  (Z») Figure III. fhows  the  ceils  opened  from   above,   to

   give a view of thofe, which more  particularly belong to the Orbitary Plate.




Whatever farther  is neeeMary  to  the demonftration of the (Ethmoid Bone,  is to be

   found  in Plates V. and VI. where the ceils are particularly well explained.
                      FIGURE   V.  and  VI.


—*
IIXplain the Sphoenoid, Pteregoid, or Wedge-like Bone ; it is named Pteregoid

  from  its refemblance to a bat, and is  fo prefented here, as to fuggeft the likenefs.

                                     C 2                                 Figure 
 2 0                             OF THE  BONES.
   Figure V. fhows the back view of the bone, -viz.  that which is turned towards  the-
   fcull;—Figure VI. fhows  the  front view, viz.  that  which is conneded with the
   bones of the face.

                               Its Processes are,

i. The Alae, or wings, commonly  named the Temporal Procefles, for they lie in the
   Temples; the Temporal Mufcles  lie upon them, and their upper edge is  fquamous
   like  the edge of the Temporal bone,  and forms part of  the Squamous Suture.

2. Marks that fmooth  furface of this  Temporal Process, which,  being  turned to-
   wards the eye,  enters into the Orbit, and fo is named  the Orbitary Procefs of the
   Sphoenoid Bone.

3. The  fmall  and  fharp Spinous Process.

4. The  hook-like point  of the Spinous  Procefs,  which is often named the Styloid Pro-
   cefs.

 5. The External Pteregoid Processes ;  which  are two flat and broad plates.

 6. The two internal Pteregoid Processes ; which  ftand off a little higher, and more
    dired  from  the body of the bone;  they are fmaller ; and  terminate in a little
    hook.   The Pteregoid Mufcles, which  go to  the  lower jaw, arife from the proceffes
    themfelves ;  and the Tensor Palati  Muscle turns  round this little hook.

 7. The Azygous,  or fingle  Procefs; which  is fingle, becaufe  it  ftands  out from the
    middle of the bone.  It forms part of the partition for  the Nofe, and is thence named
    Nasal Process.
                                                                         8. The 
                          BOOK FIRST,  PLATE THIRD.                       IE
8. The  two Anterior Clynoid Processes.

9. The two  Posterior Clynoid Processes.

10. The fpace bounded by  thefe four  Clynoid  Processes ; "which, from refembling a
    Turkifla faddle, is named,  Sella Turcica.

11. The two little wings of Ingrafias, called the Transverse Spinous  Processes.

The cells, which occupy  the  body of this bone, lying under the Sella Turcica, are
    to be feen at (g-) Figure VI. and  again in Plate VI.
The Holes proceed next  in order, and  are marked alfo with a fuit of numbers, that
   the demonftration may be continued and entire.

1. (a) The two Optic Holes, tranfmitting the Optic Nerves; which are the fecond pair
   of the fcull; for the firft pair, viz.  the Olfadory  Nerves pafs through the CEth-
   moid Bone.

2.  (£) The  Foramen Lace rum ; or wide  hole, which  permits the third, the fourth,
   the firft branch  of the fifth, and the fixth pairs of Nerves to pafs ; for all thefe are
   fmaller  nerves,  deftined for the Mufcles of the Eye, and enter thus at the bottom
   of the focket,  while  the fecond pair is the proper Optic Nerve.

3. (c) The Foramen Rotundum ; it  tranfmits  the fecond branch  of the fifth pair
   which goes to the upper Jaw.
                                                                      4.  09 is 
 12,                          OF I HE B3NES.





4.  (d) Is the Foramen Ovale, (larger than the Foramen Rotundam) which traufn.its




    the third branch of the fifth pair, going to the lower jaw.








 5.  (i) The Spinous Hole, the Foramen Spinale, which is a fmall hole in the very point




    or tip of the Spinous Procefs.  It is not  for the transmiflion of a nerve ;  but for the



    entrance of that fmall artery which belongs to the Dura Muter, and which goes along



    the  inner furface  of the  Parietal Bone, marking  it with  its furrow.   A briftle is



    patted through this hole in one fide, to fhow the courfe of the artery.








 6:  The fixth Hole.  The Pteregoidean, or Vidian Hole,  is not to be feen  in this



    view ; but is to be  feen in the next Plate, IV. where it is marked with its proper




    number, 6.








 (J) Reprefents the rough fui face where the cuneiform or  wedge-like part of this Sphoe-



    noid Bone has been broken off from the wedge-like procefs of tl^e Occipital Bone.








 Cg) Marks the Cells  of the Sphoenoid Bone, which are occafionally very large, as in this



    Bone ; and which make all the bone hollow under the Cella Turcica.








 (/>) Shows where the Falate Bone had adhered to  the Sphoenoid ;—and the Palate Bone,.




    being torn away, has hroker>,  and left  fome  of its fmall cells fticking here to  the



    Sphcencid Bone.








 .V. B.   The Cells of the Falate Bone are explained in the next plate.








 This  Bene is conneded ;----at (/) Figure VI. with  the (Ethmoid Bone before ;—at  (/")



    Figure V. with the Os Occipitis  behind ;—at  (1.) with  the  Temporal  Bones in the



    Temples.   The Spinous Procefs (3.) is locked  in betwixt the Temporal and Occipital




                                                                        Bones ;---- 
                       BOOK FIRST,  PLATE THIRD.                       2J
Bones ;—and the Pteregoid Proceffes (5.) are joined to the Palate Bone, and form
the back of the Noftrils.   Pide next plate, where the Pteregoid Proceffes are feen in
their place.
                     FIGURE    VII.   and   VIII.


 1  he VII. and VIII. figures of this plate explain the Upper Jaw Bone ; Figure VIII.
    fhowing its Internal Surface, viz. that  next to  the  nofe,  with the wide  opening of
    the Antrum, or Great Cavity of the Jaw.  Figure VII.  fhowing the outfide of the
    Bone, explaining the outfide walls of the Antrum,  or Great Cavity :  fo that, by
    comparing the two fides of the bone, one can  eafily underftand the great extent of
    the Antrum, or Cavity ; and how pulling a tooth will open the way for matter flow-
    ing out from it.

 1. The Nasal Process which rifes up on each fide to form the fides of the  nofe.   The
    Arch forms the fides of the nofe ; and the rough pointed ending of this Nafal Procefs
    is conneded with the Os Frontis.

2. Is.the Orbitary Plate, or that plate which forms the floor of the eye, and the roof
    of the Antrum,  or Cavity.

3. The Malar Process,  or that broad  rough furface upon which  the Cheek  Bone
   rcfts.
                                                                          4.  Thr 
 24                            OF  THE BONES.




4.  The Alveolar Process, or that projeding femicircle, which holds the teeth ; thence



   named Alveolar, or Socket Procefs.







5.  The Palate Plate,  or  Procefs ; of which we fee the  rough edge only,  viz.  that



   edge by which the Middle Palate  Suture, the future  in the roof of the mouth,  is.



   formed.







V. B.  The Palate plate is feen full in Plates IV. V. and  VI.







6.  The Antrum Maxillare, or Higmorianum.  This great cavity appears with a ve-



    ry wide opening here in the naked bone ;  but this opening is covered in the entire



    fcull, both by the lower  fpongy bone, and by the nafal plate of the palate bone.



    This nafal plate of the palate bone is left in this drawing covering a part of the An-



    trum ; the reft of this opening is naturally covered by  a  membrane,  which leaves



    but  one  fmall hole.







The Nafal Plate of the Palate Bone  which  is left  fticking upon the Antrum is mark-



    ed (a).







(£) Marks the only Hole of the  Upper Jaw Bone.   It  is named the Infra-Orbitary



    Hole.  A chief nerve of  the face comes  out here, named (with its hole)  the Infra-



    Orbitary Nerve.







The proper Infra-Orbitary Hole  is marked (£) ; and the  Canal by which  the  nerve



    comes down is marked (c) : at this place the nerve lies under  the  eye, upon the



    floor of the  orbit,—making a very large groove  and hole upon this Orbitary Plate of



    the  Upper Jaw Bone ; for arteries running along  bones do not make deeper grooves



    than the nerves do.




                                                                           X. B.
*• 
                           bIiOK FIRST,  PLATE THIRD.                       25
N. B.  This Infra-Orbitary Nerve is a chief branch of the Superior Maxillary Nerve.
(d) Marks the Foramen Incisivum ;  fo named from its being juft above  the Incifores
   or cutting teeth.  It is alfo named Anterior Palatine Hole ;  it is complete only when
   the two jaw bones are joined, as in Plate IV. Fig.  III. at (I) which marks this an-
   terior Palatine hole.
(e) Marks the courfe of the Lachrymal Dud, or tube which conveys the tears,  which,
   after  having paffed  through the  Os Unguis,  makes  this  groove in the  Nafal
   Procefs  of the upper  jaw  bone,  and  ends  or  opens  into  the Nofe juft where
   this dud  ends.
D
PLATE 
 
 
'boxes
PL.IV
" j
TubUttudjbr Lcngtmui k Mm ■ 1604.
»c     hi   i - 
BOOK FIRST,  PLATE FOURTH.
27
PLATE     IV.
This Plate emplaint the Text Book, from Page 85, to Page 104.
JUXplains the  Bones  of the Face, and the  Lower  Jaw Bone.


                             FIGURE  I.

XvEpresents the  two Nasal Bones, laid to  each other in their natural diredion;
   by which is explained,
1.  The Nasal Suture ; joining thefe two Nafal Bones to each other.
2.  The Serrated  Surface, by which they are joined  with the Os Frontis, at the
   roughnefs round the root of the Nafal Procefs ; which union forms part of the Tranf-
   verfe Suture.
3.  The Rough Surface, by which they are joined to the two cartilages that form the
   Alae Nafi, or Wings of the Nofe.
4.  The Rough Surface, by which they are fixed to the Nafal Proceffes  of the upper
   jaw bone.

                            FIGURE   II.

XiXPLAiNS the Os Unguis, where both the drawings fhow that furface which appears
   in the orbit; and in both of them is feen,
                                      D  2                             !• The 
 2g                              OF THE BONEt.
i.  The plain furface upon which the eye rolls ;  and
I.  The Groove which holds the Nafal Dud.

                             FIGURE    III.

 HXplains,  by a ufeful  drawing,  many very important parts on the bans  of  the
    fcull.   (a) the Foramen Magnum : (&) the Condyle :  (c) the two Pteregoid Pro-
    ceffes ;  (d) the Hook of the Inner Pteregoid  Procefs,  fnowing  how  the  Tendon
    of the  Circumflex Mufcle- may twift  round it:  (<?) the  Styloid  Procefs:  (/)  the
    Mamillary Procefs: (g) that  part of the Palate,  or roof of the  mouth,  which is
    formed by the upper jaw bones :  (&) the fmaller part  of  the Palate, formed by the
    proper palate bones; (i)  the Middle Palate Suture : (k) the  Tranfverfe Palate Suture :
    (J) the Anterior Palatine Hole, or Foramen Incifivum : (m) the two Pofterior Palatine
    Holes, tranfmitting the nerves for the palate: (n) the Vomer, or bone forming the
    feptum or partition which divides  the two noftrils: (o)  the two Upper Spongy Bones,
    viz. thofe belonging to  the GUthmoid Bone, hanging in their  places high in the nof-
    trils :  (j7) the two  Lower Spongy Bones,  which  are independent bones hung by a
    hook upon  the fide of  the Antrum Highmoriahum, and confequently hanging very
     low in the noftril.


                    FIGURES   IV.   V.   and   VL

  H/Xplajn  the  Palate  Bones; where Figures  IV. and  V. fhow the  two Palate
     Bones feparated from e.ich other,  and from the  other bones.  Figure VI.  fhows the
     two  Palate Bones joined.  On thefe drawings,  the fame  figures  ftill mark  the fame
     points,—the numbers marking Proceffes, and the letters  running under them mark-
      ing as ufual the lefTer parts,
                                                                          i.  Shows 
                          BOOK  FIRST, PLATE FOURTH                       2Q




i.  Shows the Palate Plate,  or  ?rocefs of the Palate Bones; and in Figure VI. the



   palate plates are joined,  fo as to for ai the back part of the middle  palate  future;



   (7) is the broad rough furface by which  the two  palate bones are  oppofed to each



   other, and which forms the Middle Palate  Suture:  (r)is the middle point, from which



   the Uvula, Pap, cr Gur^ulfon hangs down.



2.  Is the Pteregoid Process of the palate bones,  having  a little hollow into which the



   Pteregoid Proceffes of the Sphoenoid p>one are received.



3.  Is the Nasal Plates, which lie within the noftrils; and which, by lying flat upon



   the fides of the Antrum Highmorianum,  clofe it in part.



4.  Is the Orbitary Processes  ; for the Nafal Procefs lies up along all the fide of the



   noftril,  and ends in a broader knob,  which enters into the focket of the eye at its



   deepeft part, and is there named Orbitary Procefs.



5.  Marks the Cell or Cells of  the Palate Bone, which are in its Orbitary Procefs,  and



   which are joined to thofe of the Sphoenoid bone.










                    FIGURES    VII.   and  VIIL







 I he two Spongy Bones.



Figure VII. Explains the  rolled and  fpongy appearance  of the  fpongy bone.  It re-



   prefents that furface which is turned outwards, i. e. towards the feptum of the nofe.



Figure VIII. fhows  that flatter fide which  is  turned towards the Antrum  Highmo-



   rianum, and clofes it;  and  the letter (j)  marks the fmall point, or  hook-like pro-



   cefs, by w7hich this lower fpongy bone is hung upon  the edge of the opening  into



   the Antrum Highmorianum. (t) is the fore end of the fpongy bone, which is turn-



   ed  forwards in the nofe, covering  the  lower end of the  nafal dud; fo  that in



   feeking to clear the dud with a probe,  we muft pafs it under this point.   («) js



   the other end  of the fpongy  bone, which is turned backwards in the noftrils.



                                                                             The 
 30                            OF  THE  BONES.
    The pofition of the  fpongy bone in the  noftrils is well explained  in Figure III.
    and the fore part of  the fame fpongy bone is feen in Plate VI. Figure II,


                            FIGURE    IX.

IXEpresents the Vomer.
i.  The Groove, in its upper  part, by which it fits aftride upon the  Azygous Proceffes
    of the CEthmoid and  Sphoenoid Bones.
2.  Its Lower Groove by which it fits down  upon the rifing point of the Maxillary and
    palate  bones:  and (r) Figure VI.  fhows how it  ftands upon  the palate  bones.
    The letter (s>) Figure VI.  fhows the Great Groove turned upwards to be fixed  to
    the Azygous Proceffes  of the CEthmoid and Sphoenoid bones, and the  letter («)
    Figure III.  fhows the Vomer in its right place in the nofe, dividing the noftrils.
3.  The Ragged Grooved Surface, which looks forwards and receives the plate  of car-
    tilage,  which completes  the partition betwixt the noftrils.


                             FIGURE    X.

l\ Epresents the Cheek Bone.
1.  Shows the Upper Orbitary Procefs.
2.  Marks  the Inferior  or Lower Orbitary  Procefs.
3.  The Maxillary Procefs.
4.  The Zygomatic Procefs ; and
5.  Marks  the plate which forms the lower and fore part of the focket for the eye, and fo
   is named the Internal Orbitary Procefs*

            =                                                          FIGURES 
BOOK  FIRST, PLATS FOURTH.
3*
                     FIGURES   XL  and   XII.

X-Xplain the lower jaw bone, in two views ,  but every Figure applies  to each bone,
    and the Figures proceed in the order of the Text Book.
I. The Chin;  the lines comprehend  the Chin  in their courfe, and they terminate fo as
    to mark the fmall Mental Holes on both fides of the  Chin, where the nerves, after
    having furnifhed  the teeth, come out upon the face.
2. Marks  the line of the  Bafe of the Jaw,  extending from the Chin to the Angle.
3. Marks the  Angle of the  Jaw, which is  irregular and knotty, by the infertion of the
    great Maffeter Mufcle.
 4.  The Coronoid  Proceffes of the jaw.
 5.  The  Condoloid or Articulating Proceffes;  (j) the great hole  which receives the
    lower  Maxillary Nerve.   We fee here likewife the deep and wide groove that leads
    to the nerve;  and another deep, but fmaller groove,  which fhows where  the nerve
    which belongs to the tongue, departs  from  the  great nerve,  and runs along the
    inner  fide  of  the jaw bone  betwixt  it and the tongue.
 4. Is the Alveolar or Socket Process,,  with the teeth in it.
PLATE 
 
 
Out/no for /'/*. I-
BOSKS.
TublUhtd ,/br Zonqrnan i JU<» *#<>+. 
 
Box lis
PL.\.
i^->£*.
ru*lifluJ .fitfZim/nn.m is Mitt JA"4. 
BOOK FIRST, PLATE FIFTH.
33
PLATE      V.
This Plate explains the Text Book, in all the Chapters upon the Seull.
IS a  general  view  of the  Cranium,——explaining and connecting  the
    demonflrations of  the individual  parts.


                          FIGURE      I.

X N this view, where the  Cranium or Scull Cap is cut off, and the bafis feen from within,
    the thing that firft ftrikes the eye is,—the formal and regular divifion of the  Cra-
    nium into three hollows (i.  2. 3.) ;  and each of thefe is like a  ftage or deck, the
    one  lower  than the other.
(1.) Is  the fore part of the bafis of the Scull, the ftialloweft and moft fuperficial hollow.
    It is formed chiefly by the Frontal, (Ethmoidal and Sphoenoidal Bones.   It is marked
    with undulating lines, correfponding with the inteftine-like convolutions of the brain.
    — This divifion  fnpports the Fore Lobes of the brain, and gives paffage  to the
    Olfadory and Optic Nerves.
(2.) Is  a large hollow, cup-like, deeper than  the firft;----lying under the temple;—
    formed chiefly by the wings of the Temporal and Sphoenoidal, and by the corners of the
    Frontal  and  Parietal  Bones.  This holds the Middle Lobes of the brain,  contains
    the  Petrous  part of  the Temporal Bone;—gives  out all the  fmaller Nerves be-
                                     E                                   longing 
 34                              OF  THE  BONES.
   longing to the Eye, and all the great nerves belonging to the Upper and Lower Jaws ;
   it gives alfo the  Auditory Nerves, which enter here into the Petrous Portion of  the
   Temporal Bone.
(3).  Is a ftage lower ftill, being ^the deepeft hollow of the three ;  is formed chiefly by the
   cup of the  Occipital  Bone, and by a fmall part of the Temporal Bones ; — and as
   the Cerebellum fupports the  back lobes of the brain, this hollow may reprefent
   the back lobes,  or  the third divifion of  the  brain;—fo  this  laft hollow con-
   tains  the Cerebellum;  gives out the  Lingual Nerves,  which  pafs  through  a
   hole of  the Os Occipitis ;  and  fends out the  Spinal Marrow through  the Fora-
   men Magnum, or Great Hole.
                          FIRST   DIVISION.

In the firft  divifion are feen  the parts and  holes  of  the Frontal,  CEthmoid al, and
                               Sphoenoidal Bones,

                                    Frontal Bone.

(a)  Marks- the Cancelli, or Diploe  of the  Frontal Bone fo cut as to make the Cancelli
   appear  very wide ;  bnt that proceeds  from having cut the fcull very low, which
   has taken  off  the outer layer of the Orbitary Procefs.   (7>) Marks  the  regular
   or proper Frontal Sinufes, which are thus underftood to be  like enlarged cells of the
   Diploe; while (c) fhows  a part  of  the cells going down  into the Orbitary Plates :
   for the finufes fometimes extend thus all over the eye, as in this fcull; and the letter
   C0» while ll P°ints  t0 this extenfion of the Frontal Sinus,  is  fo placed  as to  mark
   the  undulating forms, which  the lobes of the  brain give to  this thin Orbitary
   plate of the Frontal Bone.
                                                                     CEthmoidal 
BOOK  FIRST, PLATE FIFTH.
35
                                (Ethmoidal Bone.

There  is  incafed betwixt  (c c) the Orbitary Plates of the  Frontal  Bone, the  Cri-
   briform plate of the CEthmoidal  Bone;—where  {d) marks the  Cribiform Plate
   with its  numerous fmall holes  for tranfmitting the Olfadory Nerves.   (<?)  Marks
   the Crifta Galli,  whence the Falx begins.  (/")  Points to  that hole which is called
   the Blind Hole, which is as fmall as a pin's point, and which belongs in common to
   the CEthmoidal and Frontal Bones.
N.  B.  The  fmall crack, to which the lines running downwards from {d) point,  and
   which indicates the Suture  furrounding the  (Ethmoidal  Bone  and named (Eth-
   moidal Suture, can hardly be miftaken,

                               Sphoenoidal Bone.

The Sphenoid Bone  is known here by  its two  proceffes  named Transverse Spi-
    nous, or  Little  Wings  of  Ingrasias marked (hj) ; the lines from the letter (jr)
   point to the Sphoenoidal Sutures, which feparate this Bone from the Frontal and
   CEthmoid Bones,   (b h) Mark the two Anterior CEthmoid Proceffes.   (/) Marks
    the Pofterior Clinoid Procefs ;  for it is rather one Procefs terminating in two  little
   horns  or knobs,  (k) Is fet down in the Sella Turcica in  the very centre of the Cli-
    noid Proceffes where the Pituitary Gland is lodged.  (/ /) Mark the two Optic
   Holes, which are fcarcely feen, for they lie 'under the  two  Anterior Clinoid pro-
   ceffes, fo as  to  be almoft hidden by them :----The  two lines going from the letter,
   (jn) mark the two  wide  grooves, which are formed by the Carotid 'Arteries as they
   rife by the fides  of the Sella Turcica ; and  the letter (m)  itfelf fits upon a  large
    groove made by the Optic Nerves, where they enter  into the Optic Holes.

                                      E 2                              SECOND 
3r>
Cf  THE EONES.
                        SECOND  DIVISION.

This divifion fhows points of the Sphoenoid alfo,  but chiefly of the Temporal Bone.
  and of the Corner of the Parietal Bone.
                                 Sphoenoid Bone.
(n) Shows the Foramen  Lacerum  under  the Wing  of Ingrafias,  by which all  the
   fmaller nerves enter into the focket for furnifhing the eye-ball,   (o) Shows behind
   that, the Foramen Rotundum for the nerve of the upper jaw:  (j>) The Foramen O-
   vale for the nerve  of  the lower jaw: —and (q)  fnows the  Spinous Hole,  which is
   large here that it may be feen, (Tor naturally it is extremely fmalij, and the Groove,
    formed by  the great artery of the Dura Mater as it enters by this fpinous hole, is
    alfo feen here (r) marked very hard and ftrong.
                                 Parietal Bone.
It is upon the corner of the Parietal Bone, that this groove (V) is formed by the artery
    of the Dura  Mater.

                                 Temporal Bone.
The point of the Petrous Portion of the Temporal Bone  is feen here  projeding into the
    bafis or floor of the cranium.  The point of the triangular Petrous Portion is marked
    (s) ; and the Internal Auditory Hole, by  which the auditory nerve or  7th nerve en-
    ters into the ear is  marked  (t).
                        THIRD  DIVISION.
In this  third divifion nothing almoft but  the  Occipital Bone is feen; and its parts are
   thefe.—(u u) The two great hollows in which the  lobes of the cerebellum  lie.----
       .    a                                                                 w 
                            BOCK  FIRST, PLATE FIFTH                       37
    (y)  is the  Ridge betwixt  thefe two  hollows,  which rifes very high,  is called the
    Liternal  Spine  of the Occipital Bone,  and has  a fmall  falx  ("fomewhat  hke the
    larger one^) attached to it.   (w) Marks the Foramen Lacerum, or wide  irregular
    hole betwixt the Temporal and Occipital  Bones, through which the Lateral Sinus
    paffes to go down into  the  neck, where it forms the Great Internal  Jugular  Vein.
    And the 8th pair of nerves,  or Par Vagum accompanies the vein through this hole.—
    (x) Stands  upon the  very middle of the  Cuneiform or Wedge-like Procefs of the
    Occipital and Sphoenoidal Bones ;  for  the  two bones meet here,  without  any de-
    termined or  regular limits for either.—And (hy) ftands in the center of the Foramen
    Magnum, by which the  Spinal Marrow goes down into the canal of the Spine.


                              FIGURE    II.

  I his drawing explains the Bafis of the Scull, as it is turned towards the neck and throat.
    But this furface  is fo rough, irregular, and confufed, that it will not bear that  fair ar-
    rangement and complete  enumeration of proceffes which the firft  figure bears.  The
    furfaces  chiefly  to be obferved, and which may ferve in fome degree to arrange the
    fubjed, are ift, The Jaw and Palate Bones, zd, The Root of the Temporal  Bones.
    3</, The  Lower Part of the Occipital Bones.
i. About the Palate we obferve,
(a) The  Alveolar Procefs of the upper Jaw Bone,  robbed of many of its teeth ;  (b)
    the Palate Plate   of the  Upper Jaw Bone, forming a  chief  part of the roof of the
    mouth ;  (c)  the Palate  Plate of the proper Palate Bone, which forms nearly one
    third of the Palate ;  (d)  the Tranfverfe Palate Suture, which runs acrofs the  Palate,
   joining the Palate Bone  to the Palate Procefs of  the Jaw Bone ;  («) the Middle or
   Longitudinal  Palate Suture,  which joins  the bones  of  the oppofite  fides;  (/)  the
   Foramen Incifivum, or Anterior Palatine Hole, lying  juft behind  the firft  cutting
   teeth, and common to both bones ; (g)  the  pofterior Palatine Hole, which permits
                                                                              the 
   f,                              OF THE BONES.
   the Pal.tine Nerve and  Artery,  to come down from  the  back of the  noftrils to
   the Palate. -
The backs of the noftrils are formed by the rifing plates of the proper Palate Bones, and
   by the Pteregoid Proceffes.  At the back of the noftrils, we fee,  (£) the Vomer,
   fo named from its refemblance to a plough-fhare, and ftanding exadly in the middle,
   for it is the partition  of the nofe ;  (i) the Outer Pteregoid Procefs, forming the
   back of the noftrils ;  (&) the Hook of the Inner Pteregoid Procefs, upon which the
   tendon of  the  Tenior Palati  Mufcle  turns : and  a fmall  tip of the Palate Bones,
   which is at this point covered by  thefe Pteregoid Proceffes of the Sphoenoid Bone,  is
   named, the Pteregoid Procefs  of  the Palate  Bone.   And (/) marks the  appearance
   outwardly of the Wedge-like Proceffes of  the Occipital and Sphoenoidal Bones.
a. About the roots of the Temporal Bones we have,
(/.v)  the Root of the Zygomatic Procefs, where  the Condyle of the lower Jaw plays ;
   and («) the Ridge juft before the  Condyle, upon the top of which the Condyle ftands,
   in a dangerous  fituation,  almoft  out of its focket when the jaws are opened wide;
   and which it flips over, getting  into  the  hollow for  the Temporal  Mufcle,  when
   the lower jaw is diflocated.   (o)  Is the Mamillary, and (j&) the Styloid Procefs,  of
   the Temporal Bone,   (q) Is the Oval Hole of the Sphoenoid Bone, for transmitting
   the great nerve of  the lower jaw.  (r) Is the  Spinous Hole of the Sphoenoid  Bone
   for admitting the artery of the Dura  Mater,   (s) Is the hole near the point of the
    Temporal Bone, for the Carotid Artery, (t 11) The Crucial Ridges of the Os  Occi-
    pitis.— (u) The Pofterior Tuber, or the Acute  and Prominent Point of the Occipital
    Bone.— (x)  The Additamentum  Suturae Lambdoidalis, which  joins the back cor-
    ner of the Temporal to the Occipital Bone.
 The Zygoma,  as  formed by the Zygomatic Proceffes of the Temporal Bone,  and  of
    the Cheek Bone, is marked (j/) ; and the hollow under the Zygoma for lodging the
    Temporal Mufcle and the  branch' of the lower jaw to which that mufcle is attach-
    ed, is marked (») ;  and is feen in this view on both fides full and  large.
                                                                     PLATE 
300K THIRD, PLATE FIFTH.
38*
     SUPPLEMENTARY EXPLANATION to PLATE V.  Of the BONES.

H.WING, in doing the outline to this plate, found it poflible to mark the
    points more correctly,  I have  added the following  explanations in this
    fupplementary page; and that they may unite ealily with the firft: ex-
    planation, I repeat the effential points.

                          In the Upper Scull there are>

1. The Optic hole (/).
2. On each fide of the letter (m), there is the likenefs of a fecond Optic hole, but'
   it is merely the impreffion which the laft turn of the  Carotid Artery makes.
3. (n) Is the  Foramen Lacerum.
4; (0) Is the  Foramen Rotundum.
5  (p) ^s *^c  Foramen Ovale.
6. (§-) Is the  Spinous Hole.
7. (z) Marks the round hole by which the Carotid Artery enters-the ikull,  after wind-
   ing through a crooked canal in the Temporal bone, about an inch in length.
8. The figure  (8.) points to a great breach in the rocky part of the Temporal bone;
   this breach is occafioned by the  falling away of the  Cartilaginous part of the Euf-
   tachian  Tube.  Therefore this wide breach is found in every  Church-yard fcull;
   and the hole for the Carotid Artery marked (s), opens where this breach ends.
9. It  is obferved of the great hole  marked (w)f  for the paffage of the Jugular Vein,
   that it is large and irregular ; that it is almoft divided into two openings, by a fmall
   projeding  pointy the line extending from the letter (w), touches exadly this fmall.
                                                                        point, 
 33*                            OF THE  BONES.
   point.   The eighth pair of  nerves paffes in  the fma'ler  opening berore the point,
   the Jugular Vein paffes in the greater opening behind it; a fmall bridle of the Dura
   Mater goes acrofs from this  point, and makes the two holes diftind in the frefh fcull,
   and defends the eighth pair of nerves from the  pifffure of the Jugular Vein, When
   (as often happens)  it is turgid with blood.
10. The number  (10.) marks the hole under the Condyle by which the ninth pair  of
   nerves, the Lingual Nerve goes out.

                        In Figure II. the chief points  are thefe,
(f) Marks the Anterior  Palatine Hole.
(g) Marks the Pofterior Palatine Hole.
(h) The Vomer, or bone forming thi partition of the nofe.
(i) The outer Pteregoid Procefs.
(k) The Inner Pteregoid Procefs.
(/) The Cuneiform Procefs of  the Occipital Bone.
(i.) Marks the Foramen Lacerum, not that which is marked (n)  in figure i.  but another
   Foramen Lacerum belonging alfo to the orbit, not for the tranfmifiion of nerves, but
   for the lodging of fat.
(jf) Marks the Foramen  Ovale.
(r) The Spinous Hole.
(2.) Is that great breach which is left by the fading of the Cartilaginous end of the Euf-
    tachian Tube.
(.f) Is the hole for the paffage of the Carotid Artery, which as on the infide of the fcull
    opens immediately  behind the breach.
(3.) Marks the great Thimble-like hole, by which  the Lateral Sinus comes out from the
    Scull, to form the great Jugular Vein.
(4.) Is a hole feated behind the Condyle,  the hole marked (10.)  in figure i. is before the
    Condyle,  and gives paffage  to the ninth or Lingual pair of nerves ; this fmaller hole
    is behind the Condyle, and  gives  paffage to  a fmall vein of  the neck. 
 
LJOXES
Outline for PL- \ I.
LW>lulud for Longman 4 im.liO.i-
&*f4*u^ cSbL, S/J
CC^, 
* 
1UJXES
PL.VI.
M,
Published Jvr Zon^man i-Aw lito*.
# '"'ftCs, 
BOOK FIRST, PLATETHIRD.
39
PLATE      VI.
this Plate explains the Text Bcui, in all the Chapters upon the Scull.
vJlVES \Jl, a general view of the Cranium,  the reverfe of the firft plate;
    and id, a vertical fection of the Cranium, which  fhews the relation and
    bearing of many important parts,—explains particularly the great train
    offinufes or cells, which make all the bafis of the Cranium hollow,—ex-
    plains alfo  the fpongy  bones,—the Antrum Highmorianum,—the Nafal
    or Lachrymal Duel:,—and the Mouth of the Euftachian  Tube,  which is
    feen here fluffed out, and dried, to make its opening immediately behind
    fhe noftrils at the back of the palate more diftinct,

                            FIGURE    I.

                  OUTSIDE  OF  THE  SCULL*.

A 1 HE Os Frontis ; where  (a) marks the bump of the Frontal Sinus ; (b) The Super-
   ciliary Ridge, dotted with  marks of its Nutritious Arteries ; (c) The Superciliary
   Notch, and hole which the  Frontal Nerve and Artery make.
                                                                     B The
   * Let the reader remember that there cannot be a perfect correfpondence of figures through all the
plates; that no more could be attempted in the anatomy of the Bones, (a fubjeft fo irregular) than juft to
                                                                        make 
 40                             OF THE  BONES.
B. The Parietal  Bone, and  the letter is  fo  placed as to mark that femicircular ridge
   where the Temporal Mufcle arifes.
C. Marks the  Temporal Bone.   "Where (d) marks the Meatus Auditorius ; (e) the
   Maftoid Procefs ;  (/) the Zygoma; and  (g) a Double Squamous Suture,  as in the
   fcull from which  this was drawn.
D.  Marks the Cheek bone where  all its connedions are  feen ; (b)  with the Temporal
   bone ;  (J) with the Frontal Bone; (k) with the upper Jaw Bone.
E. Marks the Wing of the Sphoenoid Bone, where it lies in the Squamous Suture ;  and
    the four corners of bone  forming the Squamous Suture, are (7) the corner of  the
   Sphoenoid  (m) the corner of the  Parietal; (n) the corner of the Temporal; and  (o)
    the Corner of the Frontal Bone.
F. Marks the Small Bone of the Nofe, where the middle Nafal Suture is feen.
G.  Points to the Upper Jaw  Bone.   The letter is placed upon the  Alveolar or Socket
    Proceffes; and the fmall letter (p) marks the Infra Orbitary Hole.
H Marks the Lower  Jaw Bone, this letter touching the point of the chin ;  while the
    fmall letter (<?)  marks the line of the  bafis of the lower jaw;  (r) the mark of the
    Maffeter Mufcle, the point into which it is inferted;  (j-) the Mental Hole by which
    a twig of the lower Maxillary  Nerve  comes out upon the face, juft as the  twig
    of the upper Maxillary Nerve  comes out upon the  face by the  Infra Orbitary
    Hole,  at (p).
 In the Orbit,  (t) marks the holes, which being within the orbit, (for arteries and nerves
    paffmg down into the noftril,) are called Internal Orbitary Holes, to  diftino-uifh
    them from the Supra Orbitary and Infra Orbitary Holes.  Of thefe internal Orbitary
                                                                              Holes,
   make each plate fyftematic and orderly in  itfelf, without reference to any other plate.  And fo in
    each plate the great letters point to  the general Bone, and the lefTer alphabet marks and arranges
    the individual parts. 
                             BOOK FIRST, PLATE SIXTH.                       4C





     Holes,  one is named the Anterior, the  other is  named the Posterior, Orbitary



     Hole.  So that in this drawing,  there are feen all the holes around the Orbit, viz. (j)



     The Supra Orbitary Hole,  or  Superciliary  Hole;  (/>) the Infra Orbitary Hole ;



     and (f)  the  internal  Orbitary Hole.   In  the  orbit is  feen (u)  the Tranfverfe



     Suture  on the right fide pure ; on the left  fide alfo it  is feen, but appears very ir-



     regular as it really is,  for it joins together a great many irregular.bones.



 Within the orbit fome other parts are alfo feen here, which are not fo  well explained in



     any other plate.—The whole conftitution of the orbit is feen ;—(1.) Marks the Os



     Unguis  in its plain part,  where the eye rolls upon it.----(2.) Marks the Groove of



     Os Unguis, where the nafal  dud lies ;  (3.) the Os Planum, which is in fad the plain



     fide of the GSthmoid bone as feen Plate III. Fig. III. at (e.)  (4.) Is the Orbitary



     Procefs  of the Upper Jaw Bone.   (5.) Is  the Orbitary Procefs  of the  Sphoenoid



     Bone, which is exadly oppofite to its Temporal Ala or wing (E.) (6.) Is the Orbitary



     Plate  of the Frontal Bone, which forms far the greater part of the Orbit; and (7.) at



     the bottom of the Orbit is the Optic hole.



 In the Nofe,  the letter (y) denotes  the  Vomer, the bone which forms the partition of



    the Nofe.










                               FIGURE    II.







            THE  VERTICAL SECTION OF THE SCULL.







A IS the Frontal  Bone ; where (a) marks the Coronal Suture feen from within like



   a mere  crack, and not ferrated or  zig-zag,  as  on  the outer furface of  the fcull;



   (b)  marks the  fmall projeding  Spine, to which the falx is attached, and  which



   projeds  fometimes half an inch,  making  it impoflible to trepan fafely at this point;



   (c) the Orbitary Procefs,  or  plate, which lies over  the eye; (d) the Bump  mark-



                                        F                                       ing 
 4-2                            OF  THE  BONES.
   ing the Frontal Sinus or cavity,   (i.) The cavity or finus itfelf, with a crofs bar in
   it, as there comrno::ly is.
B  The Inner Surface of  the  Parietal Bone; with the Artery of the Dura Mater, or
   rather its impreffion or furrow feen.
C  The Inner Surface of the  Occipital Bone ; where (e) marks the Winding Groove
   of  the Lateral Sinus ; (f) that  Groove ending in the thimble-like  cavity, and the
   thimble-like cavity ending in its  turn in the Foramen Lacerum, by  which the finus
   gets  out; and there paffes along  with it through this wide flit, the Par Vagum, or
   eighth pair of nerves,   (g)  Marks the thicknefs  of the  bone, at the place of the
    Crucial Ridge ;  (£) its  thinnefs, where it is loaded and preffed  by the lobes of the
   brain,  (i) Shows the fedion  of  the Foramen Magnum,   (jk)  Marks the Cuneiform
   Proceffes of  the  Occipital  and Sphoenoidal Bones *.
D  Marks the Temporal  Bone, where (/) points out the Foramen  Auditorium  Inter-
   num,  where the  Auditory Nerve enters ; and (jm) marks  the Styloid Procefs.
G  Marks the Upper Jaw Bone,  where it forms the Palate.
H  Marks the Lower Jaw Bone,  where (n)  is the fedion,  fhowing  the Cancelli of the
    Lower Jaw ;  (©) is the angle ; and here  upon the internal furface of the angle, the
    Pteregoid Mufcle is implanted ;  (p) the  hole  by  which the proper  nerve of the
    Lower Jaw,  the inferior  Maxillary Nerve,  gets into  the heart  of the bone ; and
    there  going round,  accompanied   with an artery, a  branch of each is given  off to
    every tooth ; and  what remains of the Nerve  and Artery  after  this,  comes out
    by the Mental hole upon  the chin.
The curious parts feen  in this fedion are;—The Cells, Spongy Bones, and the Eus-
    tachian Tube.
                                                                                The

   * There are two Foramina Lacera or wide holes, one belonging to the Sphoenoid Bone, in the bot-
tom of the focket for the eye; and this one betwixt the Temporal and Occipital Bones,, in the bafis
of the Sull over the neck or implantation of the vertebrae. 
                           BOOK FIRST, PLATE SIXTH.                        43





The Cells are marked (1, 2, 3;)  for (1.) Marks the beginning of  this long train o



    cells, being the cells  of  the  Frontal Bone, commonly  called the Frontal Sinufes,



    communicating  with each other,  and with  the  nofe.  (2, 2, 2,)  Mark  the  Cells



    of the OZthmoid Bone lying under the Cribriform  Plate, and feen here by the cut-



    ting away of the Os Planum.  (3.) Marks the Great Sinus of the  Sphoenoid Bone.



    It was pretty large in this fcull, and is known to belong to the Sphoenoid Bone,  by



    the  Sella Turcica and Clynoid Proceffes, which are feen in profile above it.



(jj)  Marks the back part of the Septum Nafi left; and looking paft that, into the noftril,



    the  Spongy Bones are feen;  (r) the Upper  Spongy Bone is  already defcribed as a



    mere  procefs of the CEthmoid Bone, hanging thus downwards into the top of the



    noftril:   (j) the Lower Spongy  Bone, is  an independent feparate bone ; fmall, as is



    expreffed Plate IV., and hooked  upon the edge of the  Antrum Maxillare at this



    part; the opening of the Antrum is here marked (j).



 The Lachrymal  Dud is marked by  the probe,  (f) paffed  upwards  from the noftril,



    and  it is feen,  by the diredion  of this probe, that  the dud opens into the nofe,



    juft under the point of the Lower Spongy Bone.



 The Euftachian Tube is a large internal paffage to the ear;  which opens at (u)  juft be-



     hind  the back  part of the Palate, and at the back opening of the noftril: here it is



     well  expreffed, the drawing being taken from a fcull which had the cartilaginous o-



     pening of the tube fluffed out and dried.
F 2
PLATE 
 
 
Boxes
PL. VII.
PubUthti HrrLvnffmtm icJUu.1-804.
/~
^fc^A  <^£
■AHHMtaMHIIM^fih 
BOOK FIRST, PLATE SEVENTH.                    45
PLATE      VII.
This Plate explains the Text Book, from Page 10$, to Page 129.
JlIXplains the Vertebrae,  with all their  procefles  and parts; and as the
    fame parts return in each Vertebra,  the feveral Vertebrae ought to be
    explained rather by ranks  and  orders,  than as individual Bones.
                            FIRST  ROW.
The firft: row, confifting of Figures I, II, and  III,  is drawn for the purpofe
    of contracting the three claries of Vertebras, viz. the  Vertebrae of  the
    Back, of the Neck, and  of the loins.

                            FIGURE    I.

JL\ Epresents a Vertebra of the Loins ; and the peculiarities of the Lumbar Vertebrae
   are thefe.
(i.)  The body is large and broad, thick,  fpongy and loofe in its  texture, and tipped
   with a ring, (a) of harder bone.
(2.) The Articulating Proceffes, or, as they are called,  the Oblique Proceffes, are large,
   for they have to bear much force; they ftand diredly upwards and downwards; the
                                                                        four 
 ,*;•.                              OF Tild  .-ones.
   four Articulating  Proceiie:;,  (the  two upper, as well as the two lower,)  are mark-
   ed  2, 2.
(3.) The Spinous Procefs, is fbort, flat, very broad, and ftands horizontally and diredlv
   out, fo as not to embarrafs the motions  of  the loins.
(4.) The Tranfverfe Procefs is fhort, dired, and very ftrong ;  and  the Articulating
   Proceffes  (2, 2) go off from the root of it.
In each Vertebra, there is formed by the roots of the Tranfverfe and Oblique Proceffes,
   where they arife from the body, a ring or circle of Bone, which is in each drawing
   marked ( *); it is for containing the Spinal Marrow.


                               FIGURE   II.

J S a Vertebra  of the Back ; where,
(1.) The body is fhorter, and is a large fegment (viz. nearly two thirds) of a fmall circle.
(2.) The  Articulating Process is fmall and flat,  and a little inclined, but not very
   oblique.
(3-) The Spinous Procefs is long,' aquiline, depreffed to fuch an angle that the two Spi-
   nous Proceffes almoft touch  each other, (as  is feen in Fig. IV.)  (3. 3.) and allow of
   but a very limited motion.
(4. J  The Tranfverfe Procefs is long, ftands diredly outwards, or is inclined a little up-
   wards,  and upon every dorfal vertebra  there  are  two  marks for .the' articulation
   of the ribs ; one (b) on the fide of the vertebra itfelf, or rather betwixt the bodies of
   two vertebrae, for the proper head of  the rib,  (Fig. X. and XI.) ( 1.); and again
   there is another articulating  furface (c) upon the face or fore part of the Tranfverfe
   Procefs, which is for the articulation of the little knob (Fig. X. and XI.) (3.) upon
   the  back part of each rib.
                                                                          FIGURE 
BOOK  FIRST,  PLATS SEVENTH
47
                             FIGURE    III.

 1 HE Cervical Vertebra has thefe chief charaders,
(i.)  The body is  fmall, firm, and of more folid and condenfed bone than in the vertebras
   of the loins or back.
(2.) The Articulating Procefs is truely oblique.
(3.)  The Spinous Procefs is fhort, and is forked.
(4.)  The Tranfverfe Procefs is fhort, forked, and has a large hole in it for a great artery
   of the brain, which by its paffing through this canal of the vertebrae is named Verte-
   bral Artery.
                              SECOND  ROW.
This Row explains chiefly the connedions of the Vertebrje.

                             FIGURE    IV.
 C
 kjHows the manner  in which one  Dorfal Vertebra fits down upon another, fo that thr
    Articulating Proceffes  (2. 2.) check upon one another,  and the  Spinous  Proceffes
    (3, 3) are feen to  be long and aquiline, and lying fo over each other as to prevent all
    motion backwards or forwards, while  the ribs limit the motion to either fide.   But
    in this drawing the one Spinous Procefs is tilted up from the other a little, owing to
    the want of that intervertebral fubftance which fhould lie betwixt the bodies.   The
    hole is feen here at [d] betwixt the two  vertebrae,  by  which a nerve goes off at the in-
    tern1 ice between each Vertebra : fo there are  in all twenty-four nerves of the Spine,
    correfponding with the number of Vertebrae in the Spine.
                                                                         FIGURE 
4 8
OF  THE BONES.
                              FIGURE    V.

 i  WO Dorfal Vertebra: are here feen in their right pofition, conneded by the interver-
    tebral  fubftance;  with the end of one rib  in its place;  and  at (b) is feen one arti-
   culating  furface on the  body  of the vertebra naked.  At (c) is feen the articulating
   furface, upon the face of the Tranfverfe Procefs, naked.  At (d) is feen the head of
   the rib covering  the two  articulating furfaces ; conneded at  (e) with the  body, and
   at (/) with the Tranfverfe Procefs of its own vertebra.

                             FIGURE    VI.

1S a  drawing of the Intervertebral Substance, which is of that ambiguous nature,
   that anatomifts choofe this name, to avoid the dilemma of calling it either Cartilage or
   Ligament, when it has not the charader diftindly either of Cartilage or of  Ligament.
   It  is fhown here as it is found betwixt the Lumbar Vertebrae;  and the  concentric
   circles  of which it confifts are better expreffed towards the margin (g) ; but towards
   the centre, and efpecially in the very middle, it becomes foft, pulpy, the circles confuf-
   ed.  The fubftance is fo much fofter in the  centre, that there is almoft a hole at (£) ;
   efpecially when  the bone  is  allowed to fpoil a little, as this one was.   At  (/) is
   feen a flight indication of the Spinal marrow, (which was alfo coirupted,) going down
   through the great hole of the vertebra.            t
                         THE  THIRD  ROW.
Explains the forms of the Atlas and Dentatus ; the two Vertebrae by which almoft
   all  the motions  of  the  head are performed.    Fig.  VII.  explains the  Atlas;
   Fig. VIII. explains the Dentatus ;  Fig. IX, fhows the way in which  the Atlas fits
   down upon the  tooth-like procefs and oblique fhoulders of the Dentatus.
                                                                        FIGURE 
BOOK FIRST,  PLATE THIRD.
43
                               FIGURE   VIL

JL Xplains the Atlas, or firft Vertebra, where we find,
(i.) The body entirely wanting, and the place of the body fupplied by Articulating Sur-
    faces (2, 2), fo large as to give fufficient ftrength and thicknefs to the fides of the ring.
N.  B.  At the place where the body fhould be, there is at (£) a fmooth Articulating Sur-
    face for the Tooth-like Procefs of  the Atlas rolling.  There is at (/) a little tip or
    point, which is tied by ligaments to the margin of the Occipital Hole ; at (m) there is
    a fort of ftraitening in the ring, and at this point a ligament goes  acrofs the ring, di-
    viding it into two, and holding  firm the tooth-like procefs.
 (2.) The Oblique or Articulating Proceffes of this vertebra are oval,  and  of a converging
    form; and this peculiarity in their diredion limits the  motions of the head, fo that it
    cannot  turn, but only nod, upon the Atlas.
 (3.) The Spinous Procefs is wanting.   A fmall knob reprefents the fpinous procefs ; and
    the want of this fpine enables the Atlas to turn freely in circles upon  the Dentatus.
 (4.) The Tranfverfe Procefs, alfo ending in a little knob, and perforated by the large hole
   for the Vertebral Artery.


                           FIGURE  VIII.

 rP                                        •  ■
  I HE Dentatus,  where the  points of defcnption are,
 (1.) The  whole body  of  the  Vertebra,  rifing gradually  towards the apex or point
    of its axis or tooth-like procefs, which is marked (m).
 (2.) The broad flat articulating furfaces, like fhoulders, at the root of the tooth-like pro-
    cefs ; upon which the atlas refts and turns.
                                         G                                  3- The 
 j-0                               OF  THE BONE5.
(3.} The Spinous Procefs is fhort, thick, and forked.
(4.) The Tranfverfe Procefs fhort, knobby, and perforated with the Vertebral Hole.
(»)  Marks the Neck  or  Collar, the narrow  part of the Tooth-like Procefs, where
   it  is embraced by the Atlas ;----and (m) marks the Apex  or pointed extremity of
   the  Tooth-like  Procefs.----(0)  Shows how  'deep   the  ring  of this particular
   vertebra  is,   and  how  fairly triangular  its  great hole  for the  paffage of  the
    fpinal marrow is.

                              FIGURE    IX.

 IIXplains  the manner of connedion betwixt the Atlas and the Dentatus ; fhows
    the ring of the Atlas fet  down  upon the  fhoulders of the Dentatus;----and here
    all the parts are marked with the fame numbers as in  the other drawings.

                        FIGURE    X.   and   XL

  ARE Drawings of the Ribs : where we fee,—(1.) the Head of the Rib, by which
    it is  joined to the body  of the vertebra.-—(2.) The Neck or ftraitning beyond the
    head.— (3.) The Tubercle by which it is articulated with the Tranfverfe Procefs.-  ■
     (4.)  Another little Tubercle, beyond this  fecond  articulating  furface.----(5.) The
     Ano-le of the Rib, or the point from which  it begins to bend  forwards, [p)  the
     Groove  in which  the intercoftal artery lies,  (a) The more fpongy  end of the rib,
     with a fort of rude focket, which receives the cartilage that joins it to  the fternum.

                              FIGURE    XII.

  Jt\ Epresents the WHOLE  length of the Sternum.
  (1.) Marks the Upper Part  of  the Sternum;  where (r) fhows the pointed part of this
                                                                               firft 
                         JBOOK FIRST, PLATE SEVENTH.                      5 I





   firft bone turned downwards to meet the fecond piece of the Sternum, (s) Is a hollow



   which makes way for the Trachea, &e.  (j: t) Are two articulating furfaces, by which



   the clavicle of either fide is joined to this piece of the fternum.



(2.)  The fecond piece  of the Sternum, of great length,  receiving the cartilages of moft



   of the ribs ; and the fockets  for receiving the cartilages  are feen,  though not  very



   fully  all along its edge at [u u) &c.



(3.)  Is  the Enfiform  Cartilage, which in  moft bodies  is  ftraight pointed, as  in this



   drawing, but fometimes bifurcated ;—fometimes  bent down, or on the contrary turn-



   ned remarkably upwards; very feldom offified, except in thofe perfons.who are ex-



    remely old.
G 2
/
PLATE 
\ 
 
PL. VILL.
BOXES
 
BOOK FIRST, PLATE EIGHT.
53
PLATE    VIIL
This Plate explains the Text Book, frtm Page 105, ia P*ge I47>
 IS a general view of  all the Bones of the Trunk.  It is chiefly ufeful by
     fhowing the  general  pofition of Bones which have  been already  mi-
    nutely explained, and requires only a very loofe and general explanation,
    becaufe it is a general plate merely, upon which the parts and proceffes
    need not be minutely told.

 A The Ring of the firft Vertebra or Atlas.
 B The Tip of the Tooth-like Proceffes of the Dentatus.
 C The Bodies of the Cervical Vertebrae.
 D Their Tranfverfe Proceffes.
 E The Holes betwixt the Vertebrae, by which the Cervical Nerves come out  from the
   canal of the fpinal marrow.
 F The Firft Rib, lying flat and level here ;  and it is at this place, betwixt the clavicle
   and the firft rib that the fubclavian vefTels come out.
 G The  General Convex of the Thorax, formed  by the  middle of the ribs.—(a  a a)
   Mark the  ends of the ribs which receive the cartilages, by which the ribs are joined to
   the fternum.
G Marks the Seven True Ribs.
                                                                           H 
  54                             of the  bones.
H Marks the 3 firft Falfe Ribs, whofe cartilages run into the cartilage of the feventh rib.
I Marks the Two Loofe or floating Ribs, whofe cartilages do not join the other cartilages,
    nor are united to the fternum ;  but ftand out in the flanks, free and independent, their
    cartilages being buried in the thick flefh of the abdominal mufcles.
K The Cartilages of the Ribs.
L The Firft or triangular piece of the Sternum.
M  The Second or long piece, which receives almoft all the Cartilages.
N The Third peice,  as it  is ufually called; though it  is merely Cartilage, to  extreme
    old age.—This 3d piece N is the Cartilago Mucronata, Enfiformis,  or Swordlike.
O The Clavicle,  or Collar Bone, as it lies upon the top  of the cheft ; and here it is feen
    how the bone by its proper pofition, keeps  off and fupports the fcapula or fhoulder-
    blades.
P Marks the lower border of the Scapula.   (3) Marks  the Acromian Procefs, to which
    the Clavicle is conneded.—(f) is the Glenoid or Articulating Cavity, for holding the
    fhoulder bone ; (d)  is the Caracoid Procefs, fhowing how  it projeds on the  infide of
    the joint, in the hollow under the arch of the Clavicle.—It  is plain from this pofition
    of the procefs, that it fhould be felt on the breaft juft  above  the border of the Axilla.
Q^ The bodies of the Lumbar Vertebrae,  thick  and maffy to  fupport the weight of all
    the parts above.
R  The   Tranfverfe  Proceffes  of  the Lumbar  Vertebrae, (dd) touch the  Spinous
    Proceffes, where  they  appear in  the interftices of the Tranfverfe  ones.____(fee)
    Mark the  intervertebral fubftances, or  rather reprefent  the putty, which is put
    betwixt the Vertebrae (in making  our fkeleton) to ftand, in place of the interverte-
    bral fubftance.
 S  The Os Sacrum; where (//) reprefent  the  holes  of the Sacrum difpofed regular-
    ly in pairs.—(gg)  Reprefent the white lines,  which were cartilaginous in  the child
    dividing the Sacrum into five pieces, but are now confolidated into white lines of pro-
    minent bone  particularly hard and firm-----(h) Reprefents the joining of the Sacrum
    to the Os Ilium at either fide,  which joining is named  the Sacro-Iliac Symphyfis.
                                                                            T That 
                            BOOK  FIRST, PLATE  EIGHTH.                     55
 T  That divifion of the Os Innominatum, which is  called the Os Ilium; where (/)
    marks the hollow bofom of that expanded  wing, which  lying obliquely-outwards
    like the wing of a chariot, is called the Ala Ilii:  the Iliacus Internus Mufcle, arifes
    from this furface.---(k) Is the circle called the Spine or Ridge of the Os Ilium.---(/)
    Is the fudden ffiarp  point, by which the Spine ends, and  which is  there named  the
    Spinous Procefs, to  which the name Anterior is added, to diftinguifh it from others,
    which  lie concealed in the joining with the Sacrum.  This  Anterior Superior Spi-
    nous Procefs has another  under it fmaller and  marked (m), which is called the An-
    terior Inferior Spinous Procefs. ■----It is merely a fmall Bump, over the top of the
    focket for the origin of the  Redus Mufcle.   (n) Marks the  back or Dorfum Ilii,
    from which the Glutaei Mufcles arife.
U U Thefe two  letters  interfed  all that  part  of the Os  Innominatum, which  is called
    Ifchium ; where (0) marks the body of the bone,  where it forms  a chief fhare in the
                                                                       i
    focket.  (^>) Marks the Spinous Procefs, which is feen through the opening of the
    Pelvis projeding towards  the Sacrum.----(7) Marks the Tuberofity  or  Bump of
    the Os Ifchium, the loweft point of the Pelvis, and the part upon which we reft in
    fitting; and (r) marks the Ramus, or branch of the Pubis, as it rifes to meet a like
    branch  of the Pubis.
V  Marks the third piece  of the Os Innominatum, viz. the Pubis ;—where (j)  is
    the body, where it forms  part of the focket  for the thigh-bone;---(;) the higheft
    point named Crifta Pubis;----(u) points to the Symphifis  Pubis, or joining of the
    oppofite bones ;—(v) marks  the leg of the Pubis, defcending to meet the leg of the
    Ifchium. The Rami  of the Ifchium and of the Pubis form, with the other parts of the
    Os Innominatum ; firft the Arch of the Pubis ;—fecondly, the Thyroid Hole ; and the
    Rami are faid to meet  one half belonging to the Pubis, and one half to the Ifchium,
    becaufe they are in fad feparate in the child ; a clear tranfparent cartilage, being
    interpofed  betwixt them.----(x) Marks this  Thyroid Hole; and  (jt) marks the
   Acetabulum  or  focket  for the  thigh bone.
                                                                     PLATE 
 
 
FL.IX.
JbiUtAeZ far Lonaman L-JU&; 1804
 
BOOK FIRST,  PLATE NINTH.                     57
PLATE      IX.
This Plate explains the Tent Both, frtm Page 147, to Page IJ 8.
Represents the Thigh Bone, Tibia, and Fibula.

                      FIGURES    I.  and   II.

J\ErRESENT the fore and back views of the Thigh Bone.----And in order  that the
   letter prefs may proceed in the regular order of a little description or demonftration,
   the fmall figures are put upon each drawing; fo that any number that is wanting on
   one drawing, muft be  found  on the other.
The First Figure fhows the Back Part of the Thigh Bone, which is marked by our feeing
   here, from behind, the length of the neck of the bone;—the manner of its rifing out
   of the two great proceffes, the Trochanters ;— the projedion  and  roughnefs of the
   Linea Afpera, and the deep hollow betwixt the Condyles.
The Second Figure,  or the fore view, is exceedingly fimple, having  no ftrong marks.
   The Linea Afpera is turned almoft out of  fight. . The chief peculiarity of  the fore
   view is, that it fhows the bending form  of the bone.
                                        H                                The 
58
OF  THE  BONES.
                         The Points of  Description are,

(i.)  The Body :----very thick, ftrong, of a cylindrical form, bending outwards with *
   gentle  curve.
(2.)  The Head, which is very fmooth,  and very fairly circular.   It is a large fegment of
   a fmall circle, and is let pretty deep down into its focket.  There is a dimple at (a),
   which marks the place where the central ligament once was.
(3.)  The Neck of the Bone,  long, and almoft horizontal, to fet the ftiaft of the bone
   the wider off from the Haunch Bone,  that it may move freely. '
(4.)  The great Trochanter,  a large bump or procefs for the  infertion  of  the  Glutaei
    Mufcles.
(5.)  The lefler Trochanter,  a fmaller procefs, for  the infertion of many mufcles which
    move the Thigh Bone inwards.
(6.) The Linea Afpera, or rough line, from which  much of the Mufcular flefh that
    covers the thigh arifes.----And  this Linea Afpera, or  rough line begins at (£)  in
    a forking form from the roots of each Trochanter :----the two lines meet,  and the
    Linea Afpera becomes fingle  in the middle of the  thigh,  (c)—Towards  its lower
    end (d) it forks  again to go off towards each Condyle.
(7.) The two Condyles, which form the great articulating furfaces of the Thigh Bone,
    where it lies in the knee-joint.—In Fig. II. we fee that' the inner Condyle (<?) is
    the larger one ;  being larger to compenfate for  the oblique  diredion of  the thigh
     bone.   At  (f)  Fig. II.  we fee, covered  with cartilage,  the  flat polifhed  furface
     upon  which the  Rotula or knee-pan  rolls.-—And  in  Fig. I.  at (g)  we  fee the
    very deep  notch betwixt the two Condyles,  in  which  the crucial ligaments  of
    the knee-joint lie.
                                                                          FIGURE 
BOOK FIRST, PLATE NINTH.                        $H
                              FIGURE   III.
                                    The Tibia.
 J.  HIS  is a drawing of the right Tibia,   feen from before.   The upper end belonging
    to the knee is large and broad,  and is likened to the trumpet end of a pipe.----The
    lower head belonging to the ancle is fmall, and has  one  projeding point,  viz. that
    which forms  the  inner ancle, and which is thought to refemble the flute-mouth of a
    pipe.   The whole Bone has the triangular or prifmatic form of the Ulna and Radius.
(i.) Is the Upper head of the Tibia belonging to the knee joint;  where (h) marks a lit-
    tle tubercle or rifing, which divides the two articulating furfaces from each other. It is
    from  the back part of this tubercle, that the crofs ligaments of the knee joint arife.
    (i i)  Mark the  two lunar hollows, upon which the  two Condyles of the thigh bone
    reft, and in which the femilunar or moveable cartilages of the knee joint lie.  (ij Is
    that rough circle which bounds the articulating furface, and from which the Capfular
    Ligament arifes.  (7) Is the tubercle or bump of the Tibia,  upon  which we reft  in
    kneeling, and into which the great fore tendon called the Ligament of the  Patella is
    fixed  : and (m) is the prominent ridge of  the fhin, which begins from this tubercle,
    and goes downwards in the waving form of an Italicy^  (u) Is that part of the Tibia
    which receives the upper  end of the Fibula.
(2.) Is the middle part of the Bone, which is of a triangular or prifmatic form, and the
    figure (2)  is repeated upon each of the three angles.
(3.) Is the lower and fmaller head of the Bone belonging  to the  ancle  joint; where (n)
    marks the  fmooth hollow which receives the bones of the foot, and which  is named
    (like the articulating furface of the Radius), the Scaphoid, or  Boat-like Cavity of the
    Tibia.   (0) Marks the  projedion or procefs of the inner ancle, which guards the
    joint, preventing luxation inwards.  (j>) Is  the  fmall cavity on the  fide of the
    Tibia, which receives the lower head of the Fibula,  in the way that is reprefented
    in next plate.
                                         H 2                            FIGURE 
6o
OF  THE  BONES.
                              FIGURE    IV.

X S a drawing of the  Fibula, which is a long (lender  bone, fo extremely fimple in its
    form, that there needs be no further defcription than this, that the (haft of the bone
    (cf)  is exceedingly (lender,----is much longer than the Tibia,—and is triangular Like
    the Tibia.  The upper end  (r) is  laid under the projeding head of the Tibia, at (u
    Fig.  III.) and it is laid flat upon it; fo that this articulating and  fmooth furface (r)
    is fmooth only for the fake of a very flight degree of fhuffling motion.
The lower end (s) is the larger.—It unites with the lower end of the Tibia  (p Fig. III.)
    to form  the ancle joint.  This  guards the ancle joint without,  as the Procefs of the
    Tibia guards it within.  And this fmooth articulating furface (*)  is for receiving the
    fide  of the Aftragalus, that bone of the foot by which chiefly the ancle joint is formed*.
PLATE 
 
EL X
Boxes
.---'' -*7%&£et£  /£, s
Y=>
J\,hlvihtd farXonpnan. i'to, 'ISO f 
BOOK FIRST, PLATE TENTH,
6l
PLATE      X.
this Plate explains the Text Book, from Page I53, to Pag* 166.
JiXpLAiNS the Connections  of the Tibia and Fibula, and all the Bones of
    the Foot and of the Toes.

                              FIGURE    I.

SHOWS the Tibia and Fibula laid to each other as they lie in the leg ; and here all the
    letters and figures, explaining the Tibia and Fibula of the laft  plate are put upon the
    very fame points ;  fo that no new letters nor figures are required, except (v), to mark
    that  fpace betwixt  the Tibia and Fibula in which  the  Inter-offeous  Mem-
    brane lies ; and (*) to (how the arch which is made  by (o) the procefs of the inner
    ancle,  and (j)  the lower head of the Fibula forming the outer  ancle: for the deep-
    nefs of the arch, and the  projedion of thefe two points, (how how very fecure the an-
    cle joint is; the fmooth  head  of the  Aftragalus marked (a PI. X.  Fig.  IV.) being
    received deep into  this arch.
FIGURI, 
62
OF  THE BONES.
                             FIGURE    II.

SHows the Outer Surface of the Rotula or Patella, which  is rough, and marked with
    many points where its nutritious arteries enter.

                             FIGURE    III.

OHows the Lower Surface of the Patella, viz. that which  is turned towards the cavity
    of the joint; and here there is feen a rifing line at (*,) which lies in the great hollow
    betwixt the two Condyles ;—while the two hollows on  each fide of this rifing move
    upon the convexities of the Condyles.  In fhort, this fmooth inner furface of the pa-
    tella is moulded as it were upon the furface marked (/)  in the laft plate, Figure II.

                         FIGURE    IV. and V.

 Ji,XPLAiN all the Bones of the Foot, viz. of the Tarsus or inftep, of the M etatarsus,
    and of the Toes.
 The bones  of the Tarfus are 7 in number, fewer and larger than the bones of the Carpus.
 (1.)  The Aftragalus is that great bone which immediately forms the ancle joint;—where
    (a) marks the great ball or cartilaginous pully which is  received into the arch formed
    by the Tibia and Fibula.---(£) Is the flat fide of the bone upon which the proceffes
    of the inner and outer ancles lie,  embracing the joint clofely.---(c) Is a little flat
    neck or projedion  which lies over the heel-bone, (d) Is the neck of that large round
    head which makes a ball and focket joint with the Os  Naviculare, which is mark-
    ed (i). 
                           BOOK FIRST, PLATE TENTH.                       6$
(».) TheOs Calcis lies under the Aftragalus, and is the largeft of the Tarfal Bones,  fup-
    porting all the weight of the body; and here thefe points chiefly are feen.—(V)The t^P
    of the bone, which looks upwards, receiving the Tendo Achillis, or great Back Tendon.
    ----09 The lowed rough point; the point of the heel upon which  we (land.——
    (g) The head, by which the Os Calcis is joined to the Os Cuboides, marked (7.) the
    Os Cuboides being received at this part into a large hollow focket of the Os  Calcis.
(3.^ Is theOs Naviculare or Scaphoides, whichhas been fo  named from its refemblance to-
    a boat.   But if there be any fuch refemblance it is effedually concealed in all  thefe
    views.  The Os Naviculare has rifing edges and a fair round focket, which is turned
    towards the Aftragulus (1.) to receive the large round head of that bone.
(4, 5, and 6.) Are the Cuneiform or Wedge-like Bones ;  and in this view the fquare ex-
    ternal furfeces chiefly  are  feen ;—and  thefe Cuneiform Bones, ought juft to  be rec-
    koned (imply according to  their order, the firft, fecond, and third  cuneiform bones,
    beginning with that which  fupports  the great toe.
(7.) The Os Cuboides is a large fquare or cube like bone,  as its name  implies, but by no
    means a regular cube.----It forms  a large (hare of the Tarfus, and fupports the Me-
    tatarfal Bone of the Little Toe.

The Cuneiform Bones  are  lefs eafily underftood, and^I have therefore made a fecond
    drawing of the foot,  Fig.  V. (where the fame letters and marks are ftill preferv-
    ed,) in  which I have  fhown the point of the Cuneiform Bones,  the Metatarfal ones
    being taken away.  In this figure  the faces  of the Cuboid and  of the Cuneiform
    Bones  are diredly*feen.   And it is  underftood  why  they are called Cuneiform  or
    wedge-like bones, for the  upper furfaces marked (4,  5, 6,) are  broad  and fquare r
    ----while  their  lower  furfaces  at  (*) are  fmall   and pointed;  Thefe  fmaller
    ends of  the  wedges being turned inwards  or  towards  the foal  of the  foot. In Fig.
    IV. (h)  marks the five  Metatarfal  Bones ; fo  named from their being  placed on
                                                                              the 
  ('4                            °F  THE  BONES.
    the Tarfus.—(i) Marks the firft rank or phalanx,—(&) the fecond,—(/) the third rank
    of the bones of the toes.


                               FIGURE   VI.

 C
 CHows the foot in  profile, and explains particularly well the large head of  the Aftra-
    galus (d). Thefe drawings are juft half the fize of nature,  whence it may eafily be un-
    derftood how large this head of the aftragalus is ; — as large fully as the head of the
    fhoulder  bone : —and the focket of the  Os Naviculare, (3),  into which this head of
    the aftragalus  is  received, is both larger and'a deeper circle than the Glenoid Cavity
    of the Scapula, into which the head of the fhoulder bone  is received.
 The manner in which the procefs (c) of the Aftragalus  is joined with the Os Calcis, (2) fo
    as  to allow of a fhufRing motion, is alfo explained here.   The great length of the firft
    bone, or Metatarfal Bone of the great toe (£)  is alfo  to be obferved, becaufe it is fome-
    times to be cut away; and it fhould not be forgotten that it goes very deep into the foot.
 The fmall bone,  commonly called Sefamoid Bone,  from its refembling, or being thought
    to refemble, a grain of Sefamum (though it is much larger), is feen here at (m) lying
    under the ball of the great toe, where it  is  conneded with the tendons of the fhort
    flexor  mufcles of  the  great toe.----There  are commonly two under  the ball  of
    each  great toe, and there are occafional  Sefamoid bones uader the other toes,  and
    fometimes under  the great joint of the thumb.
The feveral  Phalanges, as  they are  called, or ranks  of bones in  the toes, need not a-
    gain be explained.
The only important point remaining to be explained, is the double  arch of the foot; for
    there are  two arches.  Firft (n) the great and general arch;---the two  points of
    which are the tip of the heel, and the ball of  the great toe.  Thefe points alone of all
    the foot touch the ground.—The  elafticity  of this arch, proceeding  from its nu-
    merous bones and their  joinings,  gives a  fpring and eafe in  the ftep ;  and the arch
                                                                                 is 
                           BOOK FIRST,  PLATE TENTH.                       65





   is fupported under the weight of the whole body,  both by the particular ligaments




   belonging to the individual joints of the  foot,—and more particularly by the Great



   Fafcia or ligament, (I would call it,) of the fole of the foot, which from one point (the



   heel) extends to the root of  each toe  individually.



But there is alfo a fecond and particular arch, which the bones of the Tarfus form among



   themfelves.  This  arch is  explained by fhowing a large central  hole, which is ex-



   preffed  in each of  thefe  drawings, and is marked (0).—In Fig. IV. there is only a



   darknefs fhowing where this central hole  is.—In Fig. V.  the hole is feen  fair (by



   the Tarfus being turned round, and is marked (0}.  In Fig. VI.  it  is explained by



   a  broken pencil,  (0) thruft  up through this  central opening.
I                           PLATE 
 
 
Boxes
Flxl.
•a^Jfc
FubhA'hfd iffrlunupnaii i-Af«, ISO j . 
BOOK TIRST, PLATE ELEVENTH.
f'7
PLATE      XI.
tbii Plate explains the Text Book, from  Page 166, to Page IJ J.
KJY the Scapula, Clavicle,  and Arm Bone.

                       FIGURES    I.  and   II.

1_>Xflain the Scapula,  fhowing, iji, its internal,—2dlyi its external furface.
The Scapula  or Shoulder Blade, is of a triangular (hape.  (a)  Marks its flat furface,
    which is turned towards the ribs, hollow, to  fuit the convexity of the ribs.----And
    the letter (a)  is  repeated all over the furface, to fhow the little rifings  of this fur-
    face ; for this is the part upon which the Sub-fcapular  Mufcle lies ; and thefe rifings
    are  the marks of its  fibres.
(b) Shows the Outer Surface of the Scapula, which is in its turn a  little convex ,—is
    crofted by the Spine,  or that high ridge (8) which  divides it into  two furfaces;—
    the lower furface (c)  holding the infra-fpinatus ;—the upper furface (d) holding the
    fupra-fpinatus mufcle.

              The  Lines and Process of the  Scapula are  these ;
(i.) Is the upper Cofta or border of the Scapula,  where (?) marks a notch,  which is
    fometimes a complete  hole, or when incomplete it is made  out by a ligament.   It
    gives paffage  to  the  Scapular  arteries  and nerves,
                                        I 2                               (2.) The 
68                               OF THE  BONES.




(2.) Is the Lower Cofta or border, which is  round, and at the place (/) gives origin to



    the  Teres Major and Teres Minor mufcles.



(3.) This long fide is called the Bafis of the  Scapula, and has the great Trapezoid and



    Rhomboid Mufcles implanted  into  it from above and behind ; while the Serratus



    Anticus is implanted into it from before  and from below.



(4.) Shows the Upper Angle which  receives  the Levator Scapulae Mufcle.



(5.) The Lower Angle.



(6.) The Glenoid or Articulating Cavity, which is  particularly fmall and fuperficial,



    confidering how large the head of the fhoulder bone is.



(7.) The Neck of the Scapula fo called ; it is the fmaller part which fupports the head,



    though, properly fpeaking, there  is no neck;—and when the head  of the fhoulder



    bone is faid, in a luxation, to lie upon the neck of the Scapula, it lies upon the place



    marked (g).                   •



(8.) The Spine of the  Scapula, which divides the  upper furface, and which, rifing



    higher as  it goes forwards,  terminates at laft  in the Acromion Procefs.



(9.) Is the Acromion Procefs ;  it is  juft the end of the fpine,  which  turns  its  flat



    fide towards the head of the  fhoulder bone, and  overhangs  the  fhoulder to defend



    the  joint, and  prevent  luxations upwards.



(10.) And there is ftill a farther fecurity ;  for the  Coracoid Procefs (10) ftands upon the



    inner fide  of the joint, and defends it  within.   It is named Coracoid Procefs, from



    its being crooked like the  beak of  a crow.








                              FIGURE    III.







J_>Xplains the Clavicle or Collar Bone :  a bone which is extremely fimple  in  its



    form, and has few or no parts;—and  in  which the  letter (b)  marks the middle,



    the rounded part  of the bone, that point which  is  moft prominent in the  bread ;



    She part moft frequently broken,  (i) Marks the end neareft the Thorax, and (hows



                                                                               the 
                         BOOK FIRST, PLATE ELEVENTH.                     6$

   the circular articulating furface, by which it is joined to the Sternum ; and under this

   end a fmall moveable cartilage lies,  (i) Marks the outer  end, or that which is

   turned towards^ the fhoulder blade : the Clavicle is flattened at this end, and touches

   the Acromion by one fingle point only.



                              FIGURE    IV.


 J HE O.; Humeri,  Shoulder Bone, or Arm Bone.

(1.) The head is large,—flat,—is a fmall fegment of a large circle,—feems quite dif-

    proportioned to its focket, (6.  Fig. I. II.)

(2.) Is the neck  as it is called; though there is no proper neck; there being no length,

    nor narrower  part betwixt the  body and the head of the bone.

(3.) The Greater Tuberofity.

(4.) The Lefler Tuberofity;—the Greater  and  Leffer Tuberofities being two knobs,

    for the infertion of thofe mufcles which  come from the Scapula.

(5.) Is the Groove betwixt thefe tuberofities,  for the paffage of the long'tendon of the

    Biceps Mufcle, which runs here as a rope does  in its pulley.

(a)  Marks  the roughnefs about one third down the arm bone, into  which the tendon of

    the Deltoides is  implanted.

(b) Marks the place, where (a little below its middle) the Os  Humeri  turns flatter, be-

    caufe it is to terminate flat and broad, to favour the hinge-like joining  of the bones

    of the fore arm ; and

(6.)  Shows one ridge on the inner fide of the arm bone ;

 (7.)  Shows another fimilar ridge or edge of the bone, on its inner fide—each ridge run-

    ning down towards  its own Condyle.

 (8.) Is the  external Condyle, fmaller and lefs projeding, becaufe it gives origin only to

    the extenfors of the hand and fingers, a fet of mufcles which  do not need much power

    nor the advantage of a long lever.
                                                                             (9.) Is 
  -O                                OF  THE BONES.




(9.) Is the inner Condyle,  which  is very long and very prominent, to give a  greater



    power to thofe mufcles which bend the hand and fingers.



The elbow joint, being  a very ft rid and limited hinge, has a long articulating furface :—



    and there are properly two furfaces, one for the Radius, and one for the Ulna.



(10.)  Is the longer articulating furface, to which the Ulna is fo joined as to perform none



    but hinge-like motions.



(11 •)  Is a neat fmall round knob, tipped  with fmooth articular cartilage;  and to this



    fmall knob, the face of the button-like end of the radius is  applied;  and  by the



    roundnefs of this knob the radius  is  enabled  to perform  not only  the hinge-like



    motions to accompany the motion of the Radius ;  but alfo  its own free circular



    motions, by which the hand is carried round.



(12.) Is that very deep hole  which the Coronoid Procefs of the ulna checks into.



(13.J There is a fimilar one marked (13,) which belongs to the demonftration  of the fore



    part of the fhoulder-bone, and is to be feen by  turning to the next plate.
PLATE 
 
BOXES.
II..  A//.
II]
IV
VI
'US
fukluhed JhrZonqman k Baj l8o4.
$
 
BOOK FIRST,  PLATE TWELFTH.                     71
PLATE    XII.
This Plate explains the Text Bool, from Page \T],to Page 190.
jIXplains the Radius and Ulna, Carpus and Fingers.


                               FIGURE   I.

J N the drawing of the Os Humeri, all the defcriptions  and letters belonging to the laft
   plate  belong  equally to this.   This  drawing were fuperfluous,  but for the impor-
   tant purpofe of fhowing the back part of the articulating furface, where we do not find
   that round furface  marked  (n) in the laft plate, and which is called theLeffer Head
    of  the Humerus,  but  only  the hinge-like furface for the articulation of the Ulna.
   And the  chief objed of this drawing, is to (how, that here alfo upon the back part of
   the bone, there is a deep hollow betwixt the Condyles ; on the fore part of the bone the
   hollow is for  receiving the Coronoid  Procefs of the  Ulna, which  checks into that
   hollow when  the arm is bent forwards; but here  upon the back part, this deep hol-
   low, marked (13,) receives the Olecranon, or great procefs of the Ulna, when the arm
   is extended. It is alfo to be obferved; that in this drawing the twifted form of the bone
   is wTell expreffed and truely,  not  caricatured;   for the edge does in fad turn  thus
   round.
FIGURE 
 72                             r,T THE  BONES.


                                                  m




                             FIGURE    II.



                                   The Ulna.





 I HE Ulna is the longer of the two bones which lie in the fore arm.  The whole bone


   is of a triangular ihape, w ith 3 (harp edges ; the upper end is larger, and belongs to the


   elbow joint; the lower or Little Head belongs to the wrid. The bone has thefe points


   of defcription.


(1.)  Is the great cavity, which receives the lower end of the radius to form the  elbow


   joint, and this is called the Greater Sigmoid cavity.


(2.)  The Olecranon, a large tubercle  which marks the point of the elbow upon which we


   red, and guards the Sigmoid Cavity behind.


(3.)  The Coronary Procefs which dands up, and guards the Sigmoid Cavity before.


(4.)  The Hollow,  where the fide of the fmaller  button-like head  of the Radius  rolls,.


   called the Leffer Sigmoid Cavity.


(5.)  The Prominent Roughnefs, into which the tendon of the Brachialis  Internus is im-


   planted ; and it leads to the (harp ridge.


(6.^  The Sharp Ridge,  from which  the Inter-offeous Membraiie goes off.


(7.)  The Lower Head of the Ulna, which is fmall, and button-like; for it is received into


   a hollow on the fide of the Radius, and  it is upon this point, viz. the little head  of the


   Ulna,  that the radius turns in the continual motions of the hand.


(%.) Is the Styloid  Procefs of the Ulna, which is  pointed,  as the name implies ;  from  it


   ligaments go off to ftrengthen the  joint  of the wrift.



                              FIGURE   III.




T?
EXPLAINS tue relative pofition of the  Radius and Ulna.   The Ulna is marked with


   figures  according  with  the  above  defcription ; the  Radius is alfo marked with its


   points of demonftration.

                                                                       1. (a.  a. ce.y 
                          300K  FIRST,  PLATE  TWELFTH.                    ? ;

I. [a. a. a.)  Repeated on the three (ides of the Radius, explain the general triangular
   form of the bone, marking particularly its three edges.
2. (£) Marks the upper head of the Radius, flat, round and button-like, with the fide rol-
    ling upon the Leffer Sygmoid Hollow of the Ulna.
3. (c) The neck of the  Radius or draiter part, which immediately fupports the head.
4. (d) The Bump or Tubercle of the Radius, into which the tendon of the Biceps Mufck
    is implanted.
5. (<?) The  Lower Head of the Radius; the Bone is thus gradually enlarging towards
    its lower end.
6. if) The Scaphoid, or boat-like Cavity on  the lower end of the Radius for receiving
    the two larged bones of the Carpus ;—forming the wrift joint.
7. Cg)  The Styloid Procefs of the Radius, which bounds the wrift joint towards the fide
    of the thumb : and here it is feen how the little head of the Ulna (7) is received into
    the hollow focket on the fide of the Radius----*The two (harp  edges of the Ra-
    dius and Ulna are oppofed to each other, fhowing how the Inter-offeous Membrane
    ftretches from the one bone to the other, filling up all the fpace marked (h.)  And it
    is here feen that the Radius is fomewhat arched towards the Ulna, fo as to roll round
    it without touching it, or hurting or difordering the numerous mufcles, &e. which lie
    upon the Inter-offeous Membrane.

                              FIGURE    IV.

 Explains the Bones of the Carpus or Wrist,  as they are feen from the outfide, ov
    back of the hand.
 The Bones of the Carpus are 8 in number, they are divided pretty regularly into twe
    rows -—and we rather choofe to count and demondrate them according to their rank,
    than as individual and feparate bones : for as feparate bones there is nothing very
    particular in any one ;  but by their combination and form, and as they relate to the
                                          K.                                 wrift 
I                             OF  THE  BONES.
wrift joint, or to the fingers, it furely muft he important, I fnould/ather fry, neceTary,
 for the furgeon to remember them.
                             FIRST  ROW.

                          Forming the Wrist  Joint.

(i.)  The Scaphoid Bone, where the figure  (i.)'marks the regular round furface, which
   forms  a  chief part of the ball  and  focket-joint of the wrift.  And (a) marks the
   great hook-like  projedion of  this bone, whence that ftrong ligament which braces
   down the tendons of the Carpus arifes.
(2.)  The Lunated Bone, where the figure is fb placed as to mark the large  ball-like
   furface of this bone which joins with the Os Scaphoides to form the ball of the wrift.
   ----And the lunated part of the bone is concealed, when thus joined with the others.
(3.)  The Cunieform Bone, of which only the broad or fquare furface is feen on the back
   of the wrift, while the narrower part of the wedge is  in the palm.
(4.)  The Piriform Bone, fo named from its roundnefs, this bone is a little removed from.
   the diredion of the row to which it belongs.
                           SECOND  R O W.
                      Receiving the  Metacarpal Bones%
00- TheOs Trapezium; or firft  bone of the upper row named Trapezium,  from its
   fquare  and angular form.  It has  the ball of the thumb planted upon, it and the
   figure points diredly to that focket which  receives the fhumb,;
                                                                            (fiO 
                         BOOK FIRST, PLATE  TWELFTH.                     75
{6\) The Trapezoides, fo named from its refemblance to the laft.
(7.) Os Magnum, for it is the greateft ; and  it has a curious head which is in this view
    concealed under the Os Lunare ;  for the head of the Os Magnum is received into the
    femicircular hollow of the Os Lunare, forming a ball and focket joint with that bone.
(8.) The Os Unciforme, or hook-like bone ;  the hook of which is towards the palm, and
    therefore not feen in this view.
2V. B. In this drawing of the Carpus, Fig. IV. this group of bones is  made to reft chiefly
    upon two of the corner bones, viz.  the hook of the Os Scaphoides,  and the Os Pifi-
    forme.


                              FIGURE   V.

J. S alfo  drawn chiefly with the intention of  explaining the carpus ; and here the fame
    numbers may ferve, for the pofition of the Carpus is very little changed.
fi.) is the Scaphoid Bone ; (2.) The Lunar  Bone,  forming with the Scaphoid the  ban1
    for the wrift joint. (3.) The Os Cuneiforme.  (4.) The Os Pififorme is out  of fight.
    (5.)  The Trapezium which fupports the  thumb; (6.) (7.) C8.) The Trapezoides^
    Magnum, and Unciforme, fupporting all the others fingers ;  and here the Os Magnum
    (7.) is feen a little fuller ; fo that the round head of it can almoft be feen jointed with
    the Os Lunare. The  iflt 2d)  and $d Phallanges or rows of bones belonging to the fe*
    vefal joints of the fingers, need not be  explained j and the  round  heads for the joints
    of thefe  finger bones explain themfelves.


                             FIGtlRE    VI.

JL resents  the Carpus in a new diredion ; fhowing thofe bones which are lels perfedly
    feen in the other drawings;—andjt is necefTary to  obferve, that  the group of the"
                                           K a                            Catpal 
76                            OF THE  BONES.





  Carpal bones is now turned, fo as to (how that  face of them which receives the



  Metacarpal Bones;—and the group now  reds  chiefly  upon the points of  the  two



  upper  Corner  Bones, viz.  the Trapezoid and  Unciform Bones;  as in the other



  view it reded upon the lowTer Corner Bones, viz.  the Scaphoid and Piriform Bones.



  So that here there is  only  the  upper row fairly demondrated, viz.—(5.)  The Os



  Trapezium ;—(67) the Os Trapezoides ;—(7.)  the Os Magnum ;—(8.)  the Os Un-



  ciforme.   (b) Marks a fmall pointed projedion of the Os Trapezium, whence  the



  Carpal Ligament arifes.—(r) Marks the great Unciform or hook-like procefs of the



  Unciform  Bone,  which  is another point whence  the  fame crofs  ligament  of  the



  Carpus rifes.—(d)  Marks the arch which the Carpal Bones make,  and the Tendons



  of the wrid lie in this arch, and are bound down by the crofs ligament crofting from



  the one corner  point, to the other* 
THE
SECOND   BOOK.
&F THE
MUSCLES. 
 
 
MUSCLES
PL. I.
FubUihed Jvr Lcmgman t JUts. i8od 
BOOK      SECOND,
OF  THE
MUSCLE     S
• ma^SEsass^r^=~-
PLATE     I.
MUSCLES  OF   THE  FACE.
This Plate explains the Text Book, from page I9I, to page 213.
X HIS Plate explains the chief Mufcles of the Face ; and there are feen
   here feveral Mufcles alfo of the Neck, Throat, Shoulder, and Bread.—
   It was drawn  from a fubject that had been hanged,  and the neck being
   broken,  the head lies  flatter upon one fhoulder, than  it fhould do even
   in the dead body;.  for the  Atlas and Dentatus, the two firft Vertebrae
   of  the Neck, were fairly broken loofe from each other.—The Mufcles
   are more  diftinctly feen on the  left fide ; on  the right fide they are
   thrown into fhadow, and are but faintly indicated.—The mufcles of the
  outline are truer in point of Anatomy ; while,  in the full engraving, the
                                                               general 
  So                            OF THE  MUSCLES.
    general appearance,  the thinnefs  and delicacy, and the  undefined  con-
    nections of the mufcles,  are well  exprefled ; and it is to be particularly
    noticed, that  the Levator Anguli Oris (7.)  is not fo true in the engrav-
    ing,  while it is, I believe, very true and correct in  the outline.

{1.) Is the Occipito Frontalis, which covers the Occiput and forehead,  with its two
    flefhy bellies, and the crown or top of the head with its thin flat tendon. The Occi-
    pital Belly is not feen  here.  The thin Tendon fometimes midaken  for the Pericra-
    nium, is marked (a) ; the Frontal Belly  is marked (£) ; or  rather there  are  two
    Frontal Bellies marked (bb).  Each Frontal Belly fends a fmall flip of fibres,  or a
    peak, down upon the back of the Nofe marked (c) *.  The  Frontalis  is conneded
    chiefly with the  fkin, but little with  the bone; is chiefly for furling up and wrink-
    ling the (kin of the forehead.
(2.) Is  the Corrugator Supercilii,  more conneded  with the Orbicularis Oculi,
    than with the Occipito  Frontalis, and lying under the Occipito Frontalis.
(3.) Is the Orbicularis Oculi ; arifing  by a fmall white Tendon (d)y from the Nafal
    Procefs of  the Jaw Bone. Its fibres go in regular  circles  round  the eye, and they
    are continued circles which  return to the white Tendon in the corner  of the eye,
    whence they firft arife ;  the whole mufcle is thin, flat, broad, very diftind,  (huts
    the eye-lids, compreffes the eye, fcpieezes  out  the tears f.
                                                                                The
  * This Nafal Peak of the Occipito Fitmtalis is not the flip which is fixed into  the Os Frontis • that
lies deeper, while this Nafal Peak is fuperficial, runs down the back of the Nofe, expanding upon it,
and forming with the mufcles below a fort of fafcia, or Tendinous expanfion, which covers the Nofe
This Nafal flip is  implanted  rather  into the (kin of the Nofe, and wrinkles it; while the General
Mufcle corrugates the (kin of  the forehead.
  f The whole  of what yve call the Orbicularis Oculi,  is named by Walther, Corrugator Oculi 5
and he feems to divide  it into an upper and lower portion, by  the names of Mufculus Semicircular^
Palpebrse Superiors, and Mufculus Semicircularis Palpebral Inferioris. 
                           BOOK SECOND, PLATE FIRST,                       8l
The Corrugator Supercilii (2.) arifes from the Os Frontis betwixt the Eye-brows, and
    lies under that Peak of the  Frontalis which expands upon the back of the Nofe.—
    This Corrugator may almoft be confidered as merely a (lip of  the Orbicularis Oculi
    (3.) ;  for in fad the  fibres of  the  Corrugator  go round the orbit  with  the upper
    fibres of the Orbicularis  Oculi,  and mix with them, fo as to form the upper  edge
    of the  Orbicularis ; and thence the names of Corrugator and Orbicularis are fome-
    times interchanged*.
(5.)  f Is the Levator  Labii Superioris, and Alje Nasi; This  mufcle arifes by  a
    fmall double Tendon,  from the Nafal Procefs of the Upper  Jaw Bone, and has one
    little  (lip (e) going  into the Ala  Nafi for dilating it; and another (f) going into
    the upper lip, for drawing  it upwards f.
(6.)  Levator Labii Superioris Proprius, arifes from the Jaw Bone at the very edge
    of the Orbit, and above the Infra Orbitary Hole §.   It  has  two flips of  fibres, one
    (g) coming  from the  bone, from  under the Orbicularis Mufcle, and another (lip,
    (&) which is continued from the lower fibres of the Orbicularis Mufcle itfelf.  So
    this  is a Biceps Mufcle; it lies fuperficially; it draws the  middle  of the lip up-
    wards  ; it is often named as a Biceps or two headed Mufcle j|.
                                        L                               7. Levator
  * Walther, in his defcription of  his own and Sanctorin's Plates, draws  into the explanation of this
Corrugator Mufcle, all the  upper  part of the Orbicularis  Oculi; as if it  were but a part of the
Corrugator.
  f It will be  obferved here, that  the fuite of the numbers 1, 2, 3, &c.  is not regularly followed;
becaufe it was impoifible to explain absolutely every mufcle in any fett of drawings, however full.
  t " Maxime nunc in ufum habent ilii, qui detractores contemptorefque  funt aliorum, et forte haee
" verba in uno vel altero eundum motum excitabunt."
  $ This is the Musculus Pyramidalis of Walther.
  || Euftachius draws, the mufcle with thefe two heads.  Albinus defcribes the  little head  (£), as  a
diftinct part of the mufcle, both in  his explanation of Euftachius, and in his own plates.  Cant ob-
                                                                                feri-es 
 32                           OF THE  MUSCLES.
(7.) Levator Anguli Oris ;  arifes above the dog tooth, and is thence named Caninu3.—
    This mufcle arifes under the Infra Orbitary Hole, as the laft arofe from above it; this-
    of courfe lies under the laft, and fo is lefs perfedly feen here. Its diredion is different
    from that of the Levator  Labii;  as  it runs more  perpendicularly,  or runs rather
    outwards  than inwards.  It is fhort; two headed like the laft ; rifes properly from,
    the Socket Procefs of  the firft Grinder. • It  lifts the Angle of the mouth,  whence
    its name; and it operates on both lips, whence it is named,  Levator Communis.
(8.) Zygomaticus Major ; arifes  from the Zygomatic  Procefs  of the Cheek Bone;
    goes inwards to the corner of the mouth; is long, (lender,, oblique in its diredion.
    It paffes over that hollow  in the Cheek Bone,  which is filled up with fat, and fo
    when the mufcle is diffeded, it  falls into this loofe flaccid and bending form*.
 (9.)  The Zygomaticus Minor, like it, but not always found.
 (10.) The Buccinator,  is feen here to lie deeper ; it  forms the flat part of the cheek ;
    it arifes from the Coronoid Procefs of the  Lower Jaw,  and  from the roots of the
    back Grinders.  It goes  forward  with dired fibres,  (as  feen  here)  towards the
    corner of the mouth.
 (n.) The TriangulariSj is neat, fmall,  triangular; its bafe arifes  from the Jaw, its
    point ends  in the corner of the mouth.—It draws the corner of the mouth down,,
    and is named Depreflbr Anguli Oris,, or the Depreflbr Communis Labiorum.
 (12.) Is  the Depressor  Labii Inierioris Proprius.  This  mufcle arifes from  the line
    of  the Jaw, touches and erodes its fellow under the middle.of the lower lip.  They
    pull the lip  downwards.
 (13.) The Orbicularis Oris,, is thick, broad,  and flefhy ; forms the flefhy part of the
                                                                               lip;
 fferves this leparate part proceeding from the fibres of  the Orbicularis, fo particularly as to reckon it
 almoft a diftinct mufcle, a depreflbr of the lower Eye-lid; faying, " Ex confpecf u ilium habere decet
 " pro depreflbre Mufculo  Palpebral Inferioris."  Cantii Impetus.
   * This Zygomaticus Major, is fometimes fplit into  two infertions at the angle of the mouth. 
                           BOOK SECOND, PLATE FIRST.                       83

   lip ; is  in the red part of the lip,  but is much broader than the red part.  Its fibres
   are grofs and ftrong, they go  in a circular diredion fairly round both lips, they are
   not interrupted at the angles of the mouth ; they fend up a fmall (lip, which pafling
   in the furrow  of the lip, and mounting upon the Septum of the Nofe,  is named
   Nafalis, and is marked (i).
(15.) The Constrictor Nasi, is  here diftindly  marked  Tunning over  the point of
   the Nofe *.
(30.) Is the Temporal Muscle ; which is feen here, lying under its fafcia.  The fafcia,
   or Tendinous expanfion of  the Temple being  here  entire,  and nothing cut away
   but the Membraneous Mufcles of the ear, the Anterior and the Superior Auris.
(31.) Is the Masseter, which is a  fhort,  thick, and flefhy mufcle;  and to lay it en-
   tirely open, the Parotid Gland which is marked (&), is diffeded up from the cheek,
   fo that  the head of the Maffeter is feen arifing from the  Cheek Bone; and its lower
   end is feen implanted into the Jaw f.
(m) Marks the Fascial Artery, or Labial Artery,  as it is called, the Artery of the
   face, crofting over the angle of the Jaw,
Thus we fee in the dead body, thofe mufcles which give form and charader to the hu-
   man  countenance, lying all dead  and flaccid.   The  mouth open,  the lips loofe and
   fhrivelled ;  the  angles of the mouth dropping  down, the cheek funk; and  the eye
   alfo clofed,  and funk  down within its  orbit.—All the countenance  is deformed,
   and the traits  of individual charader or beauty,  quite gone :—but  ftill enough re-
   mains  to explain to us what thofe mufcles are, upon which chiefly the intereding
   variety  of  expreffion  and  form  depends.    The Occipito  Frontalis  wrinkles the
                                      L 2                                 forehead.
  * This is the Tranfverfus Nafi of Walther.. The action of this mufcle is very diftinftly feen, in the
agony of an Afthmatic fit;  it is feen alfo  in violent diftortion, produced by rage, or defpair.  Cant
compares it to that mufcle in the dog, by which he curls the Nofe, and mows the teeth in fnarling.
  t This is fometimes called, the Musculus Mansor. 
  84                            OF  THE MUSCLES.





    forehead :, the Corrugator  Supercilii knits the  brows :  the  Levatores Labiorum



    lift up the  lip,, fpread wide  the nodrils, and  open the mouth ;  the  Depreffores



    Labiorum deprefs the lip; the Triangular Mufcles  draw down  the corners of  the



    mouth;  the  Zygomatic Mufcle didorts the cheek, and the  Orbicularis Oris antago-



    nifes all thefe, and  clofes the mouth.—Thefe mufcles, while they  are  performing



    more  important offices, alfo exprefs  the  pafiions, and mark the countenance with



    traits never to be effaced, the true dudy of thofe  who would be Phyfiognomids; who



    talk but idly, when they fpeak of expreffion in thofe immoveable features, which  are



    formed rather by the  Contour of a bone.  "  The fagacious forehead or  oeconomical



    " nofe," are the rhapfodies of an Enthufiaft,.  not the ferious obfervations of a fedate



    man, ftudious of that fubjed, which is intereding above all others.



The fiiapes of the bones determine the general form of the face. One great mufcle,  the



    Maffeter, gives the rounding of the  cheek;  the red are all delicate and moveable



    mufcles ;  and  the great charaders of the face,, center round the mouth and nodrils



    where thefe mufcles converge.   The lean and  delicate face,, gains in expreffion where



    the cheek is  hollow, the angle of the mouth  moveable, the  lines ftrong; but in



    thofe who are bloated, the cheek is fuller,  the lines obliterated,  the delicate turnings



    of thought  and feeling are loft ; all but the more violent drains of  paflion  are hur-



    ried in the mafs.  The great lines of  charader,  are the line of the Zygomatic Muf-



    cle, coming  from  above,  and of the  Triangular  Mufcle. coming from the chin ; and



    the moving point towards  which they  all ad, is the corner of the mouth.   In chear-



   ful emotions  the features  rife all towards  the  eye, which becomes  full and turgid.



    In the depreffing pafiions the features fink, the eye is languid,  and the whole coun-



    tenance gets a  thoughtful ferious cad.. But dill it is the corner of the mouth, that



    is the central point  of all thefe changes.



The corners of the mouth are continually  fupported by  the adion of the Levator, and



    of the Zygomatic Mufcles ;  they are  raifed high in fmiling, fo as  to form a dimple



    there.   They  are raifed higher  in laughter, fo  as to fwell the  cheek,  wrinkle  the




       a                                                                       eye 
t
f
                           BOOK SECOND,  PLATE FIRST,                       85




   fye-Iids, and comprefs the  eye,  till tears begin to flow..  And the corner of the



   mouth, which is thus raifed in  laughter, is  diftorted  in pride,  malice, hatred;  is



   dilated and drawn backwards in rage; drops lower in grief; and in palfy falls quite



   down.



Thefe movements  round the angle of the  mouth,  are  the  chief indications in the facer



   itfelf,  while  all other indications of paflion, proceed rather from the general fydem.



   A healthy body,  and chearful mind, have  the  face full,  the eye humid, the limbs



   braced, the whole body  free, and light moving.  In languid healthr or under afflic-



   tion and care, the face is pale, the eye  cold, the whole body languid and relaxed;



   and fo it is in paflion, for the medical arrangement of the pafiions is nearly corred.



   There are two great claffes of pafiions, the exciting and the deprefling pafiions ;  in the



   exciting pafiions, as joy or  anger, the heart  beats high ; the face is  turgid ; the



   eye prominent and fparkling ; the mufcles are tenfe ; the limbs braced; the whole



   body is in a  moveable, adive, and highly excited ftate.  But  when the  heart beats



   languid in grief, or palpitates with fear, the face becomes pale, the features (ink,



   the  limbs  tremble,  the  whole'frame  is  unbraced,  cold,  and unapt for motion;



   and from thefe general  conditions of the fyftem refult all  thofe  other  marks  of  *



   paflion, which accompany the changes  of the face ; for in grief, fear,  defpair, the



   blood ebbs,, and the  face is pale,  and the features fink; while in  anger the face is



   red, the eye brows  corrugated, and the eye turgid and (trained ; but  in rage, the



   w7hole mufcidar  frame is drained toward the moft  violent  adion,  the breath is



   retained^ while the pulfe beats high ; and fo the face becomes turgid,_ the eye is fierv



   and red, there is a  grinding of  the teeth, the angles  of the mouth are drained



   backwards, the noftrils are raifed  and dilated,  the  Buccinator, Zygomatic, Maffeter,



   and Temporal Mufcles are in violent  adion, which gives  an Angular  and Linear



   hardnefs to all the features,;  and faliva and foam proceed from the univerfal preffure



   upon all the glands.                                                    ""**



                                                                    MUSCLES 
OF  THE MUSCLES.
                        MUSCLES  OF  THE  EVTE.

       Figures XII. and XIII.  of Plate II.  Explain the Mufcles of the Eye.
The origin of the Mufcles at the bottom of the Orbit,  being once underftood,  all their
    mechanifm will be very plain and eafy, for this fingle point has been the chief diffi-
    culty  from  the firft.  Galen  counted the Levator Palpebrae,  as one  of the proper
    mufcles of the eye;  Vefalius underftood better than Galen the origin of the Redi
    Mufculus  from  the bottom of the Orbit, but like Galen he has drawn the eye from
    Brutes, and  has defcribed its  mufcles, and drawn them in fo confufed a way,
    that it is not eafy  to  comprehend that mufcle  of his, " which  adheres in all its
    " courfe to the Optic Nerve. ^ (Septimus Oculi Mufculus,  nulla ex  parte  a viforio
    " nervo Iiberatus.")  But even after this difcovery of the true origin of thefe mufcles,
    one author of very high reputation, Mr Lieutaud, denied the origin of thefe mufcles
    around the root of the Optic Nerve ; believing [that the fixed  point, or center of all
    thefe  mufcles, was a point a little  to the outer fide  of  that hole, by which the
    Optic  Nerve enters the focket.
But now this  point, of their general origin from the bottom of the focket,  is univerfally
    acknowledged;   and the chief difpute  is,  wdiether thefe  five mufcles, in arifing
    round  the root  of the Optic Nerve, begin from the periofteum of the focket; or
    from  the bone itfelf, or from the outer coat (the Dura Mater) of the  Optic Nerve;
    or whether they do  not arife by a  particular  ring, which furrounds the root of the
    Optic Nerve; for Valfava believed that thefe mufcles began by a fort of ring, which
    as it  furrounded the root of the Optic Nerve, he chofe to call Circulus Moderato-
    rius Nervi Optici.  But in this difpute,  as ufually happens, both parties  are right,
  ' and both  are in fome degree wrong ; for  two of the five mufcles arife more properly
    from  the  outer coat of the Optic  Nerve, while the three  others arife plainly  from
                                                                                the 
                          BOOK SECOND, PLATE FIRST.                      Sy
    the Dura Mater where it  forms the periodeum  of the Orbit; the Dura Mater gra-
    dually afluming  the nature of a common  tendon,  from which thofe three mufcles-
    arife.
The place where this tendon begins,  is the inner end of that Foramen Lacerum  which
    belongs  to the Sphoenoid  Bone,  and which  admits  the fmaller  nerves to enter  for
    the mufcles of the eye;  for when the Dura Mater has come out by this hole from
    the Cranium  into the Orbit, it affumes, juft where it covers  that hole, a hard and
    tendinous nature, becomes white, affumes  the appearance of a tendony  and is in
    fad, the common  Tendon by which three of the mufcles arife; and as -this hole
    is below the Optic Nerve, and toward the outer fide of it,  the mufcles which arife
    by this  common tendon  are chiefly thofe  which pull  the eye outwards or  down-
    wards ; and fo this common tendon  gives origin to the Abdudor, Deprimens and
    Addudor.
But thofe mufcles again which cover the upper part of the Optic Nerve,  arife clofe
    round the margin of the Optic hole ; they touch the nerve and a«dhere to it;  by  ad-
    hering to the nerve, they may be faid to arife  from the  nerve or from that Angle
    of the Dura Mater where it comes through the Optic hole,  to go over  the ©ptic
    Nerve.  So the Levator  and the  Obliquus Superior  arife from the Dura Mater,
    where it forms the (heath of the Optic Nerve ; while the Deprimens, Abdudor, and
    Addudor, arife by one common tendon from the  Dura Mater where it  covers, the
    Foramen Lacerum,  forming the periofteum  of the orbit.
This is all feen  at (a), Figures XII. and XIII.  where (a) (hows the fringed edge  of the
    Dura Mater furrounding the root of the Optic Nerve ; (b) the origins of the Levator
    and Obliquus Superior,  in the angle where  the Dura Mater turns backwards. And
   (c) (hows the origin of the Abdudor and Deprimens coming from the  Periofteum
    of the  Foramen Lacerum, a little to one  fide  of the great Nerve.
The only other difficult point, and which is more important dill, fince it explains the
    relative fize, and  (hape, and courfe  of thefe mufcles,  is  the  true  place of this
                                                                          eentral 
 88                            OF THE  MUSCLES.

    central  point from which  the mufcles rife, or in other words,  the  true  place of
    the Optic  hole  by which  the Optic Nerve enters,  and from the  margins of which
    all thefe mufcles rife.   This will be eafily explained by the marginal plate, which
    (hows the holes within  the  focket;  the pofition of the eye with regard to thofe
    holes, and fo explains the relative length of each of the mufcles.
id, The eye is placed in the focket, as I have reprefented by the circle (a),  not dired-
    ly in the  middle, but  a little to one fide.  The eye does not look out from the
    Orbit in the diredion of the Axis of the Orbit; for  the  axes of the  two orbits
    meet  almod in  the  bottom of the focket, crofting in the Cella  Turcica, * but
    both  the  eyes look diredly  forwards.   The  plane of the  fore part of the Orbit
    being oblique, and falling  off towards  the temple,  while  the eye looks  diredly
    forwards; the axis of  the Orbit,  and of the  eye can  not coincide f.  This is the
    reafon of the Pupil,  being nearer to one angle and not in the center of  the focket,
    for which we  have the bed authority, that of meafuring  the  eye when we pleafe.
    But  the  authorities  of books on this  point  are thefe ; Heifter makes  the Pupils
    diftant three  inches  from  each other.  Camper makes the Pupils diftant two in-
    ches  and a half.   But  the eye being compared  not with  the other eye, but with
    its own focket,  it is found that the center of  the Pupil is eight lines from the outer
    angle of  the eye, and feven lines from its inner angle %.   Thefe are my rules for
    placing the  eye in its focket, in this  plan.   And the eye being thus regularly
    placed, we find by  this drawing, (not geometrically  true, but  ftill fufficient for
    proving and illuftrating fo plain a matter as  this  is,) that the Foramen Opticum
    and the larger end of the  Foramen Lacerum are  much  above  the  center of the
    orbit, and towards the inner4ide; whence it is plain that the Optic Nerve in going
    towards the ball of the eye, moves a little outwards and  defcends.  And it is alfo
                                                                              very
      * Camper.
      \ Winflow, Academic des Sciences.           *
      $ Petit Acadamie des Sciences. 
                          BOOK SECOND, PLATE FIRST.                      Sp
   very manifeft, that fince the mufcles, to  get at their infertions  muft go round the
   globe of the eye ; thofe which go round by the outer fide of the eye, or pafs under
   it, muft be longer, while their antagonifts which keep to the inner fide of the eye
   or go over the globe,  mud be (horter.  And  fo the Addudor Mufcle which is on
   the fide next the nofe,  is the only ftraight mufcle ; it is the (horteft, while the Ab-
   dudor is  the longeft.  The  Abdudor and the  Deprimens  Oculi, are  the longer
   mufcles of the eye : The Addudor and the Levator Oculi, are the (horter mufcles.

In this plan,  the center of the focket  (a) is marked  by the crofting of its two dia-
   meters.  The center of the Pupil is marked at (b) nearer the inner angle of the eyer
   the Foramen Opticum is marked (c), and the inner end of the Foramen Lacerum
   is marked (d).
                                        M                                    la
 
 <p                           ©F  THE  MUSCLES.
in Figure Xll.  thefe points are feen;  (a) the ring wrhich the Dura Mater forms, where
    it comes from the brain into the Orbit, accompanying the Optic Nerve ;  (£) the ori-
    gin of the Obliquus  Superior and Levator, from this part of the  Dura Mater fur-
    rounding the Optic Hole,   (c) The origins of the Abdudor and Deprimens,  but the
    letter (c) points more particularly to the origin of the Abdudor, which is here feen
    to be a Biceps, or two headed mufcle, having two Tendons,  and the fmaller nerves
    which belong to the mufcles of the eye are feen at (d), palling betwixt thefe two ten-
    dinous origins of the Abdudor.   For it is to be remembered, that  this Abdudor
    along with two of the Redi, rifes from that part of the Dura Mater, which covers
    the  Foramen Lacerum ; and that  the fmall nerves  enter the  focket by the Fora-
    men Lacerum.
From this root round the Optic Nerve, the mufcles are feen going forwards.
i. The  Obliojjus Superior or Trochlears (29) uppermoft, the longed mufcle of the
    eye with its  (lender Tendon paffing through the Cartilaginous  Pulley (e), which is
    left dill in its plaee attached to the Superciliary Ridge of the Frontal Bone (f).
1. The  Obliojjus Inferior,  {"30) is feen, the fhorted mufcle of the eye, arifing  from
    the lower part of  the Orbit, and going backwards to antagonize the laft.
3. The Rectus  Superior (25) next  to the Redus Internus which  it hides, is the
    (horteft mufcle.
4. The  Rectus  Externus (28) or Abducens  Oculi, is the longed of all the ftraight
    mufcles of the eye.
5. The Rectus Inferior or Deprimens Oculi (26) is (horter than the Abducens, (28)
    but  longer than the Redus Superior (25), becaufe the Optic  Nerve enters a litde
    above the center of the Orbit.  The Tendons of thefe Redi Mufcles are feen expand-
    ing .flat and broad upon the forepart of the eye; where  by fhining through that thin
   and Transparent (kin, which covers the forepart of the eye, they form what is called
   the Albuginia, or white coat of the eye.
                                                                          There 
                          BOOK SECOND, PLATE FIRST.                      Ql
There remains but one mufcle belonging to the eye, and that is, the Levator Palpe-
   br^e  Superioris  (4) ; which  is explained in Figure XIII. where  it is feen rifing
   from the upper part of the Optic Hole at (a),  along with the other mufcles; it
   lies over all the other mufcles, and expands into a thin and membraneous flefh (b)f
   which runs imperceptibly into the  fubftance  of the upper eye-lid; and feems to
   end in (c) the Tarfus, or Cartilaginous hoop of  the eye-lid.
The XIV Figure of this plate, explains the mufcles of the outward ear, as they  are
   expreffed by  Cowper.   Where (17) marks the Superior Auris or Atollens; and
   (19) the Posterior Auris or Retrahens, as they are explained in the book of  ther
   mufcles,  p. 240.
M- 2
PLATE 
 
 
 
BOOK SECOND, PLATE SECOND.
93
PLATE     II.
This Plate explains the Tent Book, from page %\%, to page 231.
 1 HIS plate belongs chiefly  to the  Throat;  explains  the  Cartilaginous
    and bony parts, of which the upper  part of the throat and efpecially
    the flute part or Larynx is  formed; fhows the Os Hyoides; the Thy-
    roid, Cricoid, and x\rytenoid Cartilages;  the Epiglottis; and the Mem-
    branes and Mufcles by which thefe Cartilages are connected,  fo as  to
    form a rigid tube confiding of parts moveable upon one another, and yet
    fo firm upon the whole, as to be a protection  to all  the  more delicate
    parts  of the  throat, and to be  the center  of  all the  motions of the
    Jaws,  and Tongue, and Windpipe, and  Gullet; or of the Larynx and
    Pharynx,  as they are called.

THIS Plate explains  firft all the  individual parts  one by one;  and then joins them,
   Ihowing how the whole is compofed ; without which regular form of demonftration,
   nothing could be  clearly  underftood of parts  fo very  intricate and difficult, and
   having  fo long a catalogue of hard names conneded with them.
      2                                                       F I R S  T 
94
OF  THE MUSCLES*
                              FIRST  ROW.






The firft row gives the parts  fingle and entirely diffeded;  and there is reprefented,



(i.) The Os Hyoides, which refembles in its  general form the lower Jaw Bone of *~



    child,  or what is called the Thought Bone of a fowl; (a) is its bafis, (b) its horn,



    (c)  the Cartilaginous joinings of the horns >and body, and  two little Tubercles



    ftand  perpendicularly  up at  the place of  this  joining,, which are called  the-



    Cornua Minora  or  lefler horns, or Appendices  of the  Os Hyoides.   Thefe Cor-



    nua Minora are here reprefented fn outline.  The Os Hyoides  is named  alfo the



    bone of the Tongue,  and its connedions  are  efpecially to be obferved, viz. that



    it lies  in the root of the tortgue; forms in  a manner the top  piece of the Trachea,



    is tied by a membrane to the  Thyroid Cartilage, has the Epiglottis (5.) or  valve



    of  the windpipe planted upon it.  And that thefe connedions may be underftood^



    this bone is marked with this figure (1.) in aH the other drawings.



(2.) Is the Thyroid or Shield-like  Cartilage ; whieh is indeed the fhield of  the



    Throat, for it  is broad, flat,  and very deep, and a full inch in  length ; it is thick,



    and often offified.   And accordingly it is this broad Cartilage that defends the more



    delicate parts; its upper  horns  (dd), are tied to the Os  Hyoides by  a  long liga-



    ment ; its lower ones (e e) clofely embrace the Cricoid  Cartilage.  In this drawing,,



    the Cartilage-is fet  fo as to reft upon its two lower Cornua, and to fupport and bal-



    lance it a common pin marked (*),  was thrufiV into it.



(3.) Is the Cricoid Cartilage ; which  is not, like the Thyroid, a femicircle merely,



    i. e. wanting at the back part, but is an entire ring which forms, as it were,,  the



    uppermoft  and firmed  ring of the Trachea, but which ftill belongs  properly  to



    the Larynx.   It  is (hallow before,  and very  deep in  the  back part of its  circle,



    plainly for the purpofe of railing the Arytenoid Cartilages,  (thofe fmaH Cartilages




                                                                            which. 
                         BOOK SECOND, PLATE SECOND*                     95
   which form the Rima Glottidis or opening  of the windpipe) ; and by this decpneh
   at its back part, the Cricoid Cartilage raifes the opening of the Glottis fo high, (as
   rs feen figures vii.  and viii.) that it is behind the very center of the Thyroid Car-
   tilage where it is well defended and fafe.   The  Articulating Surfaces upon which
   the Arytenoid Cartilages fit down, are  marked (/).
(4.)  The Arytenoid Cartilages, are the fmall  and moveable  ones, which are of a
   Triangular form;  they are fet down upon the upper border of the Cricoid Cartilage,
   by their bafe (g) with a very moveable articulation;  and (g)  points to the focket
 •  furface of the Arytenoid Cartilage by which the articulation  is formed.   For here
   the two  uppermod drawings of the Cartilage are fet oppofite to each other, almoft
   in their  natural pofitions, and refting upon their  bafis, while  the lowed drawing of
   the three, is turned up fo as to fhow  its joint.   The two (harp points of the  Ary-
   tenoid Cartilages ftand perpendicularly upwards, and give the (hape and opening of
   the  Glottis.  The tips of the  two Arytenoid Cartilages are feen over the Thyroid
   Cartilage  in figure viii.  and the Cartilages are feen full in figure vii. fettled  in their
   place, and forming the Rima Glottidis or chink of  the windpipe, which is narrower
   or wider as they are moved by their mufcles.
(5.}  Shows  the Epiglottis, which may be  compared  to an  Artichoke  leaf.   It
   flaps down like a  fmall  tongue or valve,  and, by flapping  neatly down  upon the
   Rima Glottidis, makes  the food  and  drink glide clear  over  the  Glottis, and into
   the Gullet or Pharynx.   The  Epiglottis is reprefented in this drawing, fo as to ex-
   plain its connedion with the Os Hyoides, and of courfe with  the Toot of the tonguc-
                            SECOND   ROW.

The connedions are explained in the figures of  the fecond row j each part preferves its
    peculiar marks  (1.2.3.) &c#  anc* *c is feen in figure  vi. in what fucceflion thefe
    parts ftand.                                                                _
    ^                                                                   (1.) The 
On
OF  THE MUSCLES.
                             FIGURE    VI.

(i.)  Tie Os Hyoides, conneded by its long horns with the upper horns of the Thyroid
   Cartilage.  It is a ligament (h) of a full inch in length  that conneds  them.  And
   the common  membrane of the Trachea is  continued from the Os Hyoides,  to  the
   Thyroid Cartilage, fo that the gap betwixt them is filled up  by a ftrong, but  thin
   membrane (i).
(2.) The Thyroid  Cartilage is next, it  ftands forwards in the throat to  defend  the
    other parts ; is  diftindly felt without; is the mod prominent part of the throat;
    and named Pomum Adami.
(3.) Is the Cricoid Cartilage,  which in this  profile of the throat, is  feen  to be very
    (hallow before,  as it is deep behind.
The Arytenoid  Cartilages,  (4.)  are  neceffarily hidden  in this view;  and the Epi-
    glottis (5.) is cut away,  to  make this drawing more fimple  and eafy.
The Thyroid Gland is marked  (6.) the chief part of it is feen on the nearer fide of the
    Trachea, and a  part alfo of the right lobe is feen coming round from the  other
    fide behind the Trachea, and almod furrounding it.   (7.) Marks  the Trachea,  and
    the figure  is  here made  to^ point to the uppermoft ring, that the true place of the
    Thyroid Gland might be underftood, for it lies not  upon the Thyroid Cartilage (2.)
    nor upon  the Cricoid Cartilage (3.)  as  might be fuppofed, but upon the fecond
    ring of the Trachea, leaving the firft one free.

                     FIGURE    VII.   and  VIII.

/3 RE chiefly  ufeful in explaining the  places  of the two  Arytenoid Cartilages, and the
    way in which they form the opening of the Glottis.
Figure VII.  The Os Hyoides  is cut away.   The  Thyroid  Cartilage (2.) is feen in
                                                                               its 
                         BOOK SECOND,  PLATE  SECOND,                     97





   its  place, defending and concealing the Arytenoid Cartilages; or at lead, the tips



   only ©f the Arytenoid Cartilages are feen (4.) peeping over the border of the Thy-



   roid Cartilage. (3.) The fore-part of the ring-like  or Cricoid Cartilage, is feen



   conneded  with the upper ring ©f the Trachea;  but leaving an interdice (/£)  of  a



   triangular  form,  at which point, (and not betwixt  the  rings of the Trachea), Mr



   Vique D.  Azir propofes to perform the operation of Bronchotomy.



Figure VIII.  Shows  the  back view of  the  fame diffedion.   The  Os Hyoides is



   fhown in outline, and in  its true pofition with its fmall ligament which conneds it



   with  the upper  horns of the Thyroid  Cartilage ; and here  it is  explained  how



   (1. 1.) the two  horns of the Os Hyoides projed far  beyond the Larynx.   They



   belong more  properly to the Pharynx,  " and hold the Pharynx extended,  as we



   " hold a bag  open  with the finger and thumb."



(2.2.) Show  how deep  the Thyroid  Cartilage is ; how fairly it inclofes the Cricoid



   Cartilage,  and conceals and defends the Arytenoid Cartilages and the opening which



   they make ;  and here it is  feen, that  the edges  of the Thyroid Cartilages  belong



   alfo to the Pharynx, for the borders of the Thyroid  Cartilage do, in fad, form



   part  of the fides of  the Pharynx ; they afiifl  the  horns  of the  Os  Hyoides,  in



   keeping the  bag of  the Pharynx extended.   And  the  Condridor  Pharingis, (44.



   45. 46.) the  great Circular  Mufcle  which embraces  the Pharynx,  arifes  chiefly



   from  the  tips of the horns of the Os Hyoides, and from this projeding edge of



   the Thyroid Cartilage.



(3.)  Is feen the great  deepnefs of the Cricoid Cartilage behind,  and it is  feen by (4),



   how the Glottis  (which is juft the opening betwixt the two Arytenoid Cartilages),



   is raifed by this deepnefs  of the  Cricoid Cartilage, in its back  parts.



The  third row of figures exhibits  the more important of thofe  delicate mufcles by



   which  the Cartilages are  moved  upon  each  other; but before thefe mufcles are



   explained,  it  is neceffary to obferve  the place and effed  of the Epiglottis, which



    is  well feen  in  figure x. and by  the afliftance  of this figure joined  with the de-



                                      N                               monftration 
 98                           OF THE MUSCLES.




    monftration of figure vi.  the fucceflion  of parts is  very fairly  explained.—1. The



    Os Hyoides.—2. The Thyroid  Cartilage.-—3. The Cricoid  Cartilage follow each



    other  in figure vi—4. The  Arytenoid  Cartilages, figure  vii. and  viii.—5. The



    Epiglottis, figure  ix.—6. The  Thyroid Gland, figure vi.—7.  The  rings  of the



    Trachea, betwixt  which  rings,  and below the  Thyroid  Gland, the operation of



    Bronchotomy is to be performed.



This x. figure then compleats  thofe connedions  of  the  parts  of  the  throat; and the



    effeds of accidental  wounds, or of the attempts of Suicides, or of our operation



    of  Bronchotomy will  be  eafily  underftood.  Suicides  in  their attempts  very com-



    monly cut  fo high  in the  throat, immediately under the  jaw, that they  feldom



    wound the  Carotid  Artery; nor do  they even hurt  the more material parts of



    the throat;  for they ftrike fo high, (commonly above  the Thyroid  Cartilage), that



    they do not touch  the Trachea, nor injure the  Glottis.   They only cut off the



    Os  Hyoides from the Larynx; they do not fo properly cut the throat as the tongue ;



    and when the food paffes  by  the wound, it does not come from a cut of  the



    (Efophagus acrofs  the Trachea,  but comes merely from the root of the tongue.



Thefe Lateral views explain alfo how idle it is to talk of performing Bronchotomy above



    the Thyroid Cartilage, fince the Thyroid  Cartilage is not  in the Trachea, and fince



    the obdrudion is below that point, being commonly  in .the  Thyroid Gland, whcih



    is here marked (6).—Mr Vique  D' Azir is not more corred  in his Anatomx, where



    he  advifes Bronchotomy  to be  performed betwixt the Thyroid and Cricoid Carti-



    lages,  in the Triangular Membranous  fpace marked  (/£) : for, that is exadly by the



   fide of the Sacculus Laryngis, or Sac of the Larynx, a mucous fecreting bag, which



    lies here on the infide of the  Trachea;  and  the Trocar would lie almod in the opening



    of the  Glottis, or fo  near it, that the  irritation could not be  endured.  The Larynx



   cannot bear  the  operation of Bronchotomy, becaufe it is  moveable, furnifhed with



   many mufcles that  are eafily  excited ; and the lead irritation near the Glottis, throws



    them  into violent contradions.    But  the Trachea itfelf,  can eafily bear  to be




                                                                        transfixed 
                      BOOK SECOND, PLATE SECOND.                     99
transfixed with the Trocar,  which neither excites contradions, nor gives pain:  Be-
fides the  obftrudion  which  requires Bronchotomy,  is  feldom in the  tongue  or
mouth ; more commonly in the  Larynx ;  not  unfrequently  in  the Thyroid Gland.
So that almod all the occafions that can be fuppofed, are fuch as keep  us down to
the very lowed point of the Trachea, viz.  That neared the cheft.
                              THIRD  ROW.

This  row  is for demondrating the chief mufcles  of the Larynx,  and Pharynx ; and
    of courfe, the motions  of thefe feveral parts upon each other.  And it explains,
    fird,  the mufcles which lie immediately upon,  the  Cartilages  of the Larynx, and
    which move  the parts of the  throat  upon each  other; and thefe  lead to a know-
    ledge  of thofe longer mufcles, which come  from  the jaws, or chin,  or dernum,
    or fhoulder ;  and by which the whole throat  is moved.  Thefe are reprefented care-
    fully in the middle figure of this third row, and alfo in the next plate.
Figure IX.  Explains  chiefly the  Hyo-thyroidaei, and Crico-thyroidaei Mufcles -r for
    fird,  The Crico-thyroidaei (42),  arife  by a fmall pointed  origin, (/) from the
    fore part of the Cricoid Cartilage ; go  upwards and obliquely  outwards about an
    inch  in  length ;  are  implanted by a  broad  infertion  (m),  into the lower  border
    of the  Thyroid  Cartilage, and where they end,, the next mufcle begins.  For the
    HYO-THYROiDiEUS (41),  is a long,, flat, and flefhy mufcle, about an inch and a half,
    or two inches in length ; lying flat upon the  fmooth face of  the Thyroid. Cartilape.;
    1 ifing from the  lower border of the Thyroid Cartilage below,  and implanted-broad
    and fiefliy above, into the bafis of the Os Hyoides a little to  one fide, and  to a
    part of the horn.  Sometimes this mufcle is  divided into  two flips,  as  it is drawn
    by Cowper, but more commonly it is fingle,  as reprefented here, and the upper  end
    cf  the Sterno-hyoideus   (34),  is  feen here marked with its  proper number.
                                      N 2                                   The 
 Iqq                           OF THE  MUSCLES.
   The Sterno-hyoideus is  implanted into the  Thyroid  Cartilage, at the poinf v.hert»
   the Crico-thyroideus  (42) ends, and the Hyo-thyroideus (41)  begins ;  fo  that the
   Crico-thyroideeus is  in part covered by the  Sterno-thyroideus ; and the Hyo-thyroi-
   deus again looks like a continuation of the  fame mufcle.
In Figure X. are feen  chiefly  the fmall mufcles by which the  Cartilages of the
   Larynx are moved  upon  each other, modulating  the voice.   And the  chief of
   thefe are, fird, the Crico-Arytenoideus Posticus,  and fecondly the Arytenoide-
   us Transversus.
The  Crico-arytenoideus  Pofticus (45),  "  is  a fmall Pyramidal Mufcle,  which rifes
   " broader from the back  part  of the Cricoid  Cartilage,  where  the  ring  is broad
   " and deep ;  and going diredly upwards, is implanted with a narrow  point into the
   " " back  of the Arytenoid Cartilage.  This pair  of mufcles pulls the Arytenoid
   " Cartilages" backwards  and outward,  fo  that they at  once lengthen and widen
   the flit;  enlarging the  opening  of the  Glottis.  Under this  lies the Crico-aryte-
   noideus Lateralis, the fmalleft of thefe mufcles, which arifes from the rim of the
   Cricoid   and  is inferted  into  the root of  the Arytenoid Cartilage, and plainly fepa-
    rates the Arytenoid Cartilages, and widens the  Glottis,
The Arytenoideus Transversus, (43) is feen here. It is feen crofling betwixt the two
    Arytenoid Cartilages, going from the root of the  one, to the  root of the other ;
    its natural office being to contrad, or occafionally to clofe  the Glottis.
The Arytenoideus Obliquus, is a very delicate  mufcle which  lies under this, in the
    fame way that the Arytenoideus Obliquus  lies  under the Arytenoideus Pofticus *.
The  XL Figure explains the Conftridores Pharyngis,  and  the Styloid Mufcles ; for
    (n) reprefents  the Velum Pendulum Palati, cut  off from the roof of the mouth,
                                                                               and
   *  The young ftudent fhould carry the throaj: to  his  room, wafh it in a hand bafon, fteep and
diflect there.—A piece  of Anatomy, which  with thefe  drawings he  will eafily manage, which is
hardly uncleanly, and cannot but be very important.  It is indeed neglecled only from being thought
'^practicable. 
                          BOOK SECOND,  PLATE 5ECONS.                    IQl
    and hung out by  firings ;  (o) is the Uvula or Pap, in the centre of it; (p) is the
    Anterior Arch of the Palate ;  (q) is the Poflerior  Arch ;  (r) is the Tonfil lurking
    betv\ixt the arches at the fide of the root of  the tongue ; (s) is  the tongue;  (i.)
    is the Os Hyoides ; (2.) is the Thyroid Ca-rtilage ;  (3.) the Cricoid Cartilage ; (6)
    the Thyroid Gland;  (/) the Trachea; (u) a piece of wood thrud up through the
    CEfophagus, and  appearing again in the throat at the  back part of the tongue ; and
    the great conftridor mufcle,  is feen  going  in waves round this piece of wood ; ot
    in  other words,  courfing  round  the upper part of the CEfophagus, i. e. the Pha-
    rynx ;  and (y)  is  the  laft  point of this  demonftration, and the  moft important,
    for  it  is the Styloid Procefs,  whence (39.)  (53>)  and (58.) the three  Styloid
    Mufcles arife*.
The mufcles then which are to  be feen in this drawing of the throat are, 1.  The fet
    of the three Styloid Mufcles; 2. the Conftridor Pharyngis;  and 3. the Vaginalis
    Gulae.
The Styloid Mufcles are, the  Stylo-glossus (58.) arifing from the  forepart of the
    Styloid Mufcle, and  going  forwards into  the  fubftance of the tongue, ftretching
    forwards into its point for drawing it back into  the  mouth.
The Stylo-hyoideus (39),  which  begins  rather from the backpart of  the  Styloid
    Procefs, and goes here into the fide  of  the  Os Hyoides,  being (lender at its be-
    ginning, and broad towards its infertion,  as all the Styloid Mufcles are.
The Stylo-pharingeus  (53.) lies behind or  under  the  Stylo-hyoideus ; for it lies clofe
    upon  the Gullet  or Pharynx, expands upon that part  of the  bag where it is held
    extended upon  the  horns  of the Os Hyoides ;   fo  that the  Stylo-pharyngeus,
    when  it expands  upon the  Pharynx,  touches the horn of the Os  Hyoides, which
    is marked  (*), and as the middle conftridor of the Pharynx arifes efpecially from
                                                                               that
  * The Stylo-glofTus I had defcribed in my book of the mufcles; but after clafling it in the general
arrangement, I had forgotten it in the defcription of individual mufcles. 
 102                          OF THE  MUSCLES.
   that point of the Os Hyoides, the lower  fibres  of  the Stylo-pharyngeus run along-
   fide  of the upper fibres of the middle conftridor, fo that they almoft mix.
Thefe' three Styloid Mufcles perform  the firft movement  in  the  ad of  fwallowing,
   for  they  all coincide  in lifting up the throat,  preffing back the root  of the tongue
   againft the palate,  (to draiten the Arches of the Fauces;) and confining the morfel.
   By  comprefling the morfel, they pufh it down, and fo begin that adion, which is
   compleated  by that ftrong Mufcle  of the  Pharynx, which is  next  feen..
For the  Constrictor Pharyngis,  ($$.) is sPkry  large and flefhy mufcle, which covers
   five  inches (In length)  of the (Efophagus, and pufhes  down the morfel, which is
   already preffed  by the  contradions about  the top  of the Pharynx, and chiefly by
   the  adion of the Styloid  Mufcles.   The Conftridor is fairly enough divided into
   three mufcles, (54. 55. and 56.) of which the upper one, which cannot be feen here,
   rifes about the back  of  the jaws, and from  the  bafis of  the (kull,  and from  the
   root of the  tongue..
The Middle Constrictor, marked (S5') rifes from tips of the  horns of the Os Hyoides-
   alone, and goes, in a diverging form upwards, till it almoft touches  the fkull,  and
   downwards pretty low upon the Gullet.
The Lower  Constrictor (56.) arifes from the borders  or  wings  of the Thyroid
   Cartilage,  and from the ring  of the Cricoid Cartilage.   This is  the thickeft  and
   fiefhied of  all the Condridors ;  it is  very  large,  and goes  obliquely upwards,
   covering the  lower part  of the middle  Condridor,  and a fmall fpace  is left, r,
   kind of angle  betwixt the two  Condridors,  which  is  thin and membranous,
   and  there  the tips of the horns belonging to  the  Thyroid  Cartilage,  are faintly
   indicated, as ihining through the thin membrane.
The  Oesophagus is ftill farther covered with a (heath of mufcular fibres, which run in
   a perpendicular  diredion longitudinally  along it, till they expand at laft upon
   the  fiomach itfelf.  This (heath  of mufcular fibres  is called the Vaginalis Gvlje
   2nd  is marked (57.)
                                                                    PLATE 
y 
s
s
s
N*

s
 
 
S  ill''1  ■ 
BOOK SECOND, PLATE THIRD.
icy
PLATE       III.
This Plate explains the Text Book, from page 217, to page 2 20.
 X HIS  Plate explains the connection  of the  mufcles  of the  throat;  it
    explains chiefly the greater mufcles coming  upwards from  the  bread
    and  fhoulder;  or downwards from  the  Styloid Procefs,  pulling the
    throat upwards towards the jaws, or downwards  towards the Sternum;
    and thefe mufcles, though they belong chiefly  to the throat, do occaflon-
    ly move the jaws.

J.N Figure I. which reprefents  the head of an old man, the (kin of the neck is diffec-
   ted off, and cut away, nearly in the line of the  Jaw Bone;  fo as to (how,  (a) the
   Jaw Bone; (b) the Parotid Gland, lying behind the angle of the jaw;  (c) the Sub-
   maxillary Gland, lying under the corner of the jaw ; (d) the Great Carotid Artery,
   which carries blood to the head ; (e) the Great Jugular Vein, by which  that blood
   is returned ; (g)  is the Thyroid Gland,  which confifts of two lobes, one lying upon
   the right fide o'f  the-Trachea,  the other upon the left fide, the two lobes are joined
   by a narrow flip  of the Glandular fubdance which lies  upon the fore-part  of  the
   Trachea, and is called the Isthmus, i. e. neck betwixt the two lobes, joining together
   the two  lobes of the Gland.  The Gland is large, where the bulk of it can lie at
   either fide of the Trachea; but its Idhmus marked (g) is very thin, and almoft
                                                                 membranous^- 
 <*C^                          OF TK2  MUSCLES.





   membranous, wl-ere it lie- upon the fore-part-cf the Trachea.   We find the Gland



   fmaller in men, larger in women ; of great variety in refped of  fize; very general-



   ly fo larg?, as to bs didinguifhed by the  firgers on  the outfide of the throat;  very



   often enlarged, and often defcending deep behind the Trachea,  fo that  the two op-



   pofite lobes almoft meeting behind, furround that Tube,  and explain  to us how ter-



   rible and how incurable (by any operation at lead),  that fuffocation muft b?, which



   proceeds from  a fwelling of this Gland.   This form of  the Gland almoft furround-



   ing the Trachea, the two  oppofite lobes  nearly meeting  behind, is better explained



   in the Trachea, drawn at Figure vi.  Plate ii.








The  parts of the Trachea, with which the mufcles are more immediately conneded; are,






•f i.) The Os Hyoides, which  lies in the root of the tongue.



(•2.) The Thyroid Cartilage, where it projeds to form the Pomum  Adami.



(3.) The Cricoid Cartilage, which is above the Thyroid Gland. Therefore the Thyroid



   Gland is hardly entitled to the name of Thyroid, fince, in place of refting upon the



   Thyroid  Cartilage,  it lies quite below both the Thyroid  and Cricoid Cartilages,



   upon the firft,  or rather upon the fecond ring of the Trachea.








                             The Muscles are These,



^137.)  is the StERNO Mastcideus, the  great mufcle  of the  neck; thrown back to



    expofe thofe fmaller mufcles which belong  properly to the throat; and there is feen,



(34.) The Sterno-Hyoideus, coming up from  the Sternum, going upwards  to the Os



    Hyoides, long, flat, ribband-like, and bending where it paffes over the Thyroid Gland.



{35.) The SternO-Thyroideus, coming alfo upwards from the Sternum; ftretching to-



    wards the Thyroid Cartilage;  lying under the laft named mufcle;  like it flat and



    ribband-like; covering alfo the Thyroid Gland, and bulging a little where it paffes



    over the chief bulk of the  Gland.




(36.) The Omo-Hyoideus,  coming upwards from  the  inoulder.   It is a  digaftric or



                                                                       two-bellied 
                           BOOK SECOND,  PIATI T:il^O,                     I05
     two-bellied mufcle. The belly (36.) is fixed*into the Os Hyci.Ies.   The midife ten-
     don (&) ii feen under the Maftoid mufcle ; and the  lower  flefhy belly lies too deep to
     be feen,. for it rifes from the Scapula near the Coracoid Procefs.
  Thefe are the chief mufcles which pull the throat downwards.

  The mufcles which pull the throat upwards are the  Mylo-Hyoideus, the BivenTER^
     and the Stylo-Hyoideus mufcles.
  (37.). The  Mylo-HyoideuS  arifes  from the  whole length of the Jaw Bone, from the;
     chin  to the angle; and it arifes not from the lower border of the jaw ;  but ra-
     ther from the inner furface of  the jaw-bone, almoft as high as the fockets for the
     teeth.  It is thick.and flefhy; but ftill it is flat and broad; and goes downwardsm
     a radiated  or fan-like form,  to be implanted into the  bafis of the Os  Hyoides.
     Within this mufcle lies hidden  the Genio-Hyoideus ; without, lies the fore belly of
     the Digaftric Mufcle ;  the Sub-maxillary Gland (c) is ^n external  Gland,  and lies
     under the corner  of the jaw  without,-, (i. e.) over  the  Mylo-hyoideus ;  the Sub-
     lingual Gland is an internal Gland which lies under the tongue beneath this  mufcle.
     The Mylo-hyoidei' mufcles of oppofite fides are united to  each other by a rapha or
     tendinous feam or line, which is feen  at (i)~r and which goes down from the center of
     the chin to the center of the Os Hyoides.
 (40.) The Biventer Maxillae Inferioris belongs after all more properly to the throat
     than to the jaw ; it is called Biventer from its two bellies, which are indeed very dif-
     tind and beautiful; one belly (k) arifes from  the root  of the Maftoid Procefs, and
    fo is feen here coming out from under the Parotid Gland; the fore-belly (/) is feen
    arifing from under the chin ; the middle tendon has the number of the mufcle (40.)
    put upon it at that point where it  paffes the fide of the Os Hyoides, and there it is
    attached to the Os Hyoides, not merely  by running through a fort of Cartilaginous
    loop on the fide of that bone, but  alfo by running through a loop made by the fleffi
    of the Stylo-Hyoideus mufcle, which forks at its infertion.
(39:) Is the Stylo-Hyoideus  coming from under the Parotid Gland, and implanted in- 
   106                           OF THE MUSCLES.





    to the fide of the Os Hyoides, and fo'"binding down  the middle  tendon of the digaf-



    tric mufcle.






■In this drawing then, are feen the chief mufcles which affed the  general pofition of the



    throat, viz.



  I. The   Sterno-Hyoideus  (34.% Sterno-Thyrbideus (35«)t and the Omo-Hyoideus,



    (jo~-) pulling the throat downwards.



 2. The Mylo-Hyoideus (37.)*  ^ie  Stylo-Hyoideus (39.),  and the Digaftricus (40.),



    pulling the throat upwards.



One fmall mufcle remains to  be explained ; if is the Crico-thyroideus (42.), which a-



    rifes  from (3.)  the Cricoid Cartilage to be infer ted into (2.) the Thyroid Cartilage,









                              FIGURE   II.






Is the head of a woman, the neck long,  the (lender mufcles of the throat much difleded



    and thrown out, very loofe and flaccid;  and the Thyroid Gland was in this  fubjed



    particularly large, hung very low down, and made a  confiderable bending in the two



    long  mufcles which run over  it.  This drawing is a  freer  diffedion  of thefe



    mufcles, where all the Anatomy of the throat is feen ; for  the  Parotid Gland, the



    Carotid Artery,  the Jugular vein, the eighth pair of nerves,  and the chief mufcles



    both of the throat, and of the tongue, are here.



The Jaw Bone  is here, as in the former  figure, marked (a) ;  the Parotid Gland (b) ;



    the Carotid Artery  (d) ; the Jugular vein  (e) ; and  the  Thyroid Gland,  which



    appears only  at  two points,  and almoft  covered  by the mufcles,  is marked (g).



    But the moft important parts in the  Anatomy of the neck,  are the Carotid Artery



   (d) ; the Jugular vein (e) ; and the Par Vagum, or eighth pair of nerves (8.)   This



   eighth  pair is a long nerve, which goes from the head down to  the ftomach  to end



   there:  It is marked (8.) ; it is feen here,  lying upon the great Jugular vein,  which




                                                                               15 
                           BOOK SECOKD,  PLATE THIRD.                     I07





   is turgid with blood, and bulging out in the form of  a dilated inteftine : the eighth



   pair of  nerves goes down along  with the Carotid Artery and  Jugular vein, they



   being all  inclofed in one common (heath of Cellular Subftance,  which is here dif-



   feded away,  to fhow thefe parts clean.



The  Os Hyoides  is marked (1.) ; the Thyroid Cartilage is marked (2.) ; the Cricoid



   Cartilagejs hidden by the mufcles.



In this drawing,  the Sterno-maftoideus  (137.)  is very fully diffeded, is made flaccid^



   and  is laid to one fide, fo as  to  fhow the mufcles of the throat freely ; which for



   the  fake of a clear demonftration, I  fhall divide into three fets.   1.  The  mufcles



   from the Sternum, which pull the throat downwards. ,- 1. The Digaftric  and  the



   Styloid Mufcles, which pull the  throat upwards.  3. The mufcles which make the



   flefli of the tongue, the chief part of its  bulk.









         I.   The mufcles coming upwards from the  Sternum and fhoulder are,






(34.) The Stemo-hyoideus, which is feen in all its length, ftretching from the SternUm



   to the Os Hyoides, and bending  over  the Thyroid Gland.



(35.) The  Sterno-thyroideus ; exadly like this^ lying behind and under it, proceeding  •



   from the Sternum to end  in  the Thyroid Cartilage,  and alfo bending  over  the



   Thyroid Gland.



(41.) Is the place where the Sterno-thyroideus ends ; and the  Thyro-hyoideus begins ;



   this (41-) then, is like  a continuation of the fame mufcle, while  it  is really  a didind



   one,  named Thyro-hyoideus  (41.) becaufe it  goes  from  the  Thyroid Cartilage



   to the Os Hyoides.



(36.) Is the Omo-hyoideus, of which the flefhy belly is  marked, as in the other draw-



   ing (36.) while its middle tendon is marked (a).




                                                                           3. The 
icS
07  'I he muscles.
                 II.  The mufcles  which pull the throat upwards arc,

(40.) The Digaftricus, of which the firft belly (40.) is feen coming out from under the Thy-
   roid Gland, while the  fore belly («) being cut away from the chin, hangs  down.
(39.)  The Stylo-Hyoideus Mufcle,  which  is  feen turning over  the tendon of  the
   Jjigaftricus,  and tying it down in  its place.
(53.) The Stylo-pharyngeus, which lies very deep behind the  other  Styloid Mufcle?,
   paffes down under  the  arm  or branch of the Os Hyoides,  and expands upon  the
   Pharynx.
N. B. In this drawing, the Styloid Mufcles  are diffeded  upwards very  nearly to that
   point (under the Parotid Gland,) where they rife fmall and delicate,  from around the
   roots of the Styloid Procefs.


       III. The mufcles which compofe the chief  bulk of the tongue, are thefe,

(58.) The  Stylo-gloflus,  which comes fmall  and delicate  from the root  of  the Styloid
   Procefs;  expands as it goes towards the tongue,  and whofe office  is to pull the
   tongue down  into the mouth.
(eg.) The Hyo-glossus,  which I have reprefented as one  fingle flat mufcle, rifing from
   nearly the whole length of the Os Flyoides *.
(60.) Is the Genio-glossus, fo named from  its  rifing from that point of the lower jaw
   bone (0),  which is  called  the chin;  its fibres go into the tongue in a radiated form,
   in every diredion, capable  of performing  all kinds  of motions, of lolling the tongue
   out,  and alfo of retrading it again[;  whence this mufcle has by way of pre-eminence
                                                                               been
  * From its arifing in three fafciculi or diftinct bundles, to. one from the bafis, one from the horn,
and one from the Cartilage of the Os Hyoides, it has been called the Bafio-chondro-cerato-gloffus, or
 each fafciculus has occafionally been defcribed, as a diftintt mufcle. 
                          BOOK SECOND,  PLATE 1KIRD.                    lC(j*
   "been  named Mufculus Llnguce Pollychreftus.   And  (r) is the tongue itfelf, co«i-
   pofed chiefly of thefe mufcles, and covered with its membrane.
The  Genio4iyoideus (38.) is  a mufcle  riftng from  the fame point (0), of the chin ; is
   implanted into the Os Kyoideus.  This mufcle which rifes from the point of the chin
   only, lies under the Mylo-hyoideus (37.)  (vide Figure i.) which rifes from the whole
   length of the jaw ;  and thefe  together pull the Os Hyoides, and of  confequence  the
   throat upwards.

"So that there is feen by thefe two drawings, firft, how the Mylo-hyoideirs-j^y.) figure i. and
   the Genio-hyoideus, (38.) figure ii.pull the throat upwards. Secondly, how the Digaf-
   tric Mufcle (40.)  and the  three Styloid Mufcles, figure ii. pull the throat upwards
   and  backwards.   Thirdly, how the  Sterno-thyroidei, Sterno-hyoidei,  and Omo-
   hyoidei pull the throat downwards.   And it is laftly very plain, that thefe at the fame
   time  that they are properly mufcles of  the  throat, are occafionally mufcles  of  the
   lower jaw, the only ones  indeed which pull it down ;  little force is needed for this,
   the jaw dropping almoft  by  its own weight;  but, as the motion muft be quick
   and  voluntary, it muft  be  done   by mufcles; and  when the  mufcles from  the
   Sternum fix the throat or pull it down, the Genio-hyoidei,  Mylo-hyoidei  and  Bi-
   venter deprefs the jaw ; f® that the motions of the jaw  and throat, or in other words,
   the adion of chewing and fwallowing have  this confent, that they are partly per-
   formed by the fame common  mufclesj fo that we cannot chew and fwallow at once;
   the jaw which moves  in chewing the morfel, muft be fixed when it is  to be fwal*
   lowed; and  fo the motions. foV chewing  and fwallowing alternatively fuceeed each
   other,

                              0

                                                                     HAfi:

                                i
                               i 
 
BOOK SECOND, PLATE THIRD.
103
PLATE     III.
This Plate explains the Text Book, from page 117, to page 320.
 1 HIS  explains the greater mufcles, coming  upwards from the bread or
    fhoulder, and downwards  from the  chin  and Styloid  Procefs; and by
    which the  whole  throat is moved.   And  thefe mufcles though  they
    belong chiefly to the throat,  do occafionally alfo move the jaws.

                             In Figure I. is feen,

i.  The Os Hyoides, where it lies in the root of the tongue.
a.  The Thyroid  Cartilage, where it projeds to form the Pomum Adami.
3.  The Cricoid Cartilage, which is above the  Thyroid Gland; therefore the Thyroid
    Gland is hardly entided to that  name; fince in place of reding upon the Cartilages
   of the Larynx, it lies quite below both the Thyroid and Cricoid Cartilages, properly
   upon  the  uppermoft ring of the Trachea,  or upon the fird and fecond ring; then
   (a) is the  Thyroid Gland which confids of two lobes, one lying upon the right fide
   of the Trachea, the other upon the left fide; the two  lobes are joined  by  a nar-
   row flip of the Glandular fubdance which lies upon the forepart of the Trachea, and
   is called the Isthmus, i. e. neck betwixt the two lobes, joining together the two lobes
   «£ the Gland.  The Gland  is large, where the bulk of it can lie at either fide of
                                                                          the 
 104                          QF  THE  MUSCLES.




   the Trachea; but its Idhmus marked  (a) is very thin, and  almoft membranous,



   where it lies upon the forepart of the Trachea.   We find the Gland fmaller in men,



   larger in women, of great variety in refped of  fize ; very generally fo large, as



   to be didinguifhed by  the fingers on the outfide of the throat,  very often enlarged,



   and often defcending deep behind the Trachea ; fo that the  two oppofite lobes  al-



   mod meeting behind, furround that Tube, and explain to us how terrible and how



   incurable  (by every operation at lead), that fuffocation mud be, which proceeds



   from a fwelling  of  this Gland.   This  form  of the  Gland almod  furrounding the



   Trachea, the two oppofite  lobes nearly meeting behind, is better  explained in  the



   Trachea, drawn at  Figure vi. Plate ik









                             The Muscles here are,






Fird,  the Mylo-hyoideus,  (37.)  which  arifes from the whole length of the jaw,



   i. e. from  the  chin almod to the angle ; and  it  rifes  not  from the lower border



   of the jaw, but rather from the inner furface of the  jaw, almoft  as high as the



   fockets  for the teeth.   It is thick  and  flefhy, but  ftill is flat and broad;  it goes



   down to the Os Hyoides, is implanted ftill  flefhy,  and with radiated or fan-like



   fibres, into its upper border.  The  Genio-hyoideus  lies within this one ; the fore-



   belly of  the Digaftricus lies flat  upon it without;  the Sub-maxillary Gland (b),



   is an external gland and lies  (under  the corner of the  jaw,) above the flat belly of



   this mufcle ; but the Sub-lingual Gland lies under  the root of the tongue, is an inter-



   nal  Gland, and lies under the belly of the Mylo-hyoideus Mufcle.  The Mylo-



   hyoideus  of each  fide  is united with its fellow by  a  tendinous line (c), or  rapha



   which goes down from the point of the chin, to the center of the Os Hyoides.



Second, the Digastkicus,  (40.) or Biventer is a mufcle having two bellies, one rifing from



   under the Madoid Procefs, another arifing from the tip of the  chin.  The fore-belly



   and the  middle tendon  only are feen here; the  back belly, viz.  that which rifes



       2                                                                    from 
                          SOOK SECOND, PLATE THIRD.                     I05
   from the root  of the  Madoid Procefs, being hidden by the Sub-maxillary Gland
   (d).   The fore-belly of the Digadricus rifing  from the chin, is marked (e) ; the
   middle tendon is marked (J).  At this place it runs through a loop of ligament, and
   fo is attached to the fide of the Os Hyoides.
Thirdly, the Sterno-hyoideus (34.)  is feen here coming from the  Sternum, going
   to the Os Hyoides; pafling flat and  ribband-like over the Thyroid Gland,  and bulg-
   ing a little where the  chief bulk of the gland lies below.
Fourthly,, the Sterno-thyroideus,.  (35.) rifes like it a little deeper and behind it; is
   like it a flat and ribband-like mufcle ; like it covers the Thyroid Gland,  and bulges
   a little over the place where the chief bulk of the Gla^d is.  And where this Sterno-
   thyroideus ends, the Hyo-thyroideus  (41.)  begins,  and is hke a-continuation  of
   that mufcle.
Fifthly, the Omo-hyoideus (36.)  once named  Goraco-hyoideus,  comes upwards from
   the  fhoulder, from near the Coracoid Procefs. It erodes  the neck obliquely, and
   is inferted along with the .other mufcles, into the fide of the Os Hyoides.
And lafllyy  the Sterno-mastoideus  (137.)  the great mufcle of the neck  which
   runs obliquely acrofs,  forming the  Contour of  the neck, and the chief-mufcle which.
   appears  outwardly,  is feen  here lying  flaccid  and  ragged,  dill  conneded with the
   (kin and flefll; and diffeded clean,  at its  lower part only, where it rifes  by (g) a
   fmall  round tendon  from the Sternum, and by (&) a broad flefhy origin from the
   clavicle, of which (?) indicates the  broken end.  The whole mufcle, pafling oblique-
   ly acrofs the neck is  implanted  under  the ear into the Madoid Procefs, and from.
    its origins and infertions, it is named the Sterno-cleido-mastoideus Mufcle,
                        THE  SECOND  HEAD.
Is the drawing of a freer diffedion of  all thefe mufcles;  where all the Anatomy of the.
    throat is feen,  for the  Parotid Gland,  the  Carotid  Artery, the Jugular vein, the
                                        O                                   eighth. 
 Ic5                          OF THE  MUSCLES.

   eighth pair of nerves,  and the chief mufcles both of the throat, and of tbe tongue

   are here.
The  Face is laid open,  fo that fome of its thin cutaneous mufcles are  feen; as the Or-
   bicularis Oculi, (3.) (lightly indicated; the thick mafs of the Maffeter (31.) is
   feen; the Temporal Mufcle (30.)  is  feen, not diffeded, but lying  under the thick
   Fafcia of the templeA and  («)  the  great Parotid Gland,  is feen  lying before the
   ear, the lower corner of the Gland being diffeded up from the deep hollow under the
    angle of the jaw, in order to fhow the place of the Styloid Procefs,  and the mufcles
    rifing from it.   (b) Marks  the great internal Jugular vein, (c) Marks the Carotid
    Artery, (d) Marks the  Par Vagum,  or eighth pair of Nerves, which comes out
    along with the  Jugular vein, and runs down the neck betwixt the jugular vein and
    the Carotid Artery, inclofed along with them in a (heath  formed  out of the com-
     mon cellular fubflance;  and (e)  marks  the Thyroid  Artery, which is  the firft
     branch of  the  Carotid Artery, and takes this (harp turn backwards, to go down to

     the Thyroid Gland.
                                                                       «

                                The  Muscles are,

 1. The Sterno-mastoideus,  (137.) which is lying flaccid, being diffeded and laid
     afide to uncover the Artery and the vein which lie under it.
 ■z. The Digastric Muscle, (40.) of which the upper belly is feen drawn out from its true
     diredion by a thread, and  it is thus  difplaced a little in order to  (how  the Styloid
     Mufcles;  and that belly (g) which comes from the chin, and which is feen in its place
     in the firft figure, is here  feen cut up and turned backwards,  and hanging by that
     point at which the middle  tendon is attached to the fide of the Os Hyoides.
 3.  The Styloid Muscles lie in  a group, round the root of the Styloid Procefs ; the
     Styloid Procefs itfelf  is marked (m) ; and the Stylo-glossus (58.) is feen going to-
     wards the  tongue.  The Stylo-pharyngeus (53.) is feen going down towards the
         1                                                                Pharynx, 
                           BOOK SECOND, PLATE THIRD.                      107
    Pharynx, covered  by the Stylo-hyoideus,  (39.)  which  is fixed into the fide of
    the Os Hyoides; and which  forking into two, where it touches that bone, embraces
    the middle tendon of the Digaftricus, fo as to let it run as a rope in a pully.
 4. The. fet of mufcles  compofing the tongue, and  making up  its chief  bulk and fub-
    dance, are alfo explained here.  The Genio-hyoideus, (38.) is feen  lying in the
    root  of the tongue, coming  from the point  on the inner furface of the chin,  and
    inferted into  the Os  Hyoides.  The  Genio-glossus, (60.) is next feen, going
    from  the  fame point into   the  fubdance of  the tongue,  with fibres  radiated
    in  every diredion ; fome fibres going  backwards,  fome  upwards, and fome again
    forwards,  it  is  capable  of   performing all  the  various  motions of  the tongue,
    hence it has been called  Mufculus Pollychredus.   Then the Hyo-glossus, (59.)
    which  rifes from the Os Hyoides, I have  reprefented as one fingle  mufcle,  and
    have given it here the moft fimple name.   It is drawn as  rifing from the whole
    length of the Os Hyoides *.
 5. The fet of mufcles  coming upwards from  the  Sternum or (houlder,  are  alfo well
    explained here; for the Sterno-hyoideus,  (34.) is feen running up  along  the
    forepart of the Trachea,  bulging out a little where it paffes over the Thyroid  Gland,
    which in this woman was' very large ; and  bending the more becaufe the  mufcle
    (which is full fix inches long), is here  fully diffeded, and fo lies  quite flaccid and
    loofe.   The  Sterno-thyroideus,  (35.) is feen very diftindly, alfo  covering  the
    Thyroid Gland lying behind, and under the lad named mufcle.
V. B.  The Hyo-THYROIDEUS,  (41.) is feen continuous with this one, beginning where it
    ends  like a  continuation of  the fame mufcle.   Laftly,  The Omo-hyoideus,  (36.)
    is feen coming obliquely upwards  from  the fhoulder, and  here it is very diftindly
   feen that at  (/z), the  place  where this  mufcle runs under the belly of  the great
                                       O 2                               Sterno-
  * From its arifing in three fafciculi or diftinct bundles,  viz. one from the bafis, one from the horn,.
and one fi-om the Cartilage of the Os Hyoides, it has been called the Bafio-chondro-oeratoglofius, or
each fafciculus has occafionally been defcribed, as a diftinct mufcle. 
 io8                          of the  Muscles.
   Sterno-Maftoideus Mufcle, it is not flefhy, but fmall, delicate and tendinous.  Then
   this mufcle has a middle  tendon which though very fhort,  (being  but  an inch  in
   length), is yet very didind and very condant; fo that the  Omo-hyoideus is pro-
   perly  a Digadric Mufcle, as fairly  as  the Digadricus  Maxillae Inferioris.   It has
   one belly from  the  fhoulder,  near  the root of the Coracoid Procefs;  one at the
   throat,  from  the Os Hyoides ; and the middle tendon («), runs under the belly of
   the Sterno-mastoideus.
So that there is feen by thefe two  drawings, fird, how the Mylo-hyoideus, figure i. and
   the Genio-hyoideus,  figure ii.  pull the throat upwards.  Secondly,  how the Digaf-
   tric Mufcle, and the three Styloid Mufcles, figure ii.  pull the throat upwards and
   backwards.   Thirdly,  how the Sterno-thyroidei,  Sterno-hyoidei,  and Omo-hyoidei
   pull the throat downwards.  And it is laftly very plain, that thefe at the fame time
   that they are properly mufcles of the  throat, are occafionally mufcles of the lower
   jaw, the  only  ones  indeed  which  pull  it down;  little force is needed for" this,
   the jaw  dropping almod  by its own  weight; but,  as  this motion muft  be quick
   and voluntary,  it  muft  be done byT mufcles,  and when  the mufcles from  the
   Sternum  fix  the throat or pull it down, the  Genio-hyoidei, Mylo-hyoidei and Bi-
   venter deprefs the jaw ; fo that the motions of the jaw and throat, or in other words,
   the adion of chewing and fwallowing* have this confent, that  they  are  partly per-
    formed by the  fame common mufcles,  fo that we  cannot chew and fwallow at once;
   the jaw which  moves  in chewing  the morfel, muft be fixed when it is to be fwal-
   lowed; and fo the motions for chewing and  fwallowing alternatively Succeed each
   other.
PLATE 
 
^
s
■<	©V * 1
s 1r-	
	
B.C 
BOOK SECOND,  PLATE FOURTH.
IO«)
PLATE      IV.
This and the two following Plates explain the Text Book, from Page 23 Z, to Page 285,
 1 HIS plate explains thofe broad mufcles, which, belonging to the Scapula,
    lie flat upon the  back, covering the whole of the trunk,  and which
    are very remarkable  in beautiful ftatues.  The mufcles  are chiefly the
    Trapezius, and the Latissimus Dorsi ; and  this drawing is not fo much
    of value  as  a piece  of Anatomy, as  in explaining to the ftudent the
    firft  appearance  of his difleclion of 'the back; and by explaining the
    great mufcles of the Scapula,  it marks a good beginning for the Ana-
  *  tomy of the  arm.

THE Trapezius Muscle,  (6a) " is one of the moft beautiful mufcles of the body,  of
   " a Lozenge-like form.   Covers all the back and neck quite round to the fore-part of
   " the (houlder; the two  mufcles extend from  the  tip of the one (houlder, to the
   " tip of the other,  and from the nape  of  the neck  quite down to the loins."   The
   ftrong middle tendon by which the two mufcles of the oppofite fides are conneded,
   is marked  (a), the infertion into the Occiput is  marked  (b), and  the infertion
   into the fpine of the Scapula, is marked (c).
*< The  Latissimus Dorsi, (70.) it is the broadeft not only of the back, but of the
   " whole body,  covering all the lower parts of the back and loins."  Its broad j flat,
                                                                        and 
 110                          CF THE  MUSCLES.
    and gliftening tendon is marked (<f), the chief  belly of the mufcle is marked with
    its number (70.) ;  the  place where its  fibres crofs is  marked (i)} and it then runs
    under  the  arm into the deep fhadow, being implanted into the arm bone to pull the
    arm backwards.
The Deltoides  (71.) next  appears, the (kin being thrown down carelefsly, fo as  to
    (how where  this mufcle rifes from the Spine of the  Scapula ;  and efpecially its
    origin is feen ; for it  rifes from the Spine  of the Scapula (c), and  in part from
    that line of the Scapula into which  the Trapezius Mufcle is inferted.
A fmall part  of  the Teres Major, (76.)  is feen in the fpace betwixt  the Deltoides,
    and the Latiflimus  Dorfi ; a fmall part  of the Infra-spinatus, (74.) is feen lying
    upon the Scapula,  under this (the back) part of the Deltoid; and alfo a fmall  part
    of the Rhomboides, (65.) is feen under the edge of the Trapezius Mufcle.  Upon
    the haunch, the upper  part  of  the  great Gluteus Mufcle (163.) is feen uncovered
    by the (kin, which  hangs like a fcroll over the edge of the table.
PLATE 
 
*%
"S
 
BOOK SECOND, PLATE FIFTH.
Ill
PLATE      V,
This Plate with the IV. & VI. explains the Text Book, from Page 23a, to Page 1%$.
lHIS plate mows the  arm in that pofture into which  it naturally falls,
   when thrown out upon the table,  viz.  ftanding upon the lower angle
   of the  Scapula,  the  moulder  joint raifed,  and  a  little  fupported,
   the  elbow  touching  the table, the fore-arm  lying  flat  along  the
   table, the wrift  raifed by the box of knives thruft  under  it,  and
   the  hand  dropping  over  the box,  fo as  to  touch  the table  again,
   with the  knuckles.

T igure I. defcribes the outtermoft layer of Mufcles.  Figure Ii. (a fuller diffedion,)
   explains thofe which lie under,  and contains every mufcle  quite down to  the bone*
   The two  drawings are explained as one, fince they are indeed two drawings of the
   fame  arm in one pofture ; and the moft natural arrangement  for this explanation
   is,  1. Of the mufcles  lying on the Scapula, and moving the ftioulder  bone.   2.
   Mufcles lying on  the arm, and moving the Radius and Ulna, the two bones of the
   fore-arm, and  3. The mufcles which lie upon the fore-arm,  and which  move the
   wrift, and fingers, and thumb.
                                                                1.   Muscles 
  112                           OF THE  MUSCLES.


                       I.  Muscles lying upon the Scapula.

There is feen here, the part of the Serratus Major Anticus Mufcle,  (66.)  which
   lies  upon the fore-part of the cheft, which goes  backwards under the  Scapula, be-
   twixt it and the ribs; and which is implanted, as  is feen here,  into all the line of
   the Bafis of the Scapula, to pull it forwards.  The place where  the Supra- spina-
   tus  (73.) lies, above the Spine, is  feen filled with its mufcle in the upper drawing,
   and  the place of that mufcle is feen empty, and with only  naked  bone  in the  lower
   drawing..
The  Infra-spinatuS, (74.) is feen both in the upper  and in the lower drawing, covering
   all that part of the Scapula, which is below the Spine.
The  Teres Minor,  (75.) is feen both  in the upper and in the lower drawing, lying in
   its  place not much diffeded, and fo little  feparated from the Infra-fpinatus (74.)
   that it looks rather like a particular fafciculus of that mufcle, as indeed it is ; but
   though the Teres  Minor  is not in its flefhy belly eafily didinguifhed from the
   Subfcapularis,  yet it has its tendon  very didind..
The  Teres Major,  (76.) is  neither like the Teres  Minor, nor  is it  round as its
   name imports, but is a large, flat,, and long mufcle  which comes along with the Teres-
   Minor, from the angle of the  Scapula, and  being here fully diffeded,  and hanging
   flabby,  it is feen,  that it  twids under  the (houlder bone, and is implanted, not like
   the Teres Minor, which goes into the knob on the outfide of the  head  of the (houl-
   der bone; but low down, and upon the (haft of the bone,  almod as low as  the in-
   fertion  of the  Deltoid Mufcle; fo that  the (houlder bone  is embraced betwixt the
   two Teretes Mufcles, even in the natural condition of the parts ; and in  the aukward
   twiftings of a luxation,  the head of  the bone is eften clofely embraced and drangled,
   as it were, betwixt  the two Teretes mufcles, and not unfrequently under the fub-
   fcapularis ; an accident which makes the bone more difficult to reduce ; but very often
                                                                              the 
                          BOOK SECOND, PLATE FIFTH.                     H3
   the joint is not  at all  embraced by the mufcles, but is quite loofe and  moveable,.
   and its being eafily reduced, is rather perhaps to be confidered as a fign of the joint
   being much hurt and all thefe mufcles torn away.
(71.) Is the Deltoides,  the lad mufcle which  proceeds from  the Scapula on this fide
   of the arm.  It  is feen here rifing  from the Spine of the Scapula (a), from the tip
   of the Acromion Procefs (b), and alfo it has an origin from a part of the clavicle- It
   is feen  here  implanted in  the arm  bone  at  (d), about one  third down.  In the
   upper drawing  it lies in its place ;  in the lower drawing it  is  cut up and turned
   backward,  to (how the head of the boner and the infertion of the Teres Minor.
But there are dill two other mufcles which rife from the Scapula,  to be implanted into
   the arm bone,  viz.  the Subscapulars,  (77O and  the  Coraco-brachialis,. (72.)
   which are both feen  in  the next plate

II. The Mufcles moving the fore-arm,  and which lie  upon the arm, are the Triceps
   and Anconeus behind,  and the Biceps and Brachialis Internus before.
The  Triceps (80.J  was once  defcribed as three  mufcles,  but is  now accounted as
   one mufcle,  having  three  heads ; (e)  the  fird, a long head, which rifes from the
   lower edge of the  Scapula,  near the Glenoid Cavity ; and, coming down betwixt  the
   Teres Major, and the Teres Minor Mufcles (75.) and (76.)  meets the fecond head
   which is fhorter ;  for the fecond  head of the Triceps (f),  rifes from the (houlder
   bone, a little below the head of  the bone,  and takes a long origin from almod  the
   whole length of the humerus.  In  thefe  two  drawings,  the  fird and fecond head
   only of the Triceps  is  feeu ; but in the next plate, the third or ihorted head  (g) of
   the Triceps is feen, coming  rather from the inner fide of the bone,  and lower down.
The  Anconeus,  (81.) or  Mufcle of  the Elbow, is a fmall mufcle not very eafily found
   nor underdood.  It lies exadly upon that part of the elbow on which we red in lean-
   ing upon the arm.  It is feen in the upper drawing  only, and is  marked with its
   number (81).
                                       P                                (78.) The 
   i \.t                          OF THE  MUSCLES.
 (78.) The Bickis,  the Thick Muf.lc of ilie fore part of the Arm,  is feen in the upper
     figure.   But the middle of its belly only is  feen; its heads lying under the Deltoid
     Mufcle.  The  Brachialis  Internus,  (79O  which lies under  the Biceps,  is feen
     in the uper drawing,  but  it is better feen in the lower drawing; and the manner of
     its  rifing from  the   fore part of the  fhoulder-bone  is tolerably  well expreffed.
     Neither of the  heads  of  the Biceps can be  feen in  the upper drawing, becaufe
     of the  Deltoid  Mufcle; but in the lower drawing, where the Deltoid is  cut up
     from the Scapula, and reclined backwards,  the longer head  of the Biceps  is feen
     raifed upon  the blow-pipe,  (/j) which is paifed under it jud where the tendon  is
     coming out from the  Capfule of the (houlder joint; for this head of the Biceps ii
     a long and (lender tendon,  which comes from within  the cavity of the fhoulder joint,
     afid goes down under the belly  of the Deltoid Mufcle, being tendinous quite  to the
    middle of the arm.
 The mufcles of the Fore Arm are arranged in my defcription of the Mufcles under
    two clafles.

 I. The Extenfors of the  wrid,  fingers, and thumb, which  all keep the outer round
    fide of the fore-arm, arifing chiefly from the outer Condyle.

 II. The Flexors, or Benders of the wrid, fingers, and thumb,  which lie  all upon the
    inner  flat fide  of the fore-arm, rifing in their turn, chiefly from the inner Condyle.
    In thefe drawings the extenfors only can  be feen ; in the  drawings of the next plate
    all the flexors  are feen.
 To begin  then with the Mufcles lying upon  the  upper or radial edge of the fore arm
    there is,
 (92.) The Supinator Longus Radii, which turns the palm of the hand up ; for it rifes
   from the (houlder bone, above the elbow joint, and goes down the fore-arm with a
   long flat tendon,  which is marked (i) to be planted into the Radius at its fore-part.
(102.) The  Supinator Radii Brevis, is a deeper Mufcle, and therefore  it is feen
                                                                             only 
                           BOOK SECOND, PLATE FIFTH.                     I ; £





    Ojfly in figure  ii. where it is  feen  lying  clofe upon the InteivofTeous  Ligament,



    rifing from the  Ulna,  going acrofs to be inferted broad  and  flefhy into the Radius,



    and  turning the Radius upon the Ulna, fo as  to throw the palm upwards.



The two next mufcles keep alfo very  exadly to the Radial edge  of the arm ;  belong to



    the wrift ; are the extenfors of the wrift on the Radial fide of  the arm ; and are



    named Extenfores Carpi Longior et Brevior.



(93.)  The Extensor Carpi E-adialis Longior,  rifes from the arm bone juft  under



    the place of the Supinator Longus (92.) ; has  a ftrong flefhy belly like it;  and its



    long tendon accompanies the long  tendon of the Supinator,  and is implanted near



    the root of the thumb, at (/I), to bend the wrift back.



(94.) The Extensor Carpi Radialis Brevior, rifes  alfo from the (houlder bone,



    but lower, and  thence it is (horter ; but it  is  in all other refpeds like the former ;



    like it has a fhort thick flefhy belly; a long  and (lender tendon,  running  along the



    wrift, is implanted into the back of the hand,  at the root of the fore-finger, at (/) j.



    and like the former it  bends the wrift backwards.



Tliefe three mufcles, the Supinator, and the two extenfors, form the  chief flefh of  the



    fore-arm juft under the  elbow joint, and the  three bellies make  three dimples and



    three curious fwellings, which are  drawn by  the painter  with great care, for they



    make  the chief  marks of the fore-arm ; and  the true drawing of the fore-arm  (in



    its bendings and fore-fhortenings,  and efpecially in its ftrong exertions of pulling or



    grafping,) confifts chiefly in the right placing of  thefe thiee  bellies, where they



   cover the joint;  and it is the rifing  belly of  the Supinator, which  (in the drawing),



   joins the fore-arm rightly to  the  arm.  Thefe three mufcles are feen lying in their



   places  in the upper drawing,  but flaccid.   In the lower  drawing, the Supinator,



   (92.) is cut  away, and the place,  whence  it was cut out from the arm-bone, is



   marked with its number (92.), while the long Extenfor  (93.) and the fhort Extenfor



   (94.)  are both left in their place; but they are much diffeded, and allowed to hang




                                    P 2                                      over 
 Il6                         OF THE  MUSCLES.
   over by their own weight to the inner fide of the fore-arm, fo that in this lower
   drawing their tendons are lefs perfedly feen.
(95.) The  Extensor  Carpi  Ulnaris  is feen in the upper drawing  diffeded very
   clean, lying loofe  and flabby, but  yet not feparated from  the  Ulna ; whereas  in
   the lower  drawing it is fo fully diffeded, as  to fall away from the Ulna, leaving
   the bone at (m) naked.
And fo there remains of all the mufcles on this fide of the fore-arm, thofe only which
   extend the fingers and thumb; and they are all feen, in the upper drawing, diffeded,
   but ftill in  their places.   In the lower arm they are all thrown loofe.
(96.) The Extensor  Communis Digitorum is feen in  the upper  drawing thick and
   maffy ;  covering the other flender mufcles. This mufcle goes to all the fingers, by the
   tendons (n n) which are feen on the back  of the hand.  In the upper figure the Ex-
   tenfor  Communis is  in  its place; in the lower drawing  it is cut up, and throwrn
   out upon  the table.
C97.) Extensor  Digiti Minimi vel  Auricularis is feen only in the lower drawing, for
   in the upper drawing it is covered by the Extenfor Communis.  It is like a flip  of
   the Extenfor  Communis,  and confequently it is cut up  here  along  with  the
   Extenfor Communis.
The flender tendons of the Extenfor  Communis are marked (n n.)  The flender tendon of
    the Auricularis is marked (0.)   But  the fore finger alfo has a particular Extenfor,
    which is named Indicator, and the thumb has three Extenfors, named iji, 2d, and 3d.
 (98.) The Extensor Primus Pollicis is the firft upon the edge of the arm, pafling ob-
    liquely over the Radius (99.)   The Extensor Secundus is next to that; and the
    Extensor Tertius (100.) is next to that again.  Thefe three Extenfors are feen fully
    diffeded in the lower drawing, hanging loofe, and their (lender tendons diftindly feen.
    In the upper drawing they are lefs diffeded ; and the manner in which the three ten-
    dons crofs  obliquely over the wrift, and the manner of their coming up to the thumb
    touching the great joint of it, 'is well explained.  It is feen here that thefe tendons are
                                                                          bound 
                          BOOK SECOND, PLATE  FIFTH.                     I I 7





   bound down by the Annular Ligament (*) ; and by raifing the thumb ftrongly in our



   own hand, we can compare it with  this diffedion, for we fee the darting up of thefe



   tendons of  the thumb, and we fee  at the fame time the point didindly marked at



   which the ring of the Annular Ligament holds them down.



The  Indicator (101.) lies next to the Extenfor Tertius Pollicis ; it rifes from the Ul-



   na ; its (lender tendon goes up to the fore-finger to extend it.  This mufcle is feen on-



   ly in the lower drawing.   In the upper  drawing  all the mufcles  are  in their na-



   tural places, the  tendons  being  bound down by the Annular Ligament which  is



   marked (*).  It is a tendinous expanfion, thin, flat, and ribband-like, and the mufcles



   extending the fingers are feen through this transparent band.  It is called the Annular,



   or  Ring-iike Ligament of the wrift.
PLATE 
 
 
^

 
BOOK SECOND, PLATE SIXTH.
"$
PLATE     VI.
This Plate explains the Text Book, from page 217, to page 220.
 1 HIS plate explains all the flexor mufcles of the hand, wrift, and fingersv
    by a drawing taken  when  the arm  was fet up for the figures of the laft
    plate, and confequently the poftures are exprefly the fame; and the parts,
    as the Scapula,  the Clavicle, and the  pofition  of the fore-arm muft:
    be eafily underftood.                                                   ,

rV
 1- He Seratus Major Anticus (66.)  is ftill feen banging down from  the bafis of the
   Scapula.  Part of the Supra-fpinatus (73.) is feen above the Spine. Below the Spine
   is feen the Infra-fpinatus.
The  Subscapulars (77.) is feen filling  the whole of the hollow of the Scapula, lying
   der the Scapula, betwixt it and  the ribs.
The  Teres Major (76.) is feen here alfo hanging down flaccid from the place, where it
   is implanted into the (houlder bone.
That part of the Deltoides (71.J  which rifes from the Clavicle (a)  is feen here.
The  Biceps Brachii  (78.) is  feen  in  the upper drawing with the belly marked (78),
   lying in its place.   Its longer (lender tendon which  comes  from within the fhoulder
   joint is marked (b).  Its (horter tendon which ftill is very long but thick and flefhy,
           2                                                                is 
  120                            OF  THE MUSCLES.





   is feen marked (c), coming  from under the  Deltoid  mufcle where it rifes  from the



   Coracoid Procefs.   Its flat tendon, which expands upon the fore-arm, and ftrengthens



   the general fafcia of the arm, is feen fpreadiag out over the mufcles at  (d)t and the



   ragged  edges of the fafcia are feen  lying out upon the mufcles, for the mufcles both



   above and below are diffeded clean, while the fafcia of the arm is left  only at  (d)t



   that the connedion betwixt this fafcia and the Biceps  tendon might be explained.



La the lower drawing the (horter head of the Biceps (c) is feen cut away from the Cora-



    coid Procefs (e), and hung  up by a flring.  The longer head  (b) is pulled upwards



   by a dring, that it may be feen how it  comes from under the clavicle, where it rifes



   within the fhoulder joint.  The Coracoid Procefs  whence the  (horter head arifes is



   marked (<?),  and it is feen that there are three points of mufcles  flicking to the apex



   of the procefs;  for the little pedoral  mufcle  (67.)  is implanted  into  it;  and the



   Coraco-brachialis (72.)  and this (horter head of the Biceps rife from it.



The  Brachialis Internus-("79.) is feen in both arms, lying under the  belly of the Bi-



   ceps, and rifing from the bone.



The Coraco-brachialis (72.) is  feen in both the drawings.  In the upper drawing it



   is touched by the fliort head  of the Biceps, which makes it lefs didind.  In the low-



   er drawing the  fhort head  of the Biceps is tucked  up.   The Coraco-brachialis  is



   fully diffeded, and is left flaccid and hanging away from the arm bone ; and  its  ori-



   gin from the Coracoid Procefs (e), and its infertion into the middle of the (houl-



   der bone at (g)  are both well feen..



Qver the middle of the  bending of the Coraco-rbrachialis there is feen the  remains  of a



   flat and broad tendon, (69.) fticking to the arm bone, which is the cut tendon of the



   great pedoral mufcle, which is implanted thus low upon the Os  Humeri, to give it



    the  advantage of a lever in pulling the (houlder bone  inwards.  I have ufed the.



    mark (69.) of  the  pedoral mufcle to  point out its tendon..



The TricepsC8o._)  is alfo well  feen, efpecially two of its heads, viz. the longed head (f,)



   and  the fhorted  head (g), while the head which is of a middle length lies  upon the



   backpart of the bone, and  cannot  be feen in this view..



                                                                               The 
                          BOOK SECOND, PLATE SIXTH.                     I2t
The mufcles of the Fore-arm,  i. e.  ail the Flexors of  the  hand, fingers, and thumb,
    are fhown  here ;  in  the upper drawing, they are  in their  natural pofition,  in the
    lower drawing, they are feparated for demondration,  and fome of them are hung out.

In  the upper drawing, the mufcles of the fore-arm are  few  and fimple, lying regularly
    in their places ; and fo are eafily  underdood.
One mufcle belonging to the outfide of the arm is feen here, viz. the Supinator Radh
    Longus, (92.) the belly of which is feen lying upon the Radial edge of the  arm,
    above the elbow ; the next to that is the Pronator Teres, (82.) It rifes at (b),
    from the internal Condyle ; is  implanted into  the  Radius at  (i), and  turns the
    hand prone, (i. e.)  flat down. It is called Pronator Teres,  becaufe it has a round
    flefhy belly, very oppofite in (hape to the Pronator  Quadratus ; for the Pronator
    Quadratus,  (91.) which is feen in the lower drawing is of  a fquare form, lying flat
    upon the Inter-offeous Membrane, rifing from the  Ulna,  implanted into the Radius,
    and having only one dired  office, viz.  that of turning the Radius.
The next mufcle to  the Pronator Teres, is the Flexor  Carpi Radialis, (85.) or the
    bsnder of the wrift, on the  fide  of the Radius.  Its head is  covered in part  by the
    expanding tendon of  the biceps at (d) ; then  the reft of the mufcle is naked ; and
    its long tendon is  feen as it goes along the Radial edge of the fore-arm  marked (£).
The Palmaris Longus, (83.) is a long, (lender, and delicate  mufcle; it is merely a
    bender of the wrift ; and comes by a fmall head from the inner Condyle of the Hu-
    merus,  and its fmall  tendon  runs down the middle  of the arm  till it touches the
    Anular Ligament of  the wrift, to  be implanted into it.   This Anular Ligament I
    have marked (*)  ; but though it has the fame mark with the Anular Ligament on
    the  outfide of the arm,  it  is not a continuation of the fame Ligament, nor  is  it
    like it; but is a fhort, thick, and  very ftrong ligament pafling  acrofs from the
    Pifiform, to the Scaphoid bone of the Carpus.  It is (horter and  ftronger than the
    Anular Ligament  of  the outfide ; it has a firmer origin from two particular  bones. 
  122                           OF  THE MUSCLES.





    and has a  deeper  arch  under it:  for the tendons which it  binds down are ve/y



    numerous,  and conneded  with much ftronger mufclea than thofe  on the back, of



    the hand.



The Flexor Carpi Ulnaris,  (86.) lies along the ulnar edge of the arm; is a penni-



    form or feather-like mufcle, very flefhy ; rifes from the inner Condyle along with



    the Palmaris  Longus, (83.)  and  is implanted by  a,ftrong round tendon  into  the



    projeding Piriform Bone.



The Flexor Digitorum  Sublimis, (87.) is a very large thick bellied  mufcle.  It is



    called Sublimis, becaufe  it  is the outtermoft of  the two  flexor mufcles.  It is  feen



    here lying in its place,  thick and flefhy in its belly ; its tendons pafling under the arch;



    of the Anular Ligament, appearing in the palm of the hand,, to go to all the fingers ;



    there are four  diftind  tendons, which are here  fupported upon a blow-pipe mark-



    ed  (m) ; and the place of the Flexor Profundus,  which lies under, it is feen at (8.8.):








In the lower drawing, the mufcles of the fore-arm are feen much freer and better..



The Pronator Teres (82.) is feen in its place,  thick, round, and flefhy..



The Palmaris Longus,  (83.) is thrown out upon the table; by which it is feen how



    (hortand delicate its mufcular belly is ;  how long, (lender,.and delicate its tendon (»),,



    from which it has got its name. And  the Palmar Apponeurofis, or tendinous web,



    (/), which covers the palm of the  hand,  and which like the palm is of a triangular



    form, is here cut up and left conneded with its tendon.



The Upper Flexor of the fingers, or Flexor Sublimis,  (87.) is fupported by a ligature,



   fo as to  draw its four  tendons nearly into a  ftraight  line, fhowing how they are



   fplit near the fingers, whence this mufcle is often named Perforatus.



The deep Flexor,  Flexor Profundus,  (88.) is left at its origin.   Its belly is  raifed



   and drawn out a little, and held extended by  a pin ; and the three  tendons of this



   mufcle are- feen going through the loops,  or fplits of the tendon of the laft mufcle,



   whence  this one is named Mufculus  Perforans..




                                                                             The 
                          BOOK SECOND, PLATE SIXTH.                     12.
Tnefe tendons of the Perforans and Perforatus are alfo well feen in the uppermoft figure,
   where the perforating tendons are raifed over  the blowpipe (o), and the perforated
   tendons are alfo fupported upon another blowpipe (m).
The  mufcle marked ("88 *) which feems to go with a particular tendon towards the fore-
   finger, as if  it were a particular Flexor for the fore-finger,  is  merely that head of
   the general Flexor which goes to the fore-finger, it is a part of the Flexor Profundus;.
   and this particular  appearance is produced merely by diffeding this belly a little too
   high up ; for this mufcle, and the  Flexor Sublimis  alfo, are  divided  or divifeable
   into four didind bellies, for each of the four didind fingers  which they ferve.
The  Flexor Longus Pollicis, (90.) is a large and drong  mufcle  for bending the laft
   joint  of the  thumb; its tendon is feen going in under the two fhort mufcles of the
   thumb, and is feen  again at (q) efcaping from betwixt the fhort Flexors, and going
   forwards to the point of the thumb.
The  Pronator Quadratus, C91.) is feen lying flat upon the Interofleous Membrane
   which is marked  (p).
The  mufcles of the Hand are not fully explained, but yet the chief mufcles are feen.
The  Abductor  Brevis Pollicis, (103.^ is feen in the upper drawing rifing from the
   outfide of the Annular  Ligament.
The  Flexor Brevis Pollicis,  (105) is feen rifing alfo from the  Annular Ligament.
   Another head rifes  deeper in the hand, but is not feen here,  there is  feen only the
   tendon of the long Flexor, pafling betwixt thefe two heads of the fhort Flexor.
The  Opfonens  PoLLrcis, ("104.) cannot be feen here, becaufe  it does  not move any
   of the joints  of the thumb. It belongs only  to the Metacarpal Bone of the thumb j
   and of courfe it lies under thefe two.
The  Adductor  Pollicis, (106.^  or, that which carries  the  thumb towards the fore-
   finger, is alfo  feen here ; but fo  much  under fhadow,  that  it  is not to be dif-
   tinguifhed  from the Abductor Indicis, (no.)  For the Addudor Pollicis and
                                       Q^ 2                            Abdudor 
  124                          0F THE  MUSCLES,
   Abdudor Indicis lie  clofe upon each other,  and are of the fame flat and triaiv.
   gular (hape.
The  mufcles  of  the  little finger are,  the  Abdudor and the Flexor Minimi Digiti;
   but  it is  the Abductor  Minimi Digiti (107.) only that  is feen here,  lying on
   the  edge of the palm, under the  little finger;  which we feel ading,  when we
   fpread wide the little finger, or when taken with that flight cramp which  we oftea
   feel  upon the lower edge of the palm.
PLATE 
 
MESCLfiS
PL.ME
Published J^r Lsmnrum *•' *"' s8e4- 
BOOK SECOND,  PLATE SEVENTH.
*25
PLATE      VII.
This Plate explains the Text Book, from Page 235, tt Pagt 3IO»
 1 HIS plate reprefents the Trunk of the body in  various drawings; ex-
    plaining thofe mufcles of the Scapula,  which lie  flat under the Trapezii
    Mufcles;—alfo  the ferrated mufcles, which  raife or deprefs  the ribs in
    breathing;  the  Longissimus  Dorsi, and  Sacro-Lumbalis,  the  chief
    mufcles which  fupport  the Spine;  and it alfo explains the  Intercoftal
    Mufcles;  the Levators of the  ribs; the  leffer mufcles of the neck and
    Spine ;  and the Recti Capitis,  the fmall nodding mufcles of the head.

IT explains a  fet of mufcles, which are found in  the book from page 235, to  page
   310.  From page 235 of the book,  forwards, are explained  the chief mufcles  of the
   Scapula; as the Levator Scapulae, the Rhomboid Mufcles,  and the Serratus Anti-
   cus ; and thefe three are the chief outermoft mufcles in the  diffedion reprefented
    in figures i. and ii.
The Levator Scapulae, (63.) is feen in Figure I. on both fides, rifing from the Tranf-
   verfe Proceffes of the upper Vertebra of the neck, and going downwards to be im-
   planted into the upper corner of the Scapula, whence it is named Mufculus Angularis
   Scapulae.
The Rhomboid mufcles, (64, and 6j.) are two flat  mufcles which come  with a thin
       a                                                                  flat
.  *£ 
  126                           OF THE  MUSCLE?.
   flat tendon from the  Spines  of the  neck and back, and  are  implanted quite fiefliy,
   but ftill thin and flat,  into the  whole length of the bafis of the Scapula.  The divi-
   fion betwixt  the  cervical portion of this mufcle, (64.) which is the Rhomboides
   Minor,  and the larger  portion coming  from the  Spines of the back,  and which
   is named Rhomboides Major, (65.) is very flight.
Part of the Infraspinatus, (74.) is feen here; the Deltoides, (71.) is  alfo  feen;
   the  Serratus  Major  Anticus,  (66.)  or great  mufcle for moving the Scapula
   forwards, is feen lying upon the fide of the ched, rifing from the ribs to pafs under
   the Scapula, where it is implanted into the whole length of the Bafis of the Scapula,
   exadly oppofite to the infertion of the Rhomboides.  But  in Figure II.  the Ser-
   ratus Major Anticus is reprefented again lying under  the  Scapula; and the Scapula,
   to (how  it,  is  cut almod away from the  trunk, and is thrown out into a very
   unnatural pofition, and  the  confluence of the feparate heads or  Serrse  by  which
   this mufcle rifes from each of the ribs is indiftindly marked.
Thus the Serratus Anticus is  feen to be a mufcle belonging to the Scapula ;  but the
   Serrati Postici, (113. 114) ar« mufcles  of the  ribs belonging chiefly to refpira-
   tion, and they are feen  in Figure I. and thefe mufcles of the ribs are explained in
   the book  from page  285, to page 290.  The  upper Serrated mufcle lies flat  under
   the Rhomboides ; the lower "Serrated mufcle lies in like manner  flat under the La-
   tiffimus Dorfi mufcle ; but they cover the Longissimus Dorfi and Sacro-lumbalis
   mufcles, the lower Serratus covering their flefhy bellies, and the uppermoft cover-
   ing their tendons.
The  Serratus Superior Posticus (113.) is feen lying fiat upon the fide of the neck;
   on the right fide the Rhomboides covers it; on the left fide it is feen naked. It be-
   gins by a neat flat (hining tendon, refplendent like the colours  of a  fifh  turning in
   the water; and this flat tendon (which is exadly like the flat tendon of the Rhom-
   boid mufcle) comes  from the  three lower Spines of the neck, and divides into three
   neat fmall flefhy heads which are marked (a a), and  thefe are implanted into three
                                                                              of 
                        BOOK SECOND, PLATE  SEVENTH.                     \1J
    of the ribs ; and by raifing three ribs it is plain that they muft raife the whole cheft.
 The Serratus Inferior Posticus  (114.) is the exad antagonift of this, and exadly
    like it in all refpeds, only  that it  goes obliquely from below upwards, to pull the
    ribs down. It arifes by a filvery (hining tendon like the upper one ; the tendon is very
    ftrong, but thinner than a (heet of paper.  It ends in three heads,  which are thin flat
    flips of flefh, inferted into  the three or four lower ribs a little beyond their angles.
 The Levatores Costarum, (115.) are concealed by thefe mufcles, but are feen in the
    next diffedion, Figure II. where they are feen to be in number twelve pairs corre-
    fponding with the number of the ribs.  The nine uppermoft are feen to be fhort; the
    three  lower pairs are feen to pafs one  rib, and to take  hold on the rib below.
    Whence they are named Levatores Costarum Longiores.
 The Levatores Codarum are thefe twelve didind mufcles, rifing from the tranfverfe pno-
    cefs of each vertebra, and going down to lay hold upon each rib ;  and fo they lie flat
    upon the outfide  of the ribs, and keep clofe to the Spine, and are fhort. But there are
    befides regular plans of  fibres lying in the interdices of the ribs,, which go from the
    edge of one rib  to the edge of another,  and fill up the fpace betwixt the ribs and
    hence  are named Intercostals.  The internal intercodals exadly refemble the external
    intercodals.  The external intercodals only can be feen here, and they are feen bed in
    the left fide of figure ii. marked (nf.) the three lower internal intercoftal mufcles
    lying upon the three lower ribs are longer  than the others, juft as the lower Levators
    are longer;  but it is not fo in  the outer  layer  of intercodals which  (exc.pt in  a.
    few draggling fibres) are all of equal length.
The mufcles which  raife the trunk from the  ftooping pofture, and efpecially the Qua-
    dratus Lumborum, Sacro-Lumbalis, Longissimus Dorsi,  Transversalis Col-
    li, and Cervicalis, are  explained from  page 297,  to page 301.  and they are all
    pretty diftindly marked  in figures  i. and ii.
In Figure I. the Longissimus Dorsi  (126.)  and the Sacro Lumbalis  (127.)  are  feen
    only in the middle of the back;  for they are covered by the Rhomboid and Serratus
                                                                         fuperior 
 123                           OF  THE MUSCLES.
   fuperior  mufcles above, and in the fame wTay by  the Serratus inferior  Pofticus be-
   low ; but in figure ii.  the three  great mufcles of  the Spine,  viz.  the Quadratus
   Lumborum  (125.) the Longissimus Dorsi (126.) and the Sacro-Lumbalis  (127.)
   are feen  quite uncovered,  and in their  whole length; for  their tendinous  origin in
   the loins  at (h), their middle bellies at (126, 127.)  and their long tendinous infer-
   tions  at  (c),  are all  diftindly feen ; and alfo their connedion with the  Cervicalis
   Descendens (128.) is explained.
The Quadratus  Lumborum, (125.) -which is cut away on the  right fide, is feen dif-
   tindly on the left fide, arifing big and flefhy from the  Spine of the Ilium, and infert-
   ed partly into  the tranfverfe proceffes of the loins, but chiefly into the loweft rib.
The common tendon of  the  Longiffimus  Dorfi, and of the Sacro-Lumbalis, is feen at
   (b) ;  it is a firm, thick, and ftrong origin, which is thus entirely tendinous without,
   but flefhy within ; it rifes from  the  Sacrum, Ilium, and  tranfverfe proceffes of
   the Vertebrae, and fills up all the hollow upon both fides of the Spine.
The belly of the  Sacro-Lumbalis (127.) parts from the belly of  the Longissimus
   Dorsi, (126.) at the top  of the loins, nearly oppofite  to the loweft rib.
The  Longiffimus  Dorfi keeps clofer by  the Spine, and  is inferted by a double row of
   tendinous feet; but they lie fo under its own belly, and under the belly of  the Sa-
   cro-Lumbalis, that they are hidden from the view.  The tendinous feet of the  Sacro-
   Lumbalis are well feen, fpreading out wider from the Spine and attaching themfelves
   to the ribs ; and thefe tendons marked (c c) are feen  in figure i. lying flat and regu-
   lar, each in its right place ; but in figure ii. they are more diffeded, are torn up a lit-
   tle from the flat furface of the ribs, and hang  fomewhat loofe  and flaccid.  On the
   right fide of the neck is feen the Cervicalis Descendens,  (128.^)  rifing from the
    tranfverfe proceffes of the neck, going down to be implanted tendinous into the back,
    (/. e.) into the  ribs.  The Cervicalis  is inferted under the upper  tendons of the
   Sacro-Lumbalis, and the  Longiffimus Dorfi, on the other hand, is  feen to fend a de-
   licate flip of tendon up into it; fo that the Cervicalis feems equally  conneded with
                                                                             both 
                           BOOK SECOND,  PLAl"L SkVEiS TH.                     i 20

    both of thefe mufcles, but it is  rather more beholden to the Longifnmus DjijI, for
    this flip ; while the  accident of the Cervicalis rifing  under the tendinous  feet of the
    Sacro-Lumbalis makes hardly any connedion.
On  the  left fide  again  there is feen,  the  Transversalis Colli (129.); which  rifing
    from the Tranfverfe  Proceffes  of the back, afcends towards the  Tranfverfe  Pro-
    ceffes of the neck ;  it is  rather ftrong and flefhy,  has little connedion with any other
    mufcle ; the  Cervicalis  Defcendens lies under it,  while  this  the Traufverfalis  is
    in its turn covered by the Splenius and Complexus *.
                                            R                                       The
   *  There are three flender mufcles  in the neck, which are  in danger of  being confounded, viz.
the Trachelo-mastoideus, the Transversalis Cervicis, and the Cervicalis Descendens.  It
is impoflible to give a perfect drawing on  fo fmall a fcale, nor indeed is  it poflible by any drawing,
to reprefent  them fo that  they fliall be eafily  found, and diftinguiftied j  perhaps they will beft be
found  by following this order of difTection.  1. The Trapezius and  the Rhomboides,  the two large
flat external mufcles belonging to the Scapula, are to be cut away ;  and then the Serratus Superior
where  it covers the lower part of the Complexus is to be raifed.   a. The Splenius and Contplexus are
to be diflected and laid afide ; and 3. the Trachelo-maftoideus, and the two other mufcles come into
view.  Of thefe, First, there lies immediately under the Complexus the Trachelo-maftoideus, large
and flefhy, rifing from the  Tranfverfe Procefles in the back and lower part of the neck, by tendinous
and flefhy feet, and going obliquely upwards and outwards till it is implanted flefhy into the Maftoid
Procefs ;  and though it is more flefhy than the two mufcles which come next, it ftill is fo much a mix-
ture of tendon andflefh, as to be named the Complexus Minor .—Secondly, There is the Transver-
salis Cervicis, which lies immediately under the Trachelo-maftoideus, keeps clofe to the Spine, i.e.
lies in th« hollow by the fide of the Spinous Procefles.  It rifes from  the Tranfverfe  Procefles of  the
back to be implanted  in  the Tranfverfe  Procefles of the  neck ; is  immediately  covered by  the
Trachelo-Maftoideus ;  and  covers in part the Cervicalis Defcendens.—Thirdly, there is the Cer-
ticalis  Descendens, which lies  more to one fide than  the  Tranfverfalis Cervicis; it  therefore
lies more properly  under the Trachelo-Maftoideus ; its  feet or  tendinous  origins  begin  from  the
tips  of the Tranfverfe Procefles of the neck, juft  where  the feet or fmall tendons of the Levator
Scapulas  begin; it is very flender  and is  a  confufed mixture of tendon and flefli, being chiefly ten-
dinous, though it is flefhy in part.  It is  necefTary to  give  this warning, that not even the largeft
drawing can  make  this piece of difTection perfectly eafy; perhaps it may be  the eafier for this  de-
Tcription  and arrangement. 
  130                           OF  THE MUSCLES.





 The riii.-g  flip  of  the  Longiffimus  Dorfi  has  led  to  this  explanation  of  the



    Tranfverfulis, and of the Cervicalis Defcendens ;  but naturally before thefe,  there



    fliould  have been explained the two larger  mufcles which  cover them, viz. the



    Splenius  and Complexus, which are bed feen in figures i. and iii.  In figure  i. are



    feen, the Splenii (118.)  ftraight  and flat, lying  along the fide  of the  neck,, like



    the legs of the letter  V.  and  in  the interftice or place of  their forking,  is feen



    the chief belly of the Complexus, (119.)  where it  is implanted  into  the Occiput,



    lying under the  Spleuii.  In  figure iii. the Splenii  are cut away, the Complexus



    only  is  feen, the  chief belly  of the Complexus  wrhere it is implanted into the



    Cs Occipitis is  marked with  its proper number  (119.) ; while its feet (partly ten-



    dinous  and partly flefhy), by which  it rifes from  the Tranfverfe Proceffes of the



    neck and back,  are marked (ee).



The mufcles belonging exclufively to the  Spine, are next feen in figure iii. for the



    chief of them  are thefe two,. Firft, the Spinalis Dorsi, (131.) or long mufcle be-



    longing to the Spinous Proceffes of the back.  It  runs along  the  whole back  from



    fpine to fpine; it  is  very flender  and almoft entirely tendinous, and! is  marked



    with its number,  (1.31O Secondly, the Multihd.us Spinje,  (133.) which  is  a



    confufed mixture of  tendon  and flefh, but  thick and maffy enough  to fill all the



    hollow  over the  Oblique Procefles of the Vertebrae,  and betwixt  the  Spinous and



    Tranfverfe Proceffes.



Three of the four fmall mufcles which perform the quick turning  and nodding motions



    of the head, are explained upon the head, figure iv. where  the two fmall mufcles



    called Recti Capitis are  feen difleded fairly,  and laid over a blow-pipe; and here it



    will be  obferved that  the two  Recti Minores (121.) are fmaller, and lie  deeper



    betwixt  the Atlas  and the Scuil; that the Rectus  Major  C122.)  is not as its



    name implies,  a ftraight mufcle,  but is truely  oblique.   One of  the Oblique



    mufcles is alfo fhown here, for there are two oblique mufcles, fome what like the



   Redi or ftraight ones.  The Oblique Mufcle  (123.)  which is  here fhown,. is the




      2                                                                  Obliquus 
                      BOOK SECOND, PLATE SEVENTH.                   I31

Obliquus  Superior, which rifes from  the  Tranfverfe  Procefs of the Atlas,  to be
inferted into the Occiput.  The Obliquus inferior, which  rifes from-the  Dentatus
to be fixed into the Atlas is here cut away, for only the Atlas  is left  in  this
drawing.
R a                      PLATE 
 


\th
a.-  .
■•-  *Wy--v-



• ,-'■  y-  35^ yEf*^ * 
					
					
					
			?r^%i&		pHP?
					
 
BOOK  SECOND, PLATE EIGHTH.
*S3
The drawings and plans which are numbered, VIII. IX. X.  Isf XI. explain chapter  -vi. and vii. of the book, contain-
   ing the Abdominal Mufcles, the Diaphragm, and the mufcles nf the Perineum.
Plate VIII. gives a general view of the Abdominal Mufcles, as they are frjl laid open.  Plate IX. gives a fecond dijfec-
   tion of the Abdominal Mufcles, fhowing the fuccejftve layers of the great Mufcles which cover the Abdomen.  Plate X.
   explains the general appearance of the Diaphragm, and its relation to  the body.  Plate XI. explains by plans and
   drawings, the Diaphragm and the mufcles of the parts of generation.
                         PLATE      VIIL

XLXplains the firft difTection of the  Abdominal Mufcles in a lateral view;;
    and the chief intention  of the drawing is,  to fhow the general appear-
    ance of the belly when uncovered of its fkin;  to fhow the great fize of
    the  Mufculus Obliquus Externus,  " and how it  covers all the fide with
    "  its flefhy  belly,  and all  the fore-part of the Abdomen with its  thin
    "  expanded tendon;" to explain  the two great lines or  marks,  the
    Linea Alba, and Linea Semi-lunaris,  and to fhow the ring of the Abdo-
    minal Mufcles, and the ligament of the thigh in  their true fhapes, with
    the  exit of the great arteries.of the thigh,  and the paffage of the Sper^
    matic Cord.


 i- HE defcription then of thefe few parts needs not be tedious.,
Firft,  the great belly of the External  Obliqjje Mufcle of the Abdomen is marked
   with  its proper number (143.) ; and it is  feen here how it covers the fide, how it
   lies out upon the fore-part of the Thorax, and how it rifes from the ribs  by indigita-
                                                                            tions. 
   J 34                          OF THE  MUSCLES.

     tions, which are marked fo dark that they can be underftood  only by the indigita-
     tions  (a a a) of  the  Serratus  Major  Anticus Mufcle, in the interdices of which
     they rife.
  The  belly of this mufcle covers only  the fide, dops fuddenly at (b b), which reprefent
     the flat tendon, the  fibres of which go  obliquely from above downwards and  in-
     wards,  where it is named Obliquus Descendens.   The  letters  (ccc) (how  the
     line which  is called  Linea Semi-lunaris ; and  the  letters are fo placed,  as alfo
     to point out the interfedions or tendinous lines which divide  the Redi,  or ftraight
     mufcles of  the Abdomen, into four or five diftind bellies;  and  confequently  the
     letters (c c c) alfo mark the feveral bellies of the Redus, fhining  through the thin
     expanded  tendon of  the External Oblique.
'  ("*) Marks the head of the Redus Mufcle, where  it  rifes from  the  border  of  the
     Thorax, touching the Pectoral Muscle (6g.)f and at the place of  this mark (*),
     the mufcle  is uncovered of its (heath ; this mark  ferves alfo  another ufe, for it is
     repeated again below near  the navel, fo that thefe two  marks  fhow  the whole
     length of the Linea Alba,  or white line, which is feen running down all the center
     of  the belly from the Sternum quite  to  the Pubis, pafling through  the navel, and
     formed by  the meeting of the tendons  of all the  mufcles.   And it is perhaps
     worth notice, that the fmall holes  marked very dark, which  are  neat, fmall, and
     round,  and which  appear in every  diffedion,  like  Oilet Holes,  and are  efpe-
     cially frequent over  the furfaces of the Redi Mufcles, are juft the  openings  by
     which the  great  Cutaneous Veins  of  the Abdomen pierce  the flat tendon of  the
     External Oblique Mufcle, to get to the bellies of the Mufcles  which lie under it, or
     rather to come back from  them,  returning  chiefly the blood of  the  Epigaftric
     Artery f.
                                                                                The
    f I queftion  whether  it be not truely a wound of one of  thefe large veins, (and they are greatly
  dilated  in dropfy  of the belly),  which  occafions that kind of bleeding, which fo often happens in
  tapping the belly. 
                         BOOK SECOND,  PLATE EIGHTH.                    J35
The tendency of the Oblique fibres of the Abdominal Mufcle to fplit is eafily feen,  and
   the manner of its fpliting to form the Ring of the Abdominal Muscles is faithfully
   reprefented, where  (d) marks the lower pillar of the ring ; (e) the upper pillar of
   the  ring; and it is  plain that (d) while it forms  the lower pillar of the ring, is at
   the  fame time  the Ligament  of the  thigh,  (f) Marks  the  Spermatic  Cord
   coming through the opening of the ring ;  (g) marks  the femoral Artery coming
   from under Paupart's Ligament, or the  Ligament of the thigh.  Whence it will be
   underftood how Bubonocele or Hernia  of the Groin, following  the courfe of the
   Spermatic  Cord, will proceed obliquely inwards, and  mud  (in  attempting to re-
   duce it), be pufhed  from within outwards: and how a femoral Hernia  will by
   coming out from under the femoral  Ligament, be lodged fairly in the thigh, far
   from the Groin ; tying very deep, apt to be concealed from the Surgeon ; and how
   by following the courfe of the great veffels of the thigh,  the Femoral Hernia will
   proceed  from within  obliquely outwards,  fo that, in attempting to reduce this-
   Hernia, we muft pufh from without obliquely inwards.
PLATE 
 
 
""^sSIBSI
\ fi\"~'~- -~""'=S'i?a«Bffi

 
BOOK SECOND, PLATE NINTH.
U7
PLATE     IX.
This Plate along with the farmer explains the Text Book, from page 311, to page 3^3.
■t-'XpLAiNS  the fecond  difTection of the belly;  where the  mufcles  being
    cut and thrown out  upon the thighs, may feem irregular and confufed,
    though it is truly the natural order and  true appearance of the difTec-
    tion.   The view is not  fore-fhortened enough to make a pleafant draw-
    ing, becaufe it was  necefTary to  look from a  high  point,  as in  feeing
    a difleclion from  the feats of a Theatre,  in order  to  have a full view of
    all  the belly, From the Pubis to the Sternum.
                                         *
 1. The External Obliqjje Muscle, (143.) is entirely cut  away,  and no part of  it
    remains on either fide.
.2. The  Internal Oblique Muscle (144.) is feen  on both fides ;  on the left fide of the
    body it is cut up from its infertion, and is thrown down upon the thigh, fhowing
   chiefly how thick and ftrong its flefhy belly is ; but on the right fide of the body it
   is left in  its  place,  where the obliquity of its fibres is  well feen, and where the
   chief points of the  defcription are  fulfilled  in the drawing, viz.  that the  chief
    belly of the Obliquus Internus is at the Iliac Spine, that  the central fibres  only are
   ■ dired,  going acrofs  the Abdomen to the Linea Alba;  and that the higher  fibres
                                      S                                 afcend 
 jog                           OF THE  MUSCLES.




   afcend towards the  Sternum, while the lower  ones go  obliquely downwards to the



   Pubis.   This is the mufcle which gives that mufcular covering of the Spermatic



   Cord, ftrong  in animals, though weak in  man, which is named Cremafter.  The



   tefticle of the right fide is torn up from the Scrotum,, and  thrown out upon the



   thigh, that the connedion  of the  Spermatic  Cord with, this the Internal  Oblique



   Mufcle,  might be feen;  and although it could not  be didindly  expreffed in fo



   fmall a figure, without exaggerating and departing from the true drawing, yet  there



   is  a conical form of the Spermatic Cord at its upper end, which fhows where the



   Cremafter  Mufcle joins it.



3.  The Transversalis Abdominis, (145.) ls  feen on the left fide.  It looks at firft fight



   much like the Internal Oblique, but it  is to be remembered,  that the Internal Ob-



   lique of this fide  (144.)  is thrown  down, over  the thigh.  The Transverse



   fends all its  fibres diredly acrofs the  Abdomen; and it is feen to belong to the



   inner furface of the Thorax, as much as the External Oblique Mufcle belongs to



   the  outer furface of it.  (a a) Reprefent the  place where the flefh of  this mufcle



   ends, and the tendon begins ; and the tendon at  this  point is  ftrongly  attached to



   the tendon  of the inner Oblique Mufcle. The letters  (a a) mark the edge where the



   two thin tendons adhere to form the fheath for the Rectus  Muscle ; the letter (b) is



   placed in the  fheath itfelf; the fheath is feen again on the left fide empty, and marked



   (b b),  with  the bowels of the Abdomen fhinning  through the back  part of the



   fheath,  which  though  very denfe and  ffrongr is yet thin and almod  tranfparent.



   But at the  lower part  (c),  it is  lefs perfed,  or  rather is wanting ;  the thinner



   membrane of the Peritoneum only being found there.



4, Thz Rectus  Abdominis,  (146.)  of  the left fide remains  in its place; it is diffeded



   on its  fore-part, fo as to  (how  the  tendinous interfedions (dd),  where the fore-



   part of the fheath adheres ; but at the back of  the (heath,  (i. e.)  at (b) there are



   no fuch adhefions, and though the Redus is  fo  attached  at  the fore-part,  as  to be



                                                                            very 
                          BOOK  SECOND, PLATE NINTH.                    135
   very difficultly diffeded;  it lies at its back part fo loofely, that it  is eafily turned
   out of its fheath with the point of  the finger, or the handle of the diffeding knife.
The  Rectus Abdominis of the right fide, (146.) is thrown down hke a ftrap over
   the  thigh, fo fully that its tendon  by which it is fixed into the Pubis is  feen, but
   not very diflindly here, becaufe the tendon is fmall, when the Pyramidal Mufcles
   are  found,  as in this fubjed.
The Pyramidal Muscles, (147.) which are as Supplementary Mufcles, are feen fully
   diffeded,  with neat,  fmall, and flefhy bellies, of a very regular Triangular form;
   the bafe of  the Triangle being  the origin of the mufcle from the Pubis ; the Apex
   of the Triangle being its infertion into the  LiNEA Alba, -and the mark (*) is put
   -tiponthe  place of the Symphifis Pubis.
S a
PLATE 
 
#» 
">«
 
BOOK SECOND,  PLATE TENTH.
141
PLATE      X.
This Plate explains the Text Book, from Page 323, to Page 328,
 J. HIS drawing explains the Diaphragm in a general way;  mowing  how
    it ftands, "  as a  Tranfverfe  Partition betwixt the Abdomen  and the
    " Thorax;"  and how,  by  its feveral  openings, it permits the  Veins,
    Arteries, and great nerves of the Vifcera,  to pafs from the one cavity
    to the other; but ftill it is reprefented here only in a  general way ; and
    though  its  openings are  explained, it  is rather  with the intention  of
    fhowing  their places,  and their relation  to each other,  than  with any
    intention of  defcribing their particular form;  which is more accurately
    delivered in  the next plate.

(1.) Is the upper mufcle of the Diaphragm.  This upper and greater mufcle rifes from
   the inner furface of the Thorax; and befides this origin from the  ribs and Sternum,
   there  is alfo another origin,  viz. from the Ligamentum Arcuatum (*), which
   ligament is of an arched  form, croffing the roots of the Quadratus  Lumborum,
   ("12,5.) and of  the Psoas Magnus (157.); f° that  the greater or upper mufcle
   of the Diaphragm rifes from  all the border of the Thorax upon its inner  furface,
   and from this, Ligamentum  Arcuatum.
       3                                                          (2.) The 
  142                          OF THE  muscles.
 (2.) The. Lower  or Posterior Muscle of the  Diaphragm rifes from the loins by
    fmall  tendinous heads, which  are hidden here by the Aorta (a) pafling  over
    them; but the flefhy part of this lower mufcle is feen with fibres clofely furround-
    ing and embracing the CGfophagus.
 (3.) The Middle Tendon is feen, but I do not  enter upon the detail,  nor pretend to
    reprefent the crofting of the Tendinous Fibres in this  general drawing.
 Thus is the Diaphragm, compofed of one great and circular mufcle before, .of one fmaller
    circular  mufcle behind, and of the triangular tendon betwixt them ; and, both in
    its  flefhy and tendinous parts, it is perforated by feveral veffels,  pafling reciprocally
    between the Thorax and  the Abdomen.
 Firft,  (a) the Aorta,  the great artery of the trunk,  paffes betwixt  the  Crura,
    or legs of the Diaphragm, which like an arch  ftrides over it to defend it from pref-
    fure.
Secondly,  The OZsophagus  (b),  which paffes  through  the   Diaphragm,  a little
    above  the  Aorta, and a little towards the left  fide.   Its paffage is by the hole (b)
    through the lower  flefhy belly,  and through the moft flefhy part of the Diaphragm,
    and the mufcular fibres of the  Crura  Diaphragmatis firft crofs  under the hole for
    the OZfophagus. They furround it, then crofs again above the hole,  fo that they form
    the figure of 8.; and the CSfophagus is fo apparently compaffed by thefe furrounding
    fibres, that fome anatomids have reckoned this a fort  of Sphinder  for the  upper
    orifice of the domach.
Thirdly, The Great Vena Cava ; (c) (both that branch of the Great Vena Cava, which
    belongs to the Liver, and that alfo, which comes from the lower  extremity) goes up
    t© the right fide  of the heart, through the right fide of the Diaphragm by the hole (c)r
    where a part of this great vein is feen hanging down with a flaccid and open mouth ;
    and this hole (c), being of a triangular form,  pafling in  the hard tendon, and being
    larger  than the vein requires, there is  no danger of  the vein being ftrangulated.
         2                                                               (d) Is 
                         BOOK SECOND, PLATE TENTH.                    143
(d) Is the Left Kidney.
(e) Is the Cellular Subftance in the  loins,  in which-the right kidney lies, the kid-
   ney of that fide being torn away.
(/)  Is the Bifurcation of the Aorta a little above the top of the Sacrum, and (g) the two
   Iliac arteries.
(159.) Is the Iliacus Internus Muscle, and (£) (hows the manner in which the Ilia-
   cus Internus, Pfoas Magnus, and Femoral Artery, come out from under the Femoral
   Ligament.
The anatomy of the Diaphragm is continued in the next plate.
PLATE 
» 
 
W  '/A
^77m
>iiy^^
Tt&yj
sfe
M,i
W%
%
O0$M
~£
j$
\V

-ic">^

.*• ■'. ,'. Si
07
/
/

>^ J^fll	Htetoi3	
^?aFiflB		Waft mm
	*!(<X5*wft|	j ™
 
BOOK SECOND, PLATE ELEVENTH.
PLATE     XL
This Plate explains the Text Boot, from Page 325, tt Page 335.
 1 HIS plate confifts of plans  of the Diaphragm, and Parts  of Generation.
The firft figure is a drawing of the Diaphragm,  neatly diflected and taken
    out of the body; explaining all its  origins, and all its holes more  cor-
    rectly than plate x.
The fecond figure is rather a plan than a drawing, and may be very ufeful
    to the young anatomift, in giving him  correct, notions  of the  general
    form of  the  Diaphragm, how it ftands flaunting  upon  the  whole;
    convex  towards the cheft,  concave towards the belly, and  moving
    (as it may eafily be conceived by this drawing,)  fo  as  to perform ref-
    piration,  and all the lefTer functions that depend upon it.
And the third figure explains  the  mufcles which belong to the parts of Ge-
    neration.  This is by no means a plan  merely, as might be conceived
    from the formal fhapes of  thefe mufcles,  but a true drawing after feve-
    ral careful difTections,  where, though the parts feem  formal, they  are
    really natural,  not  exaggerated  nor  caricatured, but delivered fairly
    and honeftly as they muft always  be feen after a right difTection.  And
    they  are expofed in fuch a pofture, as by its correfpondence with that
                                    T                              for 
 I46                          OF  THE MUSCLES.
    for  Lithotomy will at once  convey a leiTon of furgery,  while  it  gives
    correct and true ideas of thefe parts.


                             FIGURE    L

                DRAWING  OF  THE  DIAPHRAGM.

The parts pointed out  along with the  Diaphragm marked (145.)  are  parts  of the
    Tranfverfe mufcles of the Abdomen,  which, being internal mufcles and rifing from
    the inner furface of the Thorax, have their  tongue-like origins (a a a), which come
    from the  ribs, mixed confufedly with (b b b), the tongue-like origins  of  the great
    mufcle of the Diaphragm,  which tongue-like origins  (b b) come from the fame
    ribs; and it  was from  this connedion  with the two  Tranfverfe Mufcles of the
    Abdomen, that the Diaphragm  was once  reckoned a Trigaftric  Mufcle; Vid.
    Book of the Mufcles, page 315.
(1.) The greater, or upper mufcle  of the Diaphragm, has thefe five  origins ; on both
    fides  (dddd) mark the flefh which rifes from the ribs,  from the inner furface of
    the Thorax,  indigitated with the origins of the Tranfverfe Mufcle; (e e) mark the
    two  backmod portions  of the  great Anterior Mufcle, and thefe  two portions rife
    from the two Ligamenta Arcuata, which dretch over the origins of the Quadratus
    Lumborum and  Psoas  Mufcles.   And  (f) marks a fifth  portion of the  greater
    mufcle, which rifes from the inner furface of the Sternum and  Xiphoid Cartilage.
(2.) The leffer mufcle rifes by four tendinous feet  from the  fore-part of the  Lumbar
    Vertebrae; and thefe, the Crura Diaphragmatis (gg)} which furround  the trunk
    of the Aorta, and  their tendinous feet (hhh)  are very fairly  reprefented here,
    for they are not nicely cut and pared  into didind feet,  but  are  reprefented as they
    are taken  up from the face of the Lumbar Vertebrae ; that is, not in the (hape of
           3                                                                four 
                         BOOK SECOND,  PLATE ELEVENTH.                   I47
    four didind tendons, but adhering to each other in the form of a  fort of denfe ten-
    dinous membrane, very white and  glidening ; forming a fort of  fheath over the
    fore-parts of the Vertebrae ;  having flat drings, which  are  thicker  and dronger,
    and more brilliant  than  the  others ; but not to be  feparated  (without violence),
    into the fhapes of didind feet.
The tendinous feet  of the Diaphragm (h h),  unite into the Crura at (gg), and the two
    Crura, growing gradually more flefhy, form  at  (ii) the Poderior Mufcle of the
    Diaphragm ;  and it is  here,  that the fibres of  this poderior  or leffer mufcle  crofs
    and mix, and furround the hole for the GEfophagus, with thofe  fibres, which by
    their  crofting, defcribe irregularly the figure of eight;  and  by  their comprefling
    the GEfophagus form a fort of Sphinder.
(3.) The Central  Tendon is compofed of fibres, " which come  from the vari-
    " ous Fafciculi of this mufcle, and meet and crofs each  other with a confufed in-
    " ter-lacement which Albinus has been at much pains to trace, but which Haller de-
    " fcribes much more fenfibly,  as Intricationes variae, et vix dicendae ;  irregular and
    " confufed  crofling  chiefly at the openings,  and efpecially  at the Vena  Cava, the
    " triangular form of which feems to be guarded in a mod particular way."  Vid.
    book,  page 327.  And the figure (3, 3.) is repeated upon the furface of  the tendon,
    to fhow  the various Fafciculae of the tendinous fibres,  which are  truely " variae et
    " vix dicendae," and which it were not only difficult, but ufelefs to  defcribe.
(k) Is the Aorta, where it comes out from the Thorax into  the  Abdomen ; it  is here
    flaccid, and uninjeded.  Its  fird branches,  viz.  the Caeliac, and  upper  Mefenteric
    Arteries are  feen going off  at  this point.  It was drawn afide to  (how the  hole
    through which it paffes, and was fixed fo by a pin.
(I) Is the  hole,  by which the GEfophagus paffes, left empty.
(m) Is the hole,  by which  the  Vena  Cava paffes  through the tendinous  center of the
    Diaphragm.
                                       T 2                                    In 
148
OF  THE MUSCLES.
                              FIGURE    II.
In this Figure, the Diaphragm is drawn in a new podure ; for the trunk (viz.  the Pel-
   vis and Thorax, with the  intermediate Vertebrae of  the loins) is fet almod  upright.
   And fird,  the Convexity of the Diaphragm, towards the Thorax (a), fhould be ob-
   ferved.  Secondly, the obliquity of the Diaphragm fhould be obferved ;  its greater
   mufcle rifing from all the borders of the Thorax,  as at (b b),  while its Crura and
   tendinous feet rife near the top  of the Pelvis, from the lowed Vertebra of the loins.
   Thirdly, the true appearance of the tendinous  feet is marked,  the longed  lying in
   the middle, and the fhorter ones being more to the fide ; fo that  (c), the longed one,
   lies fair upon the fore-part of the Vertebra of the loins,  and rifes almoft from the
   loweft Vertebra; w7hile the (horteft one (d) rifes from  the Tranfverfe Procefs or
    the fourth Vertebra of the loins.

                              FIGURE    III.
 The third figure of this  plate explains the mufcles of the parts  of  generation,  the hips
    and thighs being prefented as in the operation of Lithotomy.
 For  the full  explanation of thefe mufcles,  the dudent mud  turn  to the Book of the
    Mufcles, chapter vii. page 329. where he  will find that,
 (1.)  The Erector Penis (150.)  is a delicate and flender mufcle about two inches  in
    length, rifing from the  Tuberofity of the Os Ifchium (a); lying along the root  of
    the Crus Penis, where  it is fmallefl; inferted into the Crus Penis ; being very
    fmall, and almod pointed both at its origin,  and at its infertion *.
                                                                            (2.) The
   '*  Haller will not allow  this mufcle the name of Erector; he fays it does not draw the Penis back
 to the Pubis, but that its office rather is to deprefs the Penis, and hold it down to the proper angle,
                                                                                  for 
                         BOOK SECOND, PLATE ELEVENTH.                   jm
 (2.)  The Transversalis Perin^ei, (151.) rifes along with the Eredor; from the Tu-
    ber Ifchii (a), it  erodes  the  deep hollow  which is betwixt the Ifchium and the
    Anus ;  and is fixed into the backmod point of the bulb of the Urethra.
 C3.)  The Accelerator Urin^:, (152.) is a double mufcle ; or a pair of mufcles one ly-
    ing upon each fide of the bulb of the Urethra,  fo that the whole fairly furrounds the
    bulb.  And indeed this tumor of the bulb feems chiefly formed to favour the adion
    of the Accelerator Mufcle ; and  the two flender and horn-like tendons of the Accele-
    rator are feen plainly  turning off from the cavernous body of the Urethra  (b) to  go
    out upon the cavernous body of  the  Crus Penis (c), by  which hold it plays more
    powerfully upon the bulb.  We feel the  adions of  this mufcle very plainly in the
    throwing out of the lad drops of urine, as well as in the ejaculation of the Semen ;
    and its great power of throwing the Semen to a didance has been afcertained by ex-
    periments,  fuch as fhould not  be  repeated,  nor mentioned, indeed, except in that
    language in which they were told.  " Condat enim per experimenta, ob turpitudinefn
    "  non  repetenda,  multo longius femen  de fano et dudum cado homine profelire
    "  quam abed uterus."  The  Sphincter Ani ("153.),  is feen furrounding the open-
    ing of the Anus.
 Wounds of thefe mufcles  are attended with no degree of  danger, nor followed by any
    kind of incapacity, but yet it is very manifed, that fince the incifions for Lithoto-
    my fhould be made in  one regular and  uniform line, thefe  mufcles will be  cut by
    every dextrous operator in one  certain  way ; and the naming them wrong mud
    be a mark either  of  ignorance  of thefe  parts, or at  the lead, of a bad  irregular
    operation.   Now,  as the aim of  the Lithotomid is to  get into the  bladder by  that
    great hollow which lies  betwixt the Tuberofity of the Os  ifchium (a), and the
    Anus (d) ;  the incifion mud  pafs exadly  in the middle betwixt the Tuber and the
                                                                             Anus.

for entering the Vagina.  What a pity it is that the illuftrious author had not afcertained this curious
angle !  for we fhould naturally conceive, at leaft from what we fee after our injections, that the Penin
when in full erection, flood up to the Pubis as clofe as it could lie. 
t
150                          OF  THE MUSCLES.





  Anus.   The  Tranfverfalis Perinaei muft be  fairly cut acrofs ;  the  Accelerator



  will  be fpared ; the Eredor cannot be cut; and the operator  who cuts the  Accele-



  rator, keeps  his knife too near  the  Anus, and  wounds  the bulb.  The operator



  who  fpeaks of cutting the Eredor, either muft be very ignorant of this fame Erec-



  tor,  or  muft intend to cut upon the Tuberofity of the Ifchium, hoping  perhaps



  to cut through the bone :  But what  (hall we think of a furgeon, who fpeaks about



  things of this kind fo loofely, as to talk of cutting both the Eredor and the Acce-



  lerator Mufcle ;  that is of cutting both that mufcle which lies on the outfide  of



  the  common  incifion, and alfo  that  one which lies on the infide of  the  common



  incifion ? After reading this in any author,  one might be inclined to turn backwards



  a page or two, to fee whether he  made an incifion like that of Celfus ; viz.  in the



  fliape of a half-moon.
PLATE 
 
PL. XII.
 
BOOK SECOND, PLATE TWELFTH.                 I$l
PLATE      XII.
This Plate and the next explain the Text Book, from Page 336, to Page 384.
                   OF THE LOWER EXTREMITY.

 IN this plate are explained the chief mufcles of the Thigh, Leg, and Foot.
    The limb is hung by a rope, the foot fwinging in the air,  the ball of
    the great toe touching the ground. The leg is prefented twice.  In a fore
    view  (hewing the great fafcia of the thigh dififected back, and the muf-
    cles naked, Fig.  i.  And again,  in a back view,  Fig.  ii.  (hewing the
    cavity of the Pelvis; the hollow  betwixt the  Ham-ftring mufcles, and
    the  bellies  of the  Gaftrocnaemii  with  the  great  Achilles  Tendon.
    The explanations cannot  be orderly,  and therefore  they  fhould  be
    fhort.

In Figure I. (a) marks  the Spine of the Ilium ; (b) the creft of the Pubis ; (c) the liga-
   ment of Paupart which runs betwixt thefe two points ; (d) the Femoral artery paf-
   ling under the ligament.-  The mufcles which appear on the fore-part of the thigh
   are thefe.
The Rectus (171-) lying in the middle of the thigh, having a white  and  tendinous
   part in the center, and the flefhy  fibres going in towards it.
                                                                      The 
  152                ,           OF THE  MUSCLES.
The Vastus Externus  (173.) making all the flefh on the the outfide of the thigh.
The Vastus Internus (174.) making that cufhion  of flefh, which is fo prominent
    upon the inner fide of the knee joint, and which makes fo particular a mark in the
    drawings of the thigh : and all thefe three mufcles, viz. the Redus,  Vaftus Exter-
    nus,  and Vaftus Internus, are inferted together into the Patella, which  is marked [e).
Then the Sartorius  175.) is feen rifing from the higheft point of  the Os Ilium ;  crof-
    fing the thigh, long and flender like  a ftrap,  and bending down  the Vadus Internus
    Mufcle.
The head of the Gracilis (176.) where it rifes from the Pubis is here feen  ;—next to that
    is feen the fird head of the Triceps (161.) ; and next to that the Pectinalis (160.)
    with the artery of the thigh lying flat upon its belly.
Thefe are the chief mufcles on the fore part of the thigh ;  they are  naturally  covered
    with the Fascia, or  broad tendinous  expanfion, marked (/"), and  the Fascialis
    Muscle, which, from its making this vagina tenfe, is named Tenfor Vaginae Femoris ;
    is marked with its appropriated number (156.),  and is drawn out  along with the
    fafcia,  and is  feen rifing from the fame point  of the Os Ilium,  from  which the Sar-
    torius rifes.
In the Leg, (g)  marks the Tibia ; and the mufcles are,
The Gastrocnemius, (181.)
The Tibialis  Anticus (187.), which comes from the fore part of  the Tibia, croffes
    the ancle obliquely,  goes over the fide of the foot  to be  implanted into the root of
    the great toe ;  and this  is the tendon which makes that fliarp angle on the fore-part
    of the ancle where the buckle lies.
The Extensor Pollicis (196.) lies next to the Tibialis, and its tendon  paffes like that
    of the Tibialis Anticus under the Annular Ligament of  the ancle, which is marked
    (h)  ; and next to the Extenfor Pollicis lies the Extensor Longus Digitorum Pedis
    (193.) which lies  deeper dill, and more towards the outfide of the leg.   Its tendons
    are feen going  out to each of the toes,  and thefe tendons are accompanied with the
         3                                                                 tendons 
                        BOOK SECOND, PLATE TWELFTH.                  I53





   tendons of  the  little mufcle the  Extensor Brevis  Digitorum  Pi£ms (19J.),



   which is feen lying under the tendons of the long mufcle.



Behind the Extenfor Digitorum, and hiding it in part, is the PeroneUS Longus Mafcle



   (184.), which belongs to the brawn of the Leg, and the tendon of which paffes down



   behind the outer ancle.



In the foot, Fig. II. lying under this one, is explained the Plantar Aponeurofis, or that



   fafcia which belongs to the fole  of  the foot; and which is defcribed in the Book of



   Mufcles, page 382.  It is feen here to confid of three general divifions, the middle one



   (7), the lateral one (k) on the outfide, which covers the Flexor, and the Abdudor



   Minimi Digiti;  and the lateral  one (/) on the infide, which covers  the Flexor and



   the Abdudor Pollicis.



The  general Fafcia where it  covers the thigh is marked (f)t but  it is merely a con-



   tinuation of  the fame  fafcia that covers the leg ; and where it covers the leg it is



   marked (*) ;  and it is dill the fame fafcia which being continued over the fore-part



   of  the foot,  is there drengthened  by its adhefion to the outer and inner ancles, by



   which,  taking a new form it becomes the Annular  Ligament, fo that the  Annular-



   Ligament is merely a ftrengthening of the common fafcia.








                             FIGURE   III.






 X HIS view fhows chiefly the mufcles upon the back part of the thigh and leg.   The



   Vertical Sedion of the Os  Sacrum  is marked (m) ; the hollow of  the Pelvis is



   marked (n) ; the Vertical Sedion of the Os Pubis is  marked (0) ;  and  the  letter



   (p) is put down upon  the Tuberofity of the Os Ifchium, which could not be clear-



   ly marked. . And  the mufcles are,



The  Psoas Magnus (157.) ; crofling  the brim of the Pelvis, to go down into the thigh.



The  Gracilis (176.), which is feen coming from the arch of the Pubis, and going down



   to  be inferted by  a delicate and flender tendon, into the  head of. the  Tibia.



                                        U                                   The 
  154                          OF THE  MUSCLES.
 The firft and fecond heads of the Triceps,  (161.) are feen from behind.
 The Semi-membranosus (178.) is next feen ; but the whole of it is not feen; nothing is
    bare here but the middle and lower parts of the mufcle ; but there is enough of it to
    fhow that it is not as its name imports, a mufcle having a membranous appearance,
    it has on the contrary a very thick flefhy belly.
 The Semi-TENdinosus (177.) is next to it,  and the reafon of its being named Semi-tendi-
    nofus is feen in the length of its tendon (q).  The Semi-membranofus and the Semi-
    tendinofus form together the inner ham-ftring.  The outer ham-ftring is formed by
    the  Tendon of the Biceps Cruris Mufcle; and the belly of the Biceps (180.) is feen
    held out by three flicks, fo as to (how the deep hollow betwixt the ham-ftrings,  in
    which  is  feen hanging the great  Sacro-Sciatic  Nerve (r) ;  where  it is going
    down  the back of the thigh,  to pafs down under the heads of the  Gaftrocnemii
    Mufcles.
The Great Gluteus Muscle (163.) is feen upon the hip diffeded, fo as to (how the
    order of its fibres, and hanging like the reft of the leg all loofe and flaccid.
The Vastus Internus (174.) is alfo feen making a flefhy  belly juft over the knee-joint.
The two bellies of the Gastrocnemius Muscle (181.) are feen rifing each from its own
    Condyle of the thigh bone  at (s s)t  and  meeting together to be joined into the great
    Achillis tendon (t);  which grows gradually fmaller as it goes downwards to be im-
    planted into the heel at (u),  where ftill it is very thick and ftrong.
The great belly and tendon of the Flexor Pollicis (188.^ is alfo feen pafling behind
    the inner ancle.
A part of the belly of the Soljeus (182.) is feen lying under the belly of the Gaftro-
    cnemius.
The foot in this  drawing,  is left covered  with fkin, and puffed,  and ill fliaped,  as  it
    naturally is, while under diffedion.
PLATE 
 
 
BOOK SECOND, PLATE THIRTEENTH.                 J$$
PLATE      XIIL
This Plate explain* the Text Book, from Page 336, to Page 384.
OHOWS the deeper mufcles of the Thigh, Leg, and Foot, alfo in  two
    drawings; one reprefenting the fore, and the other the  back-parts of
    the leg.  This is a fuller difTection than  the laft,  fo that it differs great-
    ly in general appearance from the laft  drawing, but  ftill the  general
    pofition is exactly the fame.

In Figure I. are feen,
The Gluteus Maximus (163.) now diffeded, and cut  away from its origin  in the
   haunch bone, left at its infertion into the thigh bone.  It is hung  out by a firing,
   and the (hape,  which it falls into, (hows that it is one of the heavieft  and flefhieft
   mufcles in the body ; a part of the Glutaeus Medius (164.) is feen under it.
The Rectus Femoris (171.,) is now cut away, and nothing of it is left here, but its
   origin from the Spinous  Procefs marked (a); and its infertion into  the Patella,
   which is marked (b)  is thrown down and left hanging.   By the throwing down of
   the Rectus Femoris, the great mafs of the CrurjEUS (1^2.) which lies under it is
   expofed, and it  is feen that  the  Cruraeus confifts partly of tendon, partly of flefh,
   extends all  along the thigh,  rifes from the thigh  bone, lies immediately under the
   Redus, and is inferted along with it into the Patella ;  and here the Vastus Exter-
                                      U a                                nus 
 156                          OF THE  MUSCLES.
   nus  (173.) is feen  in its place.  The  Vastus Internus (174-) is cut and thrown
   down,  and left hanging over the knee like the Redus.
The  Sartorius  (175.) is alfo  cut away from the' Ilium, and left hanging down along
   the  leg.
The  Fascialis (156.) is feen here alfo with a rag of its fafcia conneded with it.
The  Psoas Magnus (157.) which comes from the fides of the Lumbar Vertebrae,  and
   the Iliacus Internus (159.) which comes from the infide of the haunch bone, are
   feen turning  over the fore-part of the Pelvis together to go down  through  among
   the flefh of the thigh, to the leffer or inner Trochanter of the thigh bone.
The Pectinalis (160.) is feen rifing from the Pubis,  and ftretching flat  and dired to-
   wards the thigh bone.
The Triceps Longus marked (1.), as it is the firft head of the Triceps Femoris,  (161.)
   is feen here thick, and flefhy.  This covers the other two heads of the Triceps,  vix.
   the  Triceps  Brevis, and Triceps Magnus;  the edge of the Triceps Magnus, or
   third head of the Triceps, is feen here,  (3.) ; but the Triceps Brevis or fecond
   head of the  Triceps is here entirely covered by the Pedinalis and  Triceps Longus,
   and is feen only in the fecond drawing,  where it is marked (2.)
The mufcles  on  the back-parts of the hip and thigh, are explained in figures ii. and  iii.
In Figure II. we have the Gluteus Maximus (163.) hung out by a firing as in the other
   drawing.  The Psoas Magnus (157.) eroding the brim of the Pelvis as in the former
   drawings ; the Triceps Longus marked (1.)  defcending from the Pubis, to the mid-
    dle  of the thigh bone ; behind that is feen the Triceps Brevis,  vel fecundus, (2.) the
    fecond head of the Triceps, which is held as a part of the fame  mufcle, though it lies
    behind the firft, and  is of a different  layer; and behind  that ftill lies the Triceps
    Magnus (3.),  which has  alfo very little connedion with the  other heads, but it is
    called the third head of the Triceps; and there is feen the Femoral Artery marked
    (c) pafling through the Triceps Magnus from the fore to the back part of the thigh ;
    the  artery is  marked (c)t and the tendon of the Triceps Magnus, where it is implant-
                                                                               ed 
                      BOOK SECOND,  PLATE THIRTEENTH.                 I37

   ed into the inner Condyle of the thigh bone, is marked (d) ;  fo that the artery paffes
   through the Triceps from the fore to the back part of the thigh, only a little above
   the knee.
The  root of the Semi-membranofus (178.)  is feen at (<?), where it rifes by a thick and
   flefhy  head from  the Tuberofity of the  Os Ifchium; the lower  end of it where  it
   is attached to the head of the Tibia is cut, and  hangs down at (f).
The  oppofite Ham-dring Mufcle the Biceps  (180.) is feen ; its bellies are marked with
   the proper number of the mufcle.  Its  longer head is feen rifing in common with
   the Semi-membranofus from the Tuberofity of the Os Ifchium at (g);  the longer
   head is marked (g), but the fhorter head of the Biceps  which  rifes from the back
   of  the thigh bone, is marked  (b);  the place where the long  and  the  fhort
   heads  of  the Biceps  Femoris  unite and mix their  fibres is  marked (i); and the
   tendon of the Biceps which forms the outer ham-dring is marked (i).
All the ham, or  the back  part of  the knee-joint,  is  now expofcd by the throwing down
   of  the conjoined mufcles,  the Gastrocnemius Externus (181.) and the Sol^eus,
   (182.) which are left only at their infertion by the great Achillis Tendon (/), which
   is fixed   into  the heel  bone;  and the  Gadrocnemius and   Solaeus  being thus
   thrown down, the two curious  mufcles  which lie in  the ham are expofed, viz. the
   Plantaris (183.) which  rifes  from the outer Condyle  of  the  Os Femoris, has  a
   very fmall delicate flefhy  belly, like that of the Palmaris  Longus. It has alfo a
   fmall  round tendon like  it, the fmallefl and longed in  the body, not groffer than
   a fiddle-flring ; which going down along the inner furface of the Gaftrocnaemius,
   and making an  impreffion upon  the inner  furface of the great Achillis Tendon,
   accompanies  it  to the heel,. where it is implanted along with it.
The other fmall  mufcle is  the proper mufcle of the ham, which is thence  named Mus-
   culus Poplit-Zeus  (179O It is a beautiful triangular mufcle,  which lies  exadly
   upon' the back part of the joint as a fort of guard to the Capfule, and like a check
   band for  fupporting the  knee.  It comes from the  outer Condyle  along with the
                                                                            little 
 I58                          OF  THE MUSCLES.
   little belly of the Plantaris, erodes the joint with  oblique fibres;  comes from the
   Condyle of the thigh bone; is inferted  into the back  of the Tibia, and fo bends
   the knee.
In the legs of both drawings,  the  following deep feated mufcles are feen.   In the firft
   leg,  the deep mufcles of the toes which lie  under the Tibialis Anticus, and  they
   are all extenfors of the toes. In the fecond leg the deep mufcles which lie under the
   Gaftrocnemius and Solaeus  ; and they are all flexors of the toes.
In Figure I. is feen (m), the place upon the fore-part of the Tibia,  from which the
   flefhy  belly of the  Tibialis Anticus  is cut away, fo  that  the next  mufcle the
   Extensor  Pollicis (19CA is feen,  which is a long, penniform, and  very  ftrong
    mufcle; and its long tendon is feen going to the great toe.
Behind that again, lies the Extensor Longus Digitorum Pedis (193-), which has its
   flefhy belly lying behind the Extenfor Pollicis ; and its four tendons are raifed over
   one leg of  the compaffes, fo as to  expofe the fhort flexor which lies beneath,  upon
   that part of the foot where the buckle refts ; and which is feen beginning by a fmall
   head («), from the heel bone.  Behind the Extenfor Digitorum lies a third mufcle,
    which is like a flip of the Extenfor, but its tendon does  not run into the  toes.  It
    is fixed into the fide of the foot at the root of the little toe, it  is therefore a bender
   of the foot, and from its rifing from the Fibula, is named  Peroneus Tertius (194.)
 And Laftly, in this figure, a part of  the Peroneus Longus (184.J is feen, a mufcle
    which  rightly belongs  to the other fide  of the leg,   and  the tendon of which
    paffes behind the outer ancle, to go down into the fole of the foot.
 In Figure II.  are feen, in like manner, all the long flexors of the toes and  foot.
 Fird the Tibialis Posticus (186.) begins with a ftrong flefhy belly upon the back part
    of the Tibia ; is  penniform like moft of thefe long mufcles of  the leg ;  and fends  a
    long tendon  down behind  the inner  ancle, which  runs in a particular  ring of the
     Ligaments  that are behind the ancle ; and, getting  into the fole of  the foot, is fixed
    by many fpreading roots into the feveral bones of the Tarfus,
                                                                              The 
                       BOOK SECOND,  PLATE THIRTEENTH.                 159
The Flexor Longus Digitorum Pedis (189.) lies immediately behind this ; is like it
    in all points; fends  its long flender  tendon down alfo  behind the ancle in  its own
    peculiar ring, but, pafling the bones of the Tarfus, it divides into four tendons, which
    go to each of the leffer toes.
The Flexor Longus Pollicis Pedis (188.) is the appropriated mufcle of the  great toe.
    It has  a large flefhy belly, a very ftrong big tendon,  and runs by the inner ancle in
    its own peculiar  ring.  Now it is to  be noticed, that this Flexor Pollicis,  though
    the flexor  only of one fingle toe, is much bigger than the common flexor of all  the
    toes.  It is even bigger than  both thefe, or the Tibialis  Pofticus,  which is the great
    mufcle of the foot.  The meaning of which is very plain ; viz.  that thefe mufcles of
    the toes are to be confidered not fo much as mere benders of  the toes ; for when we
    obferve how little the toes move, and how much walking confifts in rifing upon the
    ball of the great toe, we fhall regard thefe mufcles rather as benders of  the whole
    foot.  It is by the power of thefe  mufcles, that we  beat the  ground in each ftep
    in walking, for in walking each pufh in carrying the body is made by the  prefling
    of the ball of the great  toe againft  the ground; and thefe mufcles all prefs down
    the ball of the great toe. In making the ftep, thefe flexor mufcles of the toe, and foot,
    are chiefly aflifted by a mufcle belonging to the other fide of the leg,  I mean the Pe-
    roneus Longus (184.), which rifes not like thefe, from the back of the Tibia, to
    pafs  behind the  inner ancle, but  from  the  whole  length  of the Fibula,  whence
    its name of Peroneus, and paffes down in a ring behind the outer ancle ; and this
    ftrong tendon  which  makes  the fharpnefs  behind the outer ancle, and gives  (hape
    to the  leg, is here drawn out with a  firing juft where it is defcending into its (heath
    or ring.
 Thus all the  mufcles which  bend the foot, and fo raife  the body  at each ftep,  are  dif-
    tindly feen in this diffedion ; viz.  The Gastrocnemius (181.) the Sol^eus (182.)
    and the Plantaris  (183.); the Tibialis Posticus (188.) Flexor Digitorum (189.)
    Flexor Pollicis (188.)  and Peroneus Longus. (184.) There is but one more, the
           1                                                         ,    Peroneus 
  l6o                          OF  THE  MUSCLES.





    Peroneus Brevis,  which is fo exadly like the  Peroneus Longus, that its  not being



    feen in this view,  is  hardly an  imperfedion, the demonftration being fufficiently



    full.



The foot is diffeded in Figure iii. wThere is feen firft the  fliort Flexor, the Flexor Brevis



    Digitorum Pedis (191.)* cut up from the heel bone where it has its origin ; its flefhy



    belly is thrown out; its fhort  neat tendons  are going to each of the toes ;  its ten-



    dons  are perforated like thofe of the  hand, for the  tranfmiflion of the tendons of the



    long Flexor.  The tendons of the long Flexor  are marked (0) ; they are feen going



    forwards to thread the loops, made by the fhort tendons ; and there is feen conneded



    with  the long Flexor that fliort fupplementary mufcle which comes from the  heel



    bone,  and which being irregular in its form, is called the  Massa Carnea  Jacobi



    Silvii (190.).  The Lumbricales are  too delicate to be feen in a fmall drawing like



    this,  but they are eafily  found in diffedion, for they are like  a continuation of the



    Maffa Carnea lying  in the forks of the tendons.



The tendon  of  the long Flexor of the great toe is feen here (p), efcaping from under



    the inner ancle, and appearing upon the fole of the foot; and it is feen to  be con-



    neded here  (by a fmall flip of  tendon)  with the long Flexor of all the toes.  This*



    tendon of the long Flexor of the great toe k feen to pafs betwixt  the two heads of



    the fhort flexor, which is marked with its proper number  (191.)  The Abdudor of



    the little toe is  alfo feen.



There remain to be explained,  certain mufcles  which immediately furround the hip



   joint; and which are defcribed  in  the book from  page 347, to 352.



The Trochanters are fo named, becaufe they are  placed  fo that moft_of the mufcles



    which are implanted into them,  at the fame  time that they bend the thigh, turn



   it alfo.



Thefe mufcles  are explained by  figure  iv.   The Pelvis  is hung  up by  a  rope, put



   round the Lumbar Vertebrae ; and the points of bone  to be obferved as explaining



   the podure are, (q) the line of  the Os Sacrum,  and  Os Coccygis; (r) the tuberofity




       1                                                                      of 
                       BOOK SECOND, PLATE THIRTEENTH.                  ifci
     of the Os Ifchium; (s) the Sacro-Sciatic Ligament pafling from the Sacrum,  to the
    Ifchium;  (t)  the Spine of the Ilium;  (u)  the great  Trochanter of the Thigh
    Bone ; and (v) the (haft of the fame bone.
 And the mufcles  that are feen are,
 First,  the Gluteus Medius (164.) cut away from its origin,  which is from  the
    Os Ilium  at (x) ; the  great  Glutaeus, which  rifes  from  the  Sacrum  and  Ilium,
    from (g) to (t) being cut entirely away.   The middle Gluteus (164.) is feen to be
    implanted  into the very Apex of the Trochanter ; the Gluteus Minimus  (165.)
    which  lies  under it, rifes  again from that part of the  Os Ilium that forms  the
    focket for the Thigh Bone; and is of courfe the deeped,  and the fmalleft  of thefe
    mufcles.
Behind the Glutjeus Minimus is feen the Pyriformis (168.); and  the  reafon of  its
    name, taken from its Pyramidal form,  is well explained;  and its broad thin belly is
    feen coming from the hollow of the Sacrum within the Cavity  of the Pelvis j and
    its fmall flat tendon is feen inferted into the root of the Trochanter Major.
The Quadratus Femoris, (170.) a  fhort and fquare  mufcle is feen coming from the
   tuberofity of the Os Ifchium, and implanted into the greater Trochanter.
The mufcles, named Marfupiales, are feen going  into  the  Trochanter at  the point
   marked (y) ;  and I do not put their right  numbers (166.)  (167.) upon  them,
   left it fhould confound fo fmall a drawing.  Befides, it will be eafily enough under-
   ftood, that the  white tendon, marked (y)t is the  tendon  of the  Obturator Inter-
   nus,  which  comes  from within the Pelvis, turning over  the tuberofity  of the Os
   Ifchium; and the little  flefhy  flips above and below this white tendon, and inclof-
   ing it upon either fide, are the Gemini Muscles (166.) (167.),  one above,  another
   below  the Obturator Internus, and all the three inferted together into the root of
   the Trochanter at the point (y).  A part of the Triceps Femoris is marked (161.);
   the heads of  the  Biceps, and of  the Semi-tendinofus,   and   Semi-membranofus
                                       X                                 wdiere 
 l62                          OF THE MUSCL£S.




   where they all three  rife together from  the  tuberofity  of  the  Os Ifchium, have




   the mark of the Biceps only, which is (180.)



The  Sacro-Sciatic Nerve,  where it comes  out  from the cavity of the  Pelvis, along



   with  the Pyriform  Mufcle,  is marked (z). 
? H E
THIRD   BOOK.
OF THE
J
I   N   T 
 
BOOK     THIRD.
                  OF THE

JOINTS.
 this book feem fliort, it is becaufe I have omitted many joints, which
it is decent and proper for the profefled anatomift to be acquainted with,
but which it were very fuperfluous to trouble the ftudent about, for the
fubject.  is hardly  even curious, and certainly not ufeful.  Therefore
I have  made a fuller defcription of the ihoulder, knee, and hip; and
have refrained  from giving  any drawings of the joints of the head, of
the Vertebras, or  of the  ribs; for thefe  joints are not eafily under-
ftood, are hardly  worth remembering, and are  very foon forgotten.
It was  natural  for me  to be afraid  left  the hiftory and  drawings of
thefe joints might  fwell the book, making it  more expenfive,  and  lefs
ufeful.
                                                        PLATE 
i66
Siii-'  THE JOIN'IS.
PLATE
This Plate explains the Text Book, from Page 437, to Page 4J9..
Explains the Shoulder Joint, Elbow, arkl Wrifti

                              FIGURE    I,

i S' the fhoulder joint which was fet up for this drawing, the whole piece of anatomy
   reding  upon the  lower angle  of the Scapula, and upon the cut end  of  the  Os
   Humeri.  The marked points by which-the mufcles and the joint are explained,
   are thefe chiefly :  (a) The Clavicle ; the letter (a) is  placed on  the middle of  the
   bone, where it projeds in the collar or root  of the neck; (b) is the end next the
   Sternum with fome ragged flefh hanging from it j (c) is the flat end by which it
   touches the point of the Acromion Procefs ; (d) marks the Acromion Procefs where
    the  Clavicle is joined  to it;  and (e) is. the point or apex of the Coracoid Procefs.
    (f) Marks  that line of the Scapula which is called its bafe, and it, like the Clavicle,
   has  the remains of. its  ragged  mufcle hanging down from it.   And laftly,  (jf) ii
   the Os Humeri,
The mufcles which are feen here  are,
The Subscapulars (77 J covering the whole of the Lower Surface of the Scapula,
   and better explained than in the fmaller drawings for the. mufcles of the arm.  A
   fmall part of the Supra-spinatus C73O is alfo feen,
                                                                              The 
pOffir r^ff.f ui.uib'ii'-j .ijj fvv,,/7„r
E'TcE
S.LVLOr 
 
                           BOOK  THIRD, PLATE FIRST.                     107

The Biceps (78.) is marked in the  bellies with its proper number, and its two heads
    are alfo  marked;  the  (horter head (h) rifing  from the  Coracoid Procefs; and th-
    longer head (7), coming down from within the cavity of the joint.
The Coraco-Brachialis  ("72.), is feen hanging down loofe and  flaccid,  from the Cora-
    coid Procefs, and pafling obliquely under the two heads  of  the Biceps ; to be  fixed
    into the  arm bone.
The Deltoides (71.) is cut away from  the  Scapula and turned backwards,  and it
    hangs over the arm bone very  thick and mafiy.   And  this white and fhining ap-
    pearance upon the  inner furface of the Deltoides is from the Cellular Subftance
    which lies under  it being condenfed into fomewhat of  the  form of  a fafcia.   And
    it is from this fafcia,  that one  of the great Burfae Mucofae  belonging  to this  joint
    rifes. The  flefh of the Deltoid is  feen at  (b),  and the fafcia, covering the face of
    the  muftle,  is marked with  the number (71.)  And laftly, the Latissimus Dorsi
    f 70.) is feen cut off  about fix inches from its infertion  into the (houlder bone, and
    left hanging there.  (&&) Wherever they are found, denote the fat which lies in the
    interdices of the  mufcles, and  which  fhould not  be too curioufly  picked away in
    any part of a diffedion, unlefs it be necefTary for making fome important part
    very clean and diftind.
 The parts more immediately belonging to the  joint are thefe.
 1.  The Acromion Procefs (d) overhangs the joint from  above, and prevents luxations
    upwards.
 2.  The  Coracoid Procefs (e) ftands  up on  the  infide of  the  arm, to ftrengthen the
    joint in  that diredion  alfo.
 3.  The  Ligamentum Profrium Triangulare  Scapula  (m) croffes from the Ac-
    romion to the Coracoid Procefs, makes a fort of bridge betwixt them, and keeps
    all firm  in that diredion.
 a.  Another  ligament  is  feen here, the Ligamentum Commune  Trapezoides  («),
    which does  not rightly belong to this joint, being but a ligament of the  Clavicle j
                                                                               £0 
  l68                            OF THE JOINTS.
    fo that there arc the following parts attached to the Coracoid Procefs  (e), viz.  the
    Coraco-brachialis (72.), and the fliort head of the biceps  (b), going  down from
    it,  the Ligamentum Triangulare Proprium (m)  going to the Acromion, and the
    Ligamentum Commune (n) going to the Clavicle.
The Capfule or bag of the joint which is exceedingly thin, and 1ax, is marked (0 0) ;
    and it is cut open to fhow the head of  the bone, as it lies in its focket.  This (hows
    alfo the long tendon (i), of the Coraco-brachialis  as  it comes through the focket,
    lying upon the round head of the fhoulder bone.   And laftly,  the flat tendon of the
    Subfcapularis  is feen fpreading over  the  Capfular Ligament at (p), by  which  it
    will be eafily conceived,  how the other mufcles fpread over the Capfule to ftrength-
    en it; for here it is feen, that the cut edge of  the Capfule, and the cut edge of  the
    tendon  of the Subfcapularis is  one and the fame part; that is, the flat  tendon and
    the  Capfule are fo incorporated, that the one  cannot be cut nor torn without  the
    other.  And thus it may be  underftood, how the chief fecurity and ftrength of
    the  (houlder joint  is  from the mufcles furrounding  its  Capfule  fo clofely, and
    being implanted diredly into the head of the bone.


                             FIGURE   II.

IS intended  chiefly for fhowing the fhallownefs  of  the  Glenoid Cavity, when com-
    pared with the head of the bone,  and it alfo explains very  well the way in which
    the long tendon of the biceps rifes from the margin of the Glenoid Cavity.
The Scapula (A) is naked, but with the remains of  ragged flefh hanging  about  it;
    where (c) marks  the Spine of the Scapula rifing towards (d)y which is the point
    of the Acromion  Procefs; (e) marks the apex of the Coracoid  Procefs  fcarcely
    feen; (m) is the Ligamentum  Proprium Triangulare lying rather  in (hadow;  the
   Capfule is here alfo marked (0 0) ; it  is cut  up and thrown quite back in a fquare
             3                                                               form 
                             BOOK THIRD,  PLATE FIRST.                     169
     form from  the manner in which  it is cut; the edges  of the cut  Capfule are dill
     feen furrounding the  fhoulder bone,  as  well as the  Glenoid Cavity; and this
     throwing  back of the Capfule fhows  the (hallownefs of the Glenoid  Cavity (p)t
     and  the roundnefs and largenefs of  the head  of the fhoulder bone ; and within the
     Capfule is feen the long head (/)  of the biceps,  rifing from the margin  of the
     focket, at its upper part. (£) Marks  the remains of the tendon of the Supra-fpinatus
     Mufcle, where  it lies  upon the Capfule  and adheres to it;  and it is  this tendon
     which  gives  the Capfule an appearance of thicknefs, and makes it turn fo rigidly
     backwards at this particular point (k),

                               FIGURE     III.

 JYlAY be compared with figure i. to obferve how entirely the joint is  furrounded
     with its great mufcles : For here is the Infra-fpinatus covering the  Capfule, jufl as
     the Subfcapularis does in figure i.  But the chief ufe  of this figure is to give a true
     notion of one of the greated  Burfae Mucofae that belong to the (houlder joint.
 The Parts marked in this drawing are,
 The bafis of the Scapula  (a) ;  the beginning of the Spine  of the Scapula  (b); the
    Acromion Procefs  (c) ;  the Clavicle (d) ;  the ligament which  ties  the outer end of
    the clavicle firmly to  the point of the Acromion Procefs (e) ;  the point  or apex of
    the Coracoid Procefs (f) ; the fhaft of the  (houlder bone (g).  But the head of the
    fhoulder bone is concealed by the mufcles, and other foft  parts.
Then, of the foft parts there are feen chiefly thefe,  The great belly of the Infra-spina-
    tus Mufcle (74.), where it lies upon the Scapula  black and fliining;  (for every
    mufcle when diffeded clean,  has a metally-like furface) ;— the belly of  the Teres
    Minor  (75-)» the  tendon of which twifls to  be implanted  thus into  the fhoulder
    bone at (k).
The fhort head of the  biceps (b) is feen rifing from  the point of the Coracoid Procefs
                                        Y                                   CO I 
 l'-io                           OF  THE JOINTS.
   (f) ;  while its  longer head (i) is feen coming out round and fmall from the cavity
   of the joint:  The  flefh of the Coraco-brachialis (72.)  is feen  black,  and lying
   in (hadow behind the two heads of the biceps.   The two  heads of the biceps are
   not joined to each other till they pafs  the middle of  the arm, *. e.  below  the point
   where (78.J the number of the biceps is placed.
Ladly, The chief point in this drawing is the Burfa  Mucofa marked (m) ; which lies on
   the outfide of the Capfular Ligament of the joint;  it is very large, and is furround-
   ed by  many fmaller ones. This is fufficient to explain  the  appearance of  a Burfa
   Mucofa;  the ufe of this great one,  lying betwixt the Capfule  of  the  joint and
   the Acromion Procefs is  eafily conceived,  and the nature of  the fmaller ones  lying
   under the point of  the  Coracoid Procefs, and under each of  the tendons,  as of the
   Teres Major, Latiflimus Dorfi, &c need hardly be  explained *►


                             FIGURE    IV.

xLXplains the Elbow-joint; and alfo fhows the Wrid,  but imperfedly.
The  three bones which form the Elbow-joint  are,  the Humerus (a) ; the Radius (F) ;
   and the Ulna (c).   They are all conneded  with  each other by the general Capfule
   or  bag  of the joint (d),  which  is derived  from the  Periodeum,  coming  off
   from the fhoulder bone  above thofe hollows which receive  the Olecranon and  Co-
   ronoid Procefles ; which is in'itfelf thin, and delicate,  but  is eroded by lateral and
   Tranfverfe  Ligaments,,  fo that  it does not  appear  like a didind bag ; and therefore
   the chief demondration is of the bands, which  go acrofs the Capfular Ligament tc*
   ftrengthen it in various  diredions.
1. The Coronary Ligament of the Radius is not, as might  be fuppofed, any didind
   ligament, but merely a particular form of  that  part of the General Capfule.
                                                                              The
  * This is the Burfa which I had feen diftended with a  prodigious  quantity of glairy fluid, and
producing a tumor upon the fhoulder.,  Vid. Book upon the Joints, page 431, 
                           BOOK THIRD, PLATE  FIRST.                     fjl
The Coronary Ligament (e) is juft that part of the General Capfule, which belongs
    to the head of the Radius.   In attaching itfelf to the  neck of the Radius, it feems
    a little radiated or purfed up at the root (d) ;  a little higher as at (<?), where it goes
    over  the  plain button-like head of the Radius,  it is  braced very firm ; it  is in-
    deed  hard and Cartilaginous*  particularly hard  and  fmooth within ;  and at  this
    point, it  is efpecially ftrengthened by tw© Acceffory Ligaments ; the  one  (tn)t
    named the Anterior Accessory  Ligament, is hardly to  be diftinguifhed from
    the fore-part of the General Capfule, which is irregular  and very lax.  This Ac-
    ceffory Ligament is almod mixed with the lower part of the Capfular Ligament 5
    being in  fad  but a dronger band of the  general Capfule,  the  Capfule  being
    ftretched over the  point of  the  Coronoid Procefs  of the Ulna.   But there  is
    another ftrengthening of the Capfule, which forms a more diftind and dronger
    Acceffory Ligament for the  Coronary Ligament of the Radius: This  Acceffory
    ring  of Ligament is  marked  (n),  and rifes from the  fharp edge of the Coronary
    Procefs of the Ulna.
 And  ladly*  the two Internal  Lateral Ligaments,  or  the ftrengthenings  of the
    Capfule  by flips of Ligament, which come from the Condyle are marked (0 0).
    There are generally two as here reprefented; but fometimes they are united into one
    larger Ligament.  Thefe two fmall but ftrong  flips of ligament go from  the inner
    Condyle of the Os  Humeri  to the root of the Coronoid  Procefs* where it  rifes
     from the body of the Ulna.
 The Inter-osseus Ligament, which paffes betwixt the  Radius and Ulna, is marked
    (p) ; its ftringy fibres  are fee», and alfo the holes by which arteries and veins pafs
    from the fore to the back parts of the fore arm.  One particular flip of ligament
    marked  (q), is  named Chorda Transversalis Cubiti ;  and is always found of
    this form,  ftretching from the Radius below its Tubercle,  to the Coronoid Procefs
    of the Ulna.
 Ju the lower part of the fame drawing,  we have the wrid-joint,  where (r) marks  the
                                     y %                                Scaphoid 
  I72                            OF  THE  JOINTS.
    Scaphoid Cavity of the Radius (s).  The moveable Cartilage,  fmall and Triangular,
    which reprefents the head of the Ulna in this joint (t), points out the oval form of
    this cavity by circumfcribing it;  (u) fhows the  round head of the Os Scaphoides ;
    (v) (hows  a fimilar  round Articulating Surface of the Os Lunare ; and it is here
    feen, that thefe two  are the chief  bones on the part  of  the Carpus, and that they
    form together an oval head, which, correfponding  with the oval form of the Sca-
    phoid Cavity of  the Radius (r), makes  the wrift-joint a regular hinge, not capable
    of  lateral motions.
The Capfule of  the wrift which inclofes thefe bones, to form them into a joint, is feen
    here with its cut edges marked (t) ; for  the lines from (t)  ferve at once  to circura-
    fcribe the joint,  explaining its oval form, and to mark the cut  edges of its Capfule,
    (x) Marks  the  crofs Ligament of the wrift which binds the tendons down into the
   deep hollow, which is reprefented here; and (103.) marks the  Abdudor Pollicis..
PLATE 
 
J OFXES
LyE  II
Tiibtislu-.l t\r,L.mjm<m i/f^.,./V(' /
IBeiMjo Jaulft 
*<00K THIRD,  PLATE SECOND.
*73
PLATE      II.
This Plate explains the Text Book, from Page 2$$, to Page 452.
 1 HE two firft figures of  this plate  explain the Hip-joint;  of which  the
    chief  parts  are  the focket, the head of the bone, the Capfule, and the
    Central Ligament of the joint.

r 1 '
 JL HE Os Ilium is marked (a) ; the wrift or fpine of the Ilium is marked (b) ; the
   Pofterior Spinous  Proceffes of the Ilium (c) ; the  Anterior  Spinous Procefles are
   marked (d) ;  the Spinous Procefs of the Ischium,- is  marked (e) ; and the Tuberofi-
   ty of the Ifchium, the loweft point of the Pelvis, upon which we fit,.is marked (J) ;
   the Ramus or leg  of the  Ifchium, joining the leg of  the Pubis,  is marked (g) ; the
   Thyroid hole  (h);  the  Symphifis Pubis  (i); and  the  creft  of the  Pubis (&) ;
   the fhaft of the thigh bone is marked (/) ; the great Trochanter is marked (m);
   and the head of the bone is marked (7.)
The parts of the joint  are marked with numbers, thus,
(1..; Is the bony margin of the  Socket where it is formed by the Tuberofity of the Os
   Ifchium ; there the focket is very deep.
(2.) The Cartilage which encircles the brim of the focket,  making, it ftill deeper and
   more  fecure.
(3.) A part of the circle of  the focket oppofite to the Thyroid hole, where the focket
            2                                                                  is 
  174                          0F TlIE JOINTS.
    is exceedingly fhalluw, or where rather the bony margin of the focket is wanting,
    and its place is fupplied by a Ligamentous fubftance.
 (4.)  Is the Capfular Ligament of the hip, which is the fti-ongeft in all the body.  The
    thick cut edges of the Burfal Ligament are feen here ;  and the  ligament is feen to
    come off at (//),  from the Cartilaginous  borders of the Acetabulum,  being truely
    (as it is explained in the defcription of this joint)  a continuation of the Perichondri-
    um, or membraneous covering of the Cartilage,  confifting of two Cancell'ee, one of
    which comes from the Internal Surface of the Socket, while the other comes  from
    the outer furface of the bone* and both of them are condenfed into the Burfal Li-
    gament.
 (5.)  Is a ftrengthening  of the General Capfule, or what may  be called the Acceffory
    Ligament, coming down from that little Bump which is named the Inferior  An-
    terior Spinous  Process of the  Os Ilium ;  and this Acceffory  Ligament is bed
    feen in figure ii. where  the Capfule is preferved  entire*  chiefly for the purpofe of
    fhowing this ftrengthening or fupplementary band*
 (6.) Is the Central  Ligament, which is commonly called the round ligament* though
    it is truely of a Triangular form; rifing by a broader bafis at (6.) from the center
    of the focket,  and  implanted  fmall, neat,  and round into  that dimple which 13
    feen in the drawings  of  the thigh bone,  in the very center of its globular head ;
    indeed the dimple  made by the infertion of this ligament is well feen here at (7.)
 (8.)  In the deep part  of  the focket, where this figure is placed* we fee dimples irregu-
    larly hollow, which  are  the beds for lodging the Mucous Ducts of the joint,  or
    what has  been called, though not truely, the Synovial Gland ; and at thefe hollows
    there  are Frenulae* or little tongues  of the inner membrane of  the  focket, which
    hold thefe Mucous Duds in their place ; there  are alfo  little Frenulae  round the
    neck of the bone, efpecially at its root, which condud the  Mucous Duds, which
    lie there.
Thefe are the Frenulse*  or little ligaments, which I  meant to enumerate  in page  440;
                                                                              by 
                           BOOK THIRD, PLATE SECOND.                     17-
     by faying " that there are two Internal Ligaments belonging to this  joint,  viz. the
     " great  Internal Central, or  round ligament as it is  called, and thefe  fmaller
     " Mucous Ligaments."
 (9.) Is the  root of  the  Burfal  Ligament, for  it embraces  not  merely the head, but
     alfo the neck of the bone; and it is here explained how the Periofteum (0), which
     is feen torn up from  the fhaft of  the thigh bone, goes off from the bone at (g), m
     the form of Burfal Ligament, fo that the  Burfal Ligament and the Periofteum are
    continuous, being different modifications of one membrane,


                     FIGURES    III.   and  IV.

 jt\RE drawings of the  outfide  of the knee-joint, for explaining  the General Capfule
    of the joint, and efpecially for explaining the drengthenings of the Capfule, which
    are known by  the  names  of Lateral and Poderior Ligaments.

Figure III.  (hows  the inner  fide of  the knee-joint, with the great Internal  Lateral
    Ligament,  (a) Marks the thigh  bone ;   (b)  the Tibia, and  the  letter is  placed
    upon that bump,  which receives the tendon of all the Extenfor Mufcles;  (c) the
    Patella appearing through the  tendinous expanfions which cover all the joint.
There is left here a part of the flefhy belly of the Vaflus  Internus Mufcle (1J4.). This-
   belly expands into the form of a thin tendinous fafcia, which goes over the common
   Capfule of the joint  at (d), to drengthen it.   It is at (e),  that the broad tendon of
   the Vadus Internus is inferted into the Patella ; and (f) is the drong  Ligament of
   the Patella, wdiich comes down from the  pointed lower end of the Patella, which
   though  it is called Ligament, is merely the  thick and tough  tendon  by  which all
   the mufcles, which extend the  leg, as the Rectus, Vasti, and Crur^eus, are fixed
   into the knob (b)> upon the head of the  Tibia,  (g)  Marks  that margin of  the
   head of the Tibia upon which  the Semi-lunar Cartilage plays>  and this (harp edge
                                                                               is- 
  I76                          OF THE JOINTS.
    is feen here fhining through the Capfule of the joint,  (z) Marks the Capfule of the
    joint itfelf,  thin and delicate at this point (by the fide of the Patella),  [k) Marks the
    great Internal Lateral Ligament,  which is fometimes named Ligamentum
    Latum Internum,  from its great breadth.  It is not merely a drengthening of the
    common Capfule,  as the Lateral Ligaments of the elbow-joint are, but is a firm and
    didind ligament,  bright  and glidening with filvery lights upon it like mother of
    pearl, of full three inches in length,  very regular and formal, of a triangular fhape,
    rifing by a broad bafis  from the inner  Condyle of the thigh bone, inferted by  a
    fmaller and more pointed end into the head of the Tibia ; and flretching down the
    bone, fo as  to mix gradually with the  Periodeum, and with the General Fafciae or
    Tendinous Expanfions,  which go out over the fore parts of the Tibia.  And that it
    may be underdood, how little this Ligament is conneded with the Capfule,  and how
    fairly it is  entitled  to  the  name of Lateral Ligament, I have  diffeded it fo as to
    thrud a piece of Bougie (/),  under the middle of the ligament,  where it paffes over
    the middle  of the Capfule.   Behind  this at (m), there is a band of ligament lying,
    and in the diredion of the greater ligament, which might almod be named as  a leffer
    Internal  Lateral Ligament, but  which is defcribed  only as a ftrengthening of the
    greater one.

Figure IV. at  the fame time that  it explains the Pofterior  Ligaments, reprefents alfo
    the  Lateral  Ligaments on the outer  fide of  the joint,  (a) Marks the thigh bone ;
    (b) the Tibia;  (n)  the  Fibula;  (i) the Burfal Ligament of the joint,  fo  cut as
    to expofe the inner Condyle of the thigh bone, naked and Aiming.
This  Burfal Ligament is ftrengthened every where behind, by irregular ftrings of li-
    gament pafling over it in  all  diredions, but chiefly oblique,  and one of thefe  ob-
    lique Fafciculi or bands is generally fo very ftrong,  as  to deferve the name of Liga-
    mentum  Pofticum.  So  I have  marked the irregular Fafciculi  (0),  and  I have
    marked the  more formal Ligament the Ligamentum Podicum Winflowii (p).
                                                                             The 
                         BOOK THIRD, PLATE SECOND.                    177
The'great Lateral Ligament on the outer fide of the knee-joint is marked (q).  It is
   here feen,  that the  External Lateral Ligament is not fo fiat as  the Internal
   one, that it  does not lie fo fairly as the Internal one upon the fide of the joint, but that
   it  inclines  a little  towards the back part;  and it  is feen in the drawing as I
   have explained it in the book, that the proper External  Ligament, the Ligamentum
   Laterale Externum Longum (q), is a large and drong ligament, proceeding from
   the outer  Condyle of the  thigh  bone, and fixed  into the head of the  Fibula; but
   that the Ligamentum Externum Laterale Brevius vel Minus (r), has not  the
   true form  of a Lateral  Ligament coming down from the Condyle, but is a mere
   ftrengthening or outward band of the Capfule, rifing upwards from the knob of the
   Fibula.
So that in thefe two  drawings, iii.  and  iv. are feen, all the chief parts on the outfide
   of the knee-joint.
z. The bones as,  (a)  the  thigh  bone;  (b) the Tibia; (c) the  Rotula or Patella;
    (m) the Fibula ;  and (f)  the ftrong Ligament  of the Patella, a part  which is pro-
    perly arranged with  the bones.
2. There is the  Capfule and parts conneded with  it, as (i) the thin membrane of the
    Capfule itfelf;  (d) the Fafcia or expanding tendon of the Vaftus Internus fpreading
    over it, to ftrengthen it.
3. The Lateral  and Pofterior  Ligaments, as (&)  the Internal Lateral Ligament,
    flat, ftrong,  and almoft triangular ; with a fmall ligament (s) to ftrengthen it;  (q)
    the great External Lateral Ligament rounder and more oblique ;  which (in its
    turn alfo)  is ftrengthened by a fmaller ligament (r).   And Ladly, the drengthen-
    ings on the  back  part  of  the joint, which  are  irregular at  (0), and which  form
    fometimes  a more  regular  Ligament at (/>), the Ligamentum Posticum  Wins-
    lowii.
This Anatomy of the knee-joint is continued in the two firft figures  of next plate.

                                        Z                           PLATE 
 
 
IOLXTS
FL. m.
^.w
Published rirr toTujnuai %:Rtcs,l&04- - 
BOOK THIRD, PLATE THIRD.
m
PLATE     III.
This Plat* explains the Text Book, from Page 443, to Page 45 a.
1HE Anatomy of the knee-joint is  continued in this plate.  It explains
   the internal parts, the  knowledge of which is more  valuable than  of
   the external  parts,  in  proportion  as  internal difeafes of this joint are
   more frequent than  luxations, which never happen except in thofe ter-
   rible injuries,  where all  the  foft parts belonging to the joint, are en-
   tirely torn up by  the roots, fo that the limb cannot be  faved.  The
   chief parts  to  be  obferved within the joint are the fat, and Mucous
   Membranes,  which  lubricate the  joint,  the Ligaments  or Frenulae,
   which order and regulate the motions of thefe fatty mafies and fringes.,
   the Semi-lunar Cartilages  which,  like  friction-wheels  facilitate the
   motions  of the joint;  and  Laftly,  the great  Crucial Ligaments by
   which the joint is ftrengthened within, the  Crucial  Ligaments alone
   being  ftronger  than the  whole of thofe  Ligaments which are to be
   feen  on the  outfide of the joint.

                               1.  The Fat.

JL HE fat which is for lubricating the knee-joint, though it is not entirely confined to
  the circle of the Patella, yet it chiefly  furrounds it * and with the  fat there are
                                   Z 2                            many 
 1-Sj                           OF THE  JOINTS.


   many fringes of the Mucous Duds; much fat is found at each fide of the  Pate if*

   at (a a), but the chief colledion is at the lower part of the Patella.  At (b) figure  i.

   this fit appears peeping  out  from under  that ligament, by which  its motions are

   regulated ; but at (b) in figure  ii.  the ligament  is cut away,  and all  the fat  is

   treejy ieen.

This cclledion of fat and Mucous Duds makes a rifing upon each fide of the Pateila,

   marked  with a deep, and fmooth  fulcus  round the edge of the  bone; and this

   hanging of the fat on each fide  of the Patella, is named by Weidbright the Liga-

   mentum Alare Majus, where it hangs in the inner fide of the Rotula  ; and Ligamen-

   tum Alare Minus, where it  projeds lefs  at the outfide  of  the  Rotula; (Vid. (a a)

   figure i.) But all this is quite arbitrary; thefe are not ligaments, nor do they  tie any

   other part;  they  are  but loofer foldings of the inner coat of  the Capfule, where  it

   rifes over the inner furface of the Patella,  and where it holds larger globes of far,

   or  conduds the fringes of the Mucous Follicules.




                           2.  The Mucous Ligament.


Thefe bundles of fat  are  tied by a true  ligament (c)y which properly belongs to them*.

   But to  underftand this ligament  and its  names, it muft be obferved, that the two

   Lunar  Cartilages are  moveable ;. that the two horns of the Lunar Cartilages are

   tacked together~by a little Tranfverfe Ligament;  and that this Tranfverfe Ligament

   is again conneded with the little  mafs of fat, which lies under the  lower border of
                                         /
  .' the Patella ;  and laftly, it is to be remembered,  that  thefe fatty bundles are chiefly

   intended for conduding and defending the  Mucous Duds or fringes.  Now the li-

   gament  (c) figure i.  which regulates at once the pofitions of all thefe  parts in the

   various  motsons of the joints, has been  named  " Ligamentum Mucofum," by Ve-

   falius, he referring it to the Mucous Membrane; it is  named " the Ligament moving

■•■:  the Semi-lunar Cartilages" by Cheflelden; it  is named,  "Ligamentum Internum

                                                                "-  Longitudinak," 
                             BOOK THIRD,  PLATE THIRD.                      i8l
     •'  Longitndinale" by Walther, becaufe cf its running down exadly in  the middle
     of the joint; it  is named not unfrequently " Ligamentum Gracile," from its delica-
     cy. Weidbright  feems to call it  (in  one place at leaft) " Frenulum Pinguedinis
     "  Glaudulofae;" and he  concludes with  a queftion, whether this in place of bein^
     a diftinct Ligament be not rather a continuation of his two  Aliform Ligaments.
 But the nature of this ligament is very diftind.   It is a regular ligament of a  very con-
     ftant form,  and having very curious ufes ; it is a ligament tolerably thick,  but cf a
     foft and  membranous nature.  It is fmall and pointed above  as at (d), where it rifes
   ■  from the  interftice betwixt  the two condyles  of the thigh bone ;  it gradually broad-
     ens downwards,  fo  as to acquire rather a triangular form, terminating by a broad
     bafe near the root of the patella at (e e).  It lies in the fore part, or rather perhaps
     in  the centre of the joint in the middle behind the patella, and before the Crucial
     Ligaments.   Its bafis fpreads out into two limbs (e e) ; one going to the ri<dit fide
     and the  other to the  left, and this forking of it is named by Walther Ligamen-
     tum Transversum Semicirculare * ; calling the upper and  fmaller part  of this li-
     gament the  Longitudinal Ligament; while he names  the bafis and broader part of
     the  ligament the Tranfverfe Ligament, and it is  under this root or tranfverfe part
     of the mucous ligament that the fat which it confines is feen peeping out at (b).
 This ligament then,  (which in  place of dividing  thus curioufly into Longitudinal and
     Tranfverfe or Alar  ligaments, may bo defcribed under the general title of Mucous
    Ligament), is of confiderable fize, being almoft of the thicknefs of the littl? finger, and
    is the part  that is feen when the joint is fird opened ; not firm and hard like thofe
    ligaments  which tie the bones, but foft, delicate, and membranous, fit for its office of
    conduding the mucous duds in fafety, and regulating the motions of the fatty bun-
    dles.  It is fmall at (d), where it comes off from the great Sulcus betwixt the con-
                                                                             dyles.
  *' So Walther names as Tranfverfe Ligament thofe parts which Weidbright marks by the names.of
Ligamentum Alare Majus and Minus. 
l82                           OF THE  JOINTS.
  dyles.  It grows broad at its root, being there fo large as to fill up all the  empty
  fpace in the joint.   It aflumes at  its lower  part a triangular or prifmatic form, with
  one flat fide diredly forwards, and the other angle of the prifm looking backwards in
  the joint, and covering the crucial ligaments which lie in the back part of the cavi-
  ty.   After enlarging  at  its  bafis,  it  degenerates  into  a  foft  mucous  or mem-
  branous covering for  the fat and mucous glands ; thus it is conneded at  its root
  with the lower edge of the  patella;  with the fat and mucous  fringes,  and with the
  fore horns of the Semilunar Cartilages.  So that this ligament moves in every mo-
   tion of the joint,  as the thigh-bone from which  it rifes moves, it is moved the more
   from  its connedion with the patella,  and  as  this ligament moves along with the
   patella, it in its  turn moves the Semilunar Cartilages  and the bundles of fat,  and
   keeps them fixed, or draws them  forwards; for were the fat permitted to move back-
   wards, it would be bruifed diredly betwixt the bones with a force that would deflroy
   it; and thus the mucous  duds  not  only by the elafticity of the fat which furrounds
   them, dart out from betwixt the bones when they prefs too clofely ; but the fat toge-
   ther with all the glands which belong to it is  fo held forward by  this mucous liga-
   ment as to lie always in the free and open part  of the joint.
This ligament  was  thought by the ancients to  be fometimes  wanting, though this
   cannot  be true of a part fo effential to the  found conftitution and  free  motions  of
   the  joint.  It  is  believed  by   fome,  that it may be torn  in  fudden and violent
   bendings of the knee ;  it furely is the part the moft fubjed to difeafe, fince we find it
   in ulcerated joints quite coroded.  It is plain that this part muft be moft peculiarly
   fubjed to inflame, fince it is continually working in every motion of the joint; it is
   not only delicate in itfelf, but is conneded with all the more delicate parts ; for the in-
   ner  membrane of the capfule is continuous with this Mucous Ligament; the fat that
   furrounds the patella is continuous with it; it conduds the fringes or duds of  the chief
   mucous glands; it is itfelf a fecreting  furface, and the  moveable or Semilunar Carti-
                                                                             lages 
                           BOOK THIRD, PLATE THIRD.                      183
    lages are tied to it; by all which circumftances it becomes too important in the oe-
    conomy and difeafes of this delicate joint to be paffed flightly over.

                         3.   The Moveable Cartilages.

The two Moveable Cartilages are not feen in Fig. 1. becaufe the  mucous ligament
    which covers them is entire.  In Fig. ii. they are marked (m m).  The letters (m m)
    touch the outer edges of the cartilages, where their outer margins adhere to the inner
    furface of the capfule.
The parts and connexions of thefe cartilages are better explained in Fig. iii. where (m ?n)
    ftill mark the outer circles which adhere to the inner furface of the capfule.  The
    letters (n n) mark the thinner edges, and fhow the fpace in the center of each cartilage
    which holds the condyle of the thigh-bone,   (pp) Mark the two pofterior horns and
    the little tags of ligament by which they are tied to the crucial ligaments behind. And
    (q q) mark the two anterior horns, and the little tags of ligament by which they are
    tied to the root of the mucous ligament before.  And (r)  marks  a little crofs liga-
    ment by which the two anterior horns are conneded with each other, and which is
    named Ligamentum Transversale Commune.

                            4.  The Crucial Ligaments

Are well feen in Fig. ii. where (c) marks the part from which the pointed origin of the
    mucous ligament was cut away.  And by cutting away that ligament, the Crucial Li.
    gaments which, in Fig. i. are  covered by the mucous or central  ligaments, are in this
    drawing brought into view
The Crucial Ligaments lie both in the back part of the joint, and touch that part of the
    Capfule, which  lies in  the Ham; but one of them  (s) lies  behind, whence it is
    called the Pofterior Ligament, and the other (t) though it lies flat upon the Poderior
                                                                        Ligament, 
  184                            OT  THE  JOINTS.





    Ligament, and in contad with it; yet being before it, is named the Anterior Liga-



    ment.



The reafon  of this Anterior Ligament being reprefented as coming fo far forwards as



    to touch in a manner the root of the Patella, is plainly this ; that to take a fure hold of



    the Tibia  it does adually rife over  the tubercle in the center of the joint, and" goes



    out flat over all the face of the joint, and the reafon of the  Pofterior Ligament feeming



    to follow this  one, and to come alfo far forwards in the joint, is, that the ligaments



    of the horns of the Lunar Cartilages climb upon the fore-part of the Pofterior Liga-



    ment, and fo  it is more properly the Ligament of the Lunar Cartilage that is feen



    at (V), while  the head only of the  Pofterior Crucial Ligament  is feen at (s).----



    But both the true diredion and extent of thefe ligaments and their true office will be



    better underftood by the  following plan ; for there is this one thing very fingular in



    the effed of thefe ligaments, that it  is not the Pofterior Ligament that checks the leg



    and prevents  it going too far  forwards ; nor the Anterior Ligament that prevents



    it being drained backwards,but quite the reverfe ;  for the Poderior Ligament is moft



    ftretched when the knee  is bended ; the Anterior  Ligament again is ftretched when



    the leg is extended.







Figure I. Shows the leg extended.



Figure II. Shows the knee bent.







In Figure ift,  (a) is the Thigh-bone ; (b) the Inner Condyle ; (c)  the  Outer  Condyle ;



    (d) the head of the Tibia ;  (e) the  knob in the center of the Knee-joint;  and (1) is



    the Anterior Ligament arifing from the Outer Condyle,  (viz. the one neared the eye



    in this drawing), and going out over the fore-part of the Tibia, and inferted properly



    into that hollow (J"),  which receives the Condyle; (2) is the Poderior Ligament,



    rifing  rather  from the center of the Thigh-bone betwixt the Condyles,  and going



   down over  the back-part of the Tibia at (_g).



                                                                2            And 
BOOK THIRD,  PJ.ATI THIRD,
**$
And in figure ii. it is  plain by the change of the pofition of the bones, that when the
   knee  is bent,  the  Pofterior Ligament (2.) is ftretched, and the Anterior (1.) re-
   laxed.  And of courfe, as in figure i.  that when  the leg is extended, the Anterior
   Ligament (1.) will be ftretched, and the Pofterior (2.) relaxed.
A a
In
?t Art
J'lQ.4
/             "      y
 
  185                            OF THE  JOTNIS.
 In thefe three drawings,  all the internal parts of the knee-joint are explained.
 i. The Fat which is colleded chiefly round the  Patella, which perhaps  does not exude
    nor mix with the fluid of  the  joint, but ferves rather. by its Lubricity and Elaftic
    nature, to condud and defend the fringes or Mucous Duds.
 2. The Mucous Ligament, which is the  firft part that is feen upon opening the joint;
    which lies  in  the center of the  joint; is of a foft and  mucous nature ;  conduds
    many of the Mucous  Fringes;  and  which, defcending from the middle of the thigh
    bone betwixt the Condyles, is attached to the lower edge  of the  Patella, and to
    the Semi-lunar Ligaments, and fo it moves  along  with the Patella, and moves  in
    its  turn the Cartilages  and the fat.  It regulates the motions  of the  Cartilages,
    and it draws forwards the fat,  preventing it going  backwards,  fo as to be bruifed
    betwixt  the bones.
3. The Semi-lunar  Cartilages,  which are like the  labels  which are put round  the
   neck of a wine flafk.  They are  tied  at the horns by  ligaments, as  the  label is
   hung by its chain ; lie flat upon the  Tibia, to facilitate its motions, and enable,
    at  the fame  time,  the Condyles of  the thigh bone to change their centers   of
    motion,  according to  the various poftures of the joint.
4. The Cross Ligaments, which are  very thick, and ftrong, lie chiefly  in the back
   part of the joint,  and by their going the one over the face of  the Tibia,  and  the
   other  down  along the back of the bone,  they limit both its motions,  the one
   checking it in too violent bendings of the knee, the other limiting its extenfions.
   So  that the motions forwards and backwards  are limited by thefe Crofs Ligaments
   within the joint,  while it is fecured from irregular Lateral motions  by the ftrong
   Lateral Ligaments without.
                                                                FIGURES 
TOOK THIRD,
PuATE.THIRD.
v87
                      FIGURES   IV.   and   V.

JLLXplain the Ligaments of the  ancle joint, and of the foot. All the great Ligaments
   belonging to the ancle joint, or to the Tarfa! Bones are drawn in figure iv. and in
   figure V. are feen  the two great ligaments lying in the fole of the foot.


                             FIGURE     IV.

 JL HE Ligaments belonging to the ancle joint are thefer
(i.)  A ftrong Ligament tying the Fibula to-the Tibia.  It is large and very ftrong ;
   commonly it is divided, as here, into two, fometimes into three flips ;'fometimes they
   all adhere.   It  is named the  Ligamentum Anticum  Superius.   There is on the
   back part of the Fibula a ligamentous membrane,,, which is like this one, and is nam-
   ed Ligamentum Fibulae Pofticum Superius.
Thefe ligaments conned the Tibia and Fibula fo firmly to each other, that they are as
   one bone with two proceffes, viz.  the inner and outer ancles.
(2.)  Is the Middle Perpendicular Ligament,  a very  ftrong ligament, which de-
   fcends  diredly from the point of the outer ancle, to tie it firmly to  the fide of
   the Os  Calcis.   There  are three  ligaments tying the  outer ancle to the foot;
   viz. firft, this middle one;  fecond, the anterior  one;  and, third, one behind the
   joint, a pofterior ligament,  which is not  feen.   This  Middle Perpendicular Liga-
   ment, fo named  from its pofition, defcends diredly from the very point of  the
   outer ancle,  and it is implanted into the  fide of  the heel bone.   It holds  the  an-
   cle from yielding to  one fide, and from bending too much ; affifting  rather the  pof-
   terior ligament than the anterior one.  It lies clofe upon the Capfule, and drength-
   ens it; while the tendons of the Peronaei Mufcles glide and rub acrofs it.
                                     A a 2                             (3.)  The 
  ■!3h                           <*? THE JOINTS.
'(3.) The Anterior Ligament of the  outer ancle is for tying  the outer ancle to  the
    Aftragalus, as the perpendicular one ties it to the heel bone.   It goes fometimes in
    two diftind bands, as reprefented here.  Very often they are fcarcely divided; it ap-
    pearing as one ftrong uniform ligament, white and gliftening, pafljng obliquely for-
    wards from the loweft point of the Fibula te the neck of the Aftragalus.
 Thefe three are the chief ligaments of the ancle;  and the order of ligaments which come
    next, is of thofe which tie the Aftragalus to the Os Calcis and to  the Os Navicu-
    lare.
 ift, (a) Is a  ligament,  or rather two or  three ligaments, which crofs the great hole,
    which, in the drawings of the bones of the Tarfus, is marked with a  pencil thruft
    up through it.   This is called the Cavitas Sinuofa; and fo thefe irregular ligaments
    are named Ligamenta, or Aparatus LrGAMENTosus Cavitatis  Sinuosje.  They
    are merely irregular ligaments, lying  deep in this hollow, and tying the Aftragalus
    to the Os  Calcis.
 2d, (b)  Is a ligament which  ties the Aftragalus to the Os Naviculare.  It begins at the
    neck of the Aftragalus ; touches the Os Naviculare; goes ftill forwards, and fpreads
    a little upon the cuneiform "bones ; and, from this expanding form, is named Liga-
    mentum Latum.  Though  there are  feveral bands of ligament on the inner fide,
    they are not fo particular, nor To formal in their (hapes or ufes, as to  have any ap-
    propriated name.
 $d> (0  There are ligaments  tying the Os  Calcis, In its turn, to the Os Naviculare and
    to the Os  Cuboides.  The letter (c) is placed upon that prominent point of the Os
    Calcis  whence thofe ligaments  go off; and they go  fomewhat in a ftar-like form,
    juft as I have drawn them, and not very diftind.  And thofe bands which go up-
    wards tie the Os Calcis to theOs Naviculare 4—thofe which go downwards tie it to
    the Os Cuboides i for the chief articulation of the heel-bone is with  the  Os Cu-
    boides.
 ,*th, (d) There goes a little flip of ligament, not much noticed from this fame  point of
                                                                              the 
                          BOOK THIRD,  PLATE THIRD.                      189
   the heel-bone, to that part (*) of the metatarfal bone of the little toe, which is very
   {harp and prominent; and is in all pofitions and drawings the moft remarkable point
   in the  foot.
The  ligaments  again, which tie the feveral bones of the Tarfus, as the cuboid and cu-
   neiform bones, together, are flat, fhining, ftar-like,  and very numerous; and, from
   their lying -upon the back of the foot,  are named Ligamenta Plana Dorsalia.
   They are marked (rrr) ; and are too irregular in their form, and too general in their
   ufes, to need any more accurate indication; for thefe are the ligaments  which are
   fo croffed and interwoven,  " that they  form what we  may call a web  of liga-
   ■" ments, confifting of fhining and ftar-like bundles," of a cartilaginous hardnefs, ad-
   hering clofely to the whole furface,. and  pafling from bone to bone over all the fur»
   face of the foot,  (t) Is  the Ligamentum Longum,  which is marked 3.  in the 5th
   drawing, and is explained in the letter prefs of that figure.
The ligaments  which tie  together the Tarfus and Metatarfus are alfo feen here, at the
   roots of the metatarfal bones.  There are^lateral ligaments which tie each metatarfal
   bone to the one next It.  But the ligaments which  appear  chiefly upon this upper
    furface, are a continuation of the irregular web of ligament belonging to the Tarfal
   bones; and as this web takes particular fliapes in pafling along to the feveral heads
    of the Metatarfal bones, thefe are beft named, in general terms, Ligamenta Dorsa-
   Sja  the Dorfal Ligaments of -the Metatarfal bones; and they are marked (sm).


                          In    F  I  G TJ R E    V.

THE Ancle joint is feen opened.  The Tibia and Fibula (a & 1)  are  turned back-
   wards.   Their  ftrong ligament (c), which binds them together, is  feen;  the Cap-
   fule, which is clean diffttfed, is marked (d),  which (hows its cut edges.  ■(*) Shows
                                                                              that 
  It)©                           QV  the JOINTS.




    Lhat it is a refledion of the Capfule that lines the cavity of the joint; and the proce-:



    (f) of the outer ancle being turned back, the great head, or the cartilaginous pulley



    of the Aftragalus (g), is expofed covered  with its fmooth  cartilage.-  The flat fide



    of the Aftragalus  within the joint is alfo feen at (h)} where it was embraced by the



    inner  ancle  or  procefs of the Tibia (f).   There is but one  ligament  to be  noti-



    ced in this drawing ;  for



 ift,  Is a  band  very  ftrong indeed,  which paffes  from the Aftragalus to the Os Cal-



    cis.  It  has, as is feen here, the diftind  form of a ligament.  It ties the Aftra-



    galus and Os Calcis ftrongly together; and fo  it has alfo  the office as  well as the



    mere form of a ligament.  But it often happens, that the tendon of the Flexor Polli-



    cis runs  through this ring ;  therefore its office as a ligament (which it truly is) is ve-



    ry little  noticed.



 id, There is a ligament  of the inner ancle,  like the perpendicular ligament of the outer



    ancle,   It is of a  triangular form ;  and is  hence named Ligamentum Deltoides.  A



   procefs of this ligament binds down the Tendons of the Tibialis Pofticus,  and of the



   common flexor of  the toes.  Therefore the ligament marked (2), at the fame  time



   that it binds the bones of the foot together,. holds down the flexor tendons.



3d, The figure (3) marks the great ligament of the fole of the foot.  It proceeds fmal-



   ler from the  point of  the heel bone ; it enlarges towards  its infertion into the Os Cu-



   boides.   It  binds thefe two bones particularly;  and,  by binding them, it fupports



   very powerfully the whole arch  of the foot; and this ligament, which is alfo  very



   thick and ftrong, is of fuch particular  length, (the longed ligament of all  the  Tar-



   fus J, that it  is  called Ligamentum Calcis Longius..   It  is feen  under  the  edge



   of the  foot in the drawing, figure iv. marked (t).



But the trueft fupport of any joint is not its  ligaments fo  much as the mufcles- which



   bend it;   and it is  thus with all the flexor mufcles which pafs under this great arch of



   the foot—How could the arch of the foot be fuftained, by ligaments of any kind, under




            a                                                                  the 
                                                                   /
                       EOOK THIRD,  PLATE THIRD.                     I£l
the whole weight of the body, and its exertions ?   Surely it could not be fudained
otherwife than by the drong adion of the Tibialis Podicus and the flexor mufcles of
the toes ;  and when a man flands under  a burden,  as well as when  he walks, this
arch is fubdained by the ccn'Jn-i?.! adion  of thofe mufcles the tendons of which pr.fi
under the arch.
FINIS* 
Ah*
■y.t 
                                                                                                 May  23,  1S0G.
                                            WORKS
Printed  for  LONGMAN,  HURST,  REES,  and  ORME,   Paternoster-Row,
                                  Sinn  thv  Pnbliwtimi'nffttfa *Eiw)utthi*Pm'(m.
I.  A NEW BRITISH THEATRE;  with Biographical and
               Critical Remarks on each Play,
                    By Mrs. Inch bald.
               TO BE PUBLISHED  WEEKLY,
In Royal i8mo.  Price One Shilling,  embellished with a fine En-
  graving;-—or,  Price Two Shillings, elegantly printed on super-
  fine Paper, with a Portrait of the Author,  for each
  Volume, and Proof Impressions of both the Plates.
        Numbers r  to 13, of a new Work,  entitled,

             THK  BRITISH THEATRE;
Or, a Collection of Plays, which are acted at the Theatres
   Royal, Drurt-Lane,  Covent-Garden, and  the  Hay-
   Market.
printed  under  the  authority and  by  fermissisn of the
             MANAGERS, FROM THE PROMPT  BOOKS.
      With Biographical  and Critical Remarks,
                    By Mrs. Inchbald.
   *  * This Work, being intended as a Companion to the Theatres
 of Great Britainand Ireland, will contain every Play, which keeps
 possession of the Stage, including  the best Plays of Colman,
 Cumberland, Holcroft, Inchbald, O'Keeffe, Morton,
 Reynolds, and other modern Authors,  which have  never ap-
 peared in any similar Collection; the Copyright of which has been
 purchased for the express  purpose of introducing them into the
 present  Work.  The whole will be  printed, under the Authority
 6f the Managers, from the Prompter's Copy,  exactly as they are
 performed.
   It is  intended to comprise the Work in Twenty-five  Volumes,
 each containing Five  Plays, and at  its Conclusion will be given
 General Title Pages, together with Directions for arranging the Plays.
 In the Course of Publication will be given, as Frontispieces to the
 Volumes of the Fine Edition,  Portrait* of Authors, generally with
 their Play, that is first brought forward.
   The  Embellishments will be executed in the very best Manner,
 by  the  first  Artists.   The  following  haye  already  produced
 Pictures :                                       fI
   Smcrke,  Stothard,  Thomson,  Westall,  Howard,
 Singleton, Smirke, jun.  Cook, &c. &c — Which are en-
 graving  by  Hea I H, ScHIAVONETir,  Fittleb, Raimbach,
 Mitan, N eagle, Poole, En gleh art, Roth well, Noble,
 Golding, A.  Smith, Warren, &c. &c.
           THE PLAYS ALREADY PUBLISHED ARE*
                                 8. Douglas,
1.  Mountaineers,
x.  Speed the Plough,
3.  Wheel of Fortune',
4.  Lovers' Vows,
5.  Inkle and Yarico,
6.  Isabella,
7.  Wild Oats,
 9-
10.
>3-
14.
Stranger,
Country Girl,
Dramatist,
Hamlet,
Grecian Daughter,
Busy Body.
  II   The  COMPLETE WORKS,  in  PHILOSOPHY, PO-
LITICS, and MORALS, ot DR. BENJAMIN FRANKLIN ;
with Memoirs of his Early Life.
                  Written by Himself.
I» Three large Volumes, Octavo, with Sixteen Engravings, and a
       Portrait of the Author,  Price il. 16s. in Boards.
  The Works of Dr.Franklin have been often partially collected,
but newer before brouf ht together in one uniform Publication.
  In  the present  Volumes will be found all  the  different Col-
lections,  together  with  the  various  Papers  of  the same  An-
Ifcur  that have  bren published  in sepura'e Pamphlets, or in-
serted in Foreign Collections  of  his  Works,  or in the Trans-
lations  of our own, or of Foieign Philosophical  Societies, or in
«ur owt> or  Foreign  Newspapers  and  Mag.isiiics,  as far as dis-
covcrabU *y th«  *&tor> *Uo "*s **«««ssiM«<i inth« Research  by
a Gentleman in America. Among these Papers, some we conceive
will be new to the English Reader on this Side the Atlantic.
                    Also, just published,
  A new and improved Edition, elegantly printed in Two Vols-.
Foolscap 8vo. witha Portrait, Price 8s. Board?,  ot the Life mil
Essays of Benjamin Franklin, LL.D.


  III.  The ANNUAL REVIEW, and HISTOR Yof LITER A-
TURE ; containing a  Critical  Analysis of  all  the Works pu'<-
lished during the Year, arranged in Chapters ccrrcspvynding with
the various Branches of Human  Knowledge, each  of  which  is
preceded by an Historical Introduction.
                (To be continued  annually 1
                    A. Aikin,  Editor.
Vol. IV. for 1805,in Royal Octavo,  Price  1!. is. inextr.T Boards.

  IV.  A HISTORY of IRELAND, from the earlie t Accounts
to the  Accomplishment of the Union with Gre.it  Britain,  :n
l801*           By the Rev. James Gordon,
Author of the History of the Rebellion in  Ireland, and Rector  of
  Killegny, in the Diocese of  Ferns, and of Cannaway, in the
  Diocese of Cork.
          In Two Vols. 8vo. Price  il.  is. in Boards.

            V. FROISSART's CHRONICLES.
        In Demy  Octavo,  Price  il. 16s, in Boards,
  Vols. IV. V. and VI. of the  Second Edition of Sir JOH^T
 FROISSART's  CHRONICLES  of ENGLAND,  FRANCE,
 SPAIN, and the ADJOINING COUNTRIES, from the latter
 Part of the Reign of Edward II. to the Coronation of Hf.nr y IV.
 Newly translated from the French Editions, with Variations and
 Additioas from many celebrated MSS.
              By  Thomas Johnes, Esq.  M. P.
   To which is prefixed, a Life of the Author, an Essa y on his
 Works, a Criticism on his History, and a Dissertation
 on his Poetry.
   *#* The remaining Six  Volumes of the  above Work  will  be
 published with all  Expedition.
   «* Froissart is an historian consulted and  cited by every writer
 whose subject leads him to the period in which he wrote ; he is the
 chief, if not the only authentic  source  of information  we are
 possessed of, with regard to one of the proudest  and most striking
 portions of our national annals. Yet  his antique,  original garb, and
 the yet more uncouth and obsolete dress imposed on him by his
 former translator,  have deterred most general readers from ap-
 proaching him, till Mr. Johnes undertook to present him in a more
 familiar and  agreeable form. We consider it as an undertaking of
 great importance and even of high national interest.
   " The Engravings from old illuminated MSS. which accompany
 the present portion of the work,  are useful, as well  as curious
 ornaments.  As the  authenticity of the sources from which the/
 are taken, cannot be doubted, they  present valuable picture's  of
 the costume of the times."     Critical  Rcvif-.c, March, 1806.

   VI. The ARCHITECTURAL  ANTIQUITIES of GREAT-
  ER IT A FN ; displaying a Series of select Engravings, representing
  the  most beautiful, curious, and interesting Ancient Edirkea of
  this Country ; with an Historical and Descriptive Account of eacht
  Subject.             By John Brjtton.
                      The Fo.uth Part.
  In Medium Quarto, Price 10s.  6d. and  Imperial Quarto, with  first
    Implosions of  the Plates,  Price 16s. (containing  an Essa*
    tc wards a History of SioneCrossvs, embellished with
    Eight  Er^twir.gs, consisting of Views ui Waltham Cro^,
    F: tie ford .-dure ;  Gj.ddi^ctcn,  and  the  Queip's Crcs%
    Northamptonshire, and  sevcv others.) 
i>
  VII.  E NOR A VINT, S, with a descriptive Account, in English
■•id French,  of  EVGPIIAN  MONUMENTS, in ti>.e British
Museum, collected by the Institute in Egypt,  undet  the Direction
of BONAPA'x TE, and surrendered to the British Commander in
Chief, Lord Hutchinson,by General Menou.

             Undei the Patronage of his Majesty.

                   No. 3, Price One Guinea.

   *** In the Number of these Monuments is the celebrated Stone,
uith the Hieroglyphic, Egyptian, and Greek Inscriptions, found at
Rosetta; alsO the magnificent Sarcophagus from Alexandria which
Dr. Clarke, in his elegant Work, entitled " The Tomb of Alexan-
der,1' has evinced, from accumulated Evidence, to have been the
very Coffin in which that Hero was enshrined.
   The  Drawings have been made by  Mr. Alexander, with  all
possible Fidelity, and are engraved by Mr. Medland, in the best
Style of the  Art.
   The whole Collection will be included in about TVelye Numbers,
at a Guinea each • and published at short Intervals.
  VIII. AN INQUIRY into the  STATE of the NATION, at
the Commencement of the present Administration.

««  In hujus  modi re tantoque hello,  maximae curae est, ut qucC
  copiis  et  opibus tenere vix  possumus,  ea  mansuetudine et
  continentia nostra, sociorum fidelitate teneamus."
                                                Cic. Epist.
         The  Fifth Edition, with Additions, Price 5s.
  IX.  MEMOIR  concerning  the COMMERCIAL RELA-
TIONS of the UNITED STATES with ENGLAND.

                By Citizen Talleyrand.

Read at the National Institute, the 15th Germinal, in the Year V.

  To  which  is added,  An  Essay  on the Advantages to be
derived from New Colonies in the existing  Circumstances.  By
the same  Author.  Read at the  Institute, the 15th Messidor, in
the Year V.
                     Octavo, Price 2s. 6d.

  " Independent of the epigrammatic  force and  eloquence of
their style,  and, of their more substantial merits,  as  sound and
ingenious  speculations upon  a subject of  equal  difficulty  and
importance, they cannot fail to  interest  us in their practical
applications.   They  were  the result  of  actual  observation in
countries  where the author had access to the best information, or
was actually engaged  in affairs."   Edinburgh Review, No. XI.
  ^C.  ESSAYS, in  a  SERIES of LETTERS to a FRIEND,
on the following Subjects:
  1. A Man's writing Memoirs of his own Life.
  3. Decision of Character.
  3. The Application of the Epithet, Romantic.
  4. Evangelical Religion,  prevailingly  unacceptable  to Men
of Taste.
              By the Rev. John Foster, Frome.

    The Third Edition, in Two Volumes, nmo. Price 9s.

  «' To declare at once  our opinion of this book, we must say,
that we have seldom  perused any publication with more pleasure.
He  is, on the whole, a  most masterly writer,  perspicuous, acute,
profound and  eloquent.   He appears in every page, the warm
supporter of the best  interests of mankind ; he writes with a degree
of feeling and energy,  which is  highly captivating.  His style is
uncommonly excellent."        Anti-Jacobin Review, Jan. 1806.

  " We are highly gratified when we meet with-a writer,' who, to
a view of profound and original thought, together with just views
of religion  and of morals, joins  the  talent of recommending his
ideas by the graces of imagination, and  the powers of eloquence.
Such a writer we have the happiness of reviewing at present."
                                 Eclectic Rervierwi Nov. 1805.
  XI. OBSERVATIONS on  the  PRESENT STATE of  the
HIGHLANDS of SCOTLAND;  with a  View of the Causes
and probable Consequences of Emigration.
                  By the Earloi' Selkirk.
      The Second Edition, in Octavo, Price 6s. in Boards.
  "We consider Lord Selkirk as having contributed a new article,
very nearly finished in its form, to the general Elements, of Political
Administration; and as  having cast  light  on  one  of the most
intricate  parts  of  the  Science  of Economy, that in which  the
Theory of Wealth and the Theory of  Population  are examined in
connection."                    Edinburgh Review,  No.  XIII.
  " The noble author has here displayed a mind cultivated by
true philosophy, a heart  warmed with generous patriotism,  and  a
temper capable of persevering exertion ; he  has at the  same time
furnished a successful example, in the highest* degree  important
and useful to  his country, and  afforded the public  a volume of
agreeable and improving  information."
                                Eclectic  Review,  April, 1805.


   XII. The PRINCIPLES of SURGERY. Volume the Second,
in Two Parts.  Containing the Operations of Surgery.
                  By  John Bell, Surgeon.
 In Royal Quarto, illustrated by numerous Engravings, Price 5I. 5s.
                          in Boards.
   The Second Volume of this Work, with all ifs Engravings, con-
 tains a Body of Information on the  most interesting  Subjects.  In
 Part First are comprehended the Anatomy of the Parts contained
 within the Pelvis—The Practical  Inferences to be deduced from
 this  Piece of Anatomy—The Biography of the  most  celebrated
 Lithotomists—The Design and  Effects of their various  Operations
 —The modern Operation described—The  various Causes of Ob-
 struction of Urine enumerated and described, with Rules for intro-
 ducing the Catheter, for using Caustic, for operating in  Cases of
 Fistulas, and for the various Operations of Puncture of the Urinary
 Bladder.
   Part Second contains,  1st,  the Anatomy of the  Scull, with the
 Practical  Observations deduced from it by Ancient and Modern
 Authors—The Diseases of the Scull  and  of the Scalp especially
 as affecting the Dura Mater or Brain.—2d. The  Anatomy of the
 Brain itself—The  Circulation  within the  Head described—The
 Irregularities and Disorders of  that Circulation investigated, and
 all  its Diseases and Predispositions to Disease described, as Apo-
 plexy, Palsy, Hydrocephalus, and Phrensy, with  Dissertations
 on the Cause of those Diseases, and "Rules for the Prevention and
 Cure.   3d. The Effects of  Concussion—Extravasation  and De-
 pression  of  the  Scull investigated—The  Operation of  Trepan
 described, and Rules established on broad  and genera  Principles
 of Science, illustrated with a Variety  of Cases and  Observations,
 for the  Conduct of the Surgeon in each Description of Injury of
 the Head.
 Also, in  Royal  Quarto, illustrated by Eighty Engravings, many
            of them accurately coloured from Nature,
                     Brice'4I.4S. in Boards,
 The First  Volume  of the foregoing Work; containing the
    Principles of Surgery, as  they relate to Wounds, Ulcers, and
    Fistulas ; Aneurisms, and Wounded Arteries, Fractures of the
    Limbs, and the Duties of the Military and Hospital  Surgeofi.


    XIII.  SURGICAL OBSERVATIONS;  Part the  Second,
 containing an Account of the Disorders of Health in general, and
. of the  Digestive Organs in particular, which  accompany local
  Diseases, and obstruct  their Cure;  Observations on  Diseases of
  the Urethra, particularly of that part which is surrounded by, the.
 Prostate Gland; and Observations relative  to the Treatment of one
 species of the NiEVI MATERNI,
                By John Abernethy, F. R. S. "'
 Honorary Member of the Medical Society  of Edinburgh, and pf
    the Medical Societies of Paris, Philadelphia, Sec.  Assistant
    Surgeon to St. Bartholomew's Hospital, and Teacher of'/lni-
    tomy and Surgery.                 '    ■      ' !' *   *'•'
             In One Volume Octavo, Price 6s. Beards.,-

                    ■  By the same Author,              '
    x. SURGICAL 'OBSERVATIONS,'Part -thp ,;Fkst;. coij-,1
  taining a Classification,  pf %wjipu* §,-, wit.li  (&tf jl«jUL1 wtmcjhc,* 
3
History of each Species; an Account of Diseases which strictly
fesemble the Venereal Disease ; and various Cases illustrative of
different Surgical Subjects. In i vol. 8vo.   Price 6s. boards.
  2.  SURGICAL  and  PHYSIOLOGICAL  ESSAYS,  Parts
a and 3. Price 8s. Boards.
  XIV.  SIMPLE TALES.  By  Mrs. Opie.  In Four Vols.
izmo. Price One Guinea, boards.
                       containing,
  Vol. 1.   The Black Velvet Pelisse; the  Death-bed;  the
Fashionable Wife and Unfashionable Husband ; the Robber.
  2.  The Mother and Son ; Love and  Duty.
  3.  The   Soldier's  Return;   the  Brother  and  Sister;  the
Revenge.
  4.  Uncle and Nephew ; Murder will out;  the Orphan.

            Lately published, by the same Author,
  1.  ADELINE MOWBRAY, or the  Mother and Daugh-
ter  ; a/Tale.  Ti•>: Second  Edition.  In Three Vols.  121110.
Price 13s, 6d. in Boards.
  fi  We opened with great pleasure a  new  Novel,  from  the en-
tertaining pen of Mrs. Opie, a lady whose uncommon talents do
honour to  her sex and  country.   She displayed  in her pathetic
tale  of ' The Father and Daughter,'  a power of working upon
the passions we  think unrivalled (perhaps with the single excep-
tion of Mrs. Inchbald)  by  any writer of  the  present day, nor has
she failed to affect her readers with many heart-rending scenes in
the work before us."               Critical  Review, Feb. 1805.
  '<  This work must be allowed to rank considerably higher than
the ordinary productions of the same kind.   The  interest of the
story is well preserved to the end.  The incidents in general
follow naturally from the causes assigned, and are wrought up
with \incommon skill.'"             Literary Journal, Feb. 1805.
  "  After this full,  though  necessarily imperfect AnalyJs of
Mrs. Opie's novel, it must be concluded that it holds a considera-
ble rank in our estimation.  The language is simple  and  appro-
priate, the situations frequently marked  and  often  affecting, and
the  characters  indicate much  acute  observation of the  human
mind."                           General Review, Jan. 1806.

  2.  The  FATHER   and DAUGHTER  ;  a  Tale, in Prose.
The Fourth Edition, with a Frontispiece.  Price  4s. 6d. Boards.
   " The pleasures of melancholy  are  suited only to minds of
uncommon susceptibility,—to  those persons who may be  said to
 have a sympathetic taste for distress ; and  from readers  of this
 class, the  tale  of  woe now before us  will meet with  peculiar
acceptance.  For ourselves, we own  that  we have  been  truly
 affected by the perusal of it, since it is replete with interest, and
 possesses pathos enough to affect the heart of the most callous of
critical readers."      .           Monthly Review, June,  1802.
   3. POEMS.  The Fourth Edition, embellished with a  beau-
tiful Frontispiece,  from a Design,  by  Mr. Opie. Price  6s.
boards.
   " We have  more than  once announced and  commended the
 polite compositions of this lady.  Pathos we deem one of her
 peculiar excellencies,  of .which  the  «  Mourner' may be  given
as a specimen from the  present collection.  If the reader possesses
a heart, these lines must have found their way to it."
                                  Monthly Review,  Dec.  1802.
  <« Mrs.  Opie's volume of Poems has afforded  us  much  plea-
sore, and  it would  have  obtained for its  author a very con-
 siderable reputation, though her  former work had been wholly
■nknown."                      Edinburgh Review, Oct.  1802. .
  XV. LETTERS  from the MOUNTAINS ;  being the veal
Correspondence of a Lady, betweerrHl|e Years 1773 and 1803.
      In Three, Volumes,  nmo. Price 13s. 6d. in. Boards.
                  4  By the same Author, .    "      •
  The HIGHLANDERS, and other POEMS.  In  1  Vol.' 8-vo,"
Price 10s. 6d. in boards
  XVI, LETTERS addressee?  to  a  YOUNG LADY ;  wherein
the Duties and Characters of Women are considered, chiefly with
a Reference to prevailing Opinions.
                      $y Mrs. West.
The Second Edition^inThree Volumes, i2mo. Price One Guinea,
                           Boards.
  "  We do not venture without mature  deliberation  to  assert*
that  not merely as critics, but as parents, husbands, and brothers,
we can recommend  to  the  ladies  of Britain, "The Letters of
Mrs. West."                    Critical Review,  AfriU 1806.

            Lately published, by the same Author,
  1.  Letters addressed  to a Young  Man on his  First
Entrance into Life, and adapted to the peculiar Circumstances
of the present Times.  In 3  Vols. nmo.  4th Edition, 16s. 6d.
Boards.
  2.  ThelNFiDFL Father, a Novel, 3 vols. i2ino.  15s.  bds.
  3.  A Gossip's  Story and Legendary  Tale.  2  Vols.
i2mo. 4th Edition, 7s.  Boards.
  4.  A Tale of theTiMEs, 3 Vols.  2d Edition, 13s. 6d.  sewed.
  5.  The  Advantages  of Education;  or the History of
Maria Williams; a Tale, 2 Vols. 121110. 2d Edition, 7 s. Boards.
  6.  Poems and Plays, 4 Vols. Foolscap 8vo. il. 3s.  Boards.


  XVII.  ZOFLOYA,  or the  Moor ; a Romance of the Fif-
teenth Century.
                  By Charlotte Dacre,
              Better known as Rosa Matilda,
   Author of The Nun of St. Omer's, Hours of  Solitude,  Sec.
         In Three Volumes, umo. Price 12s. Boards.


          XVIII.  MEMOIRS of MARMONTEL.
                  Written  by  Himself.
Containing his Literary and Political  Life, and Anecdotes of the
        Principal Characters of.the Eighteenth Century.
  A New Edition, carefully revised and corrected throughout.
      In Four Volumes, nmo. Price One Guinea in Boards.
  "  This is  one of the most interesting productions which has
issued from  the French press since the Revolution.  The style of
the  work is also not less attractive than  its matter;  it  is elo-
quent, flowing,  and easily  inclines,  in pursuing the  course of
events, either to the ludicrous or the pathetic.  To the merit
of truth, it adds all  the graces and  attractions of  a work of
fancy."                Monthly Review:, Nov. and Dec.  1805.
   " We are not sure that we have  perused  any book, since the
commencement of our critical career, that has  afforded us more en-
tertainment than these little volumes.  The .narrative is  so gay
and  airy, the tone  of sentiment so mild and unassuming, and the
living pictures  with which the  busiest part  of the scene is-
crowded,  so full of delicacy,  truth, and vivacity,  that it  is
impossible not to be charmed with the greater part of  the per-
 formance."                   Edinburgh Review,  Jan. 1806.


   XIX, MISCELLANEOUS PLAYS. By Joanna Baillie,.  -
       The Second Edition, in Octavo, Price  9s.  in Boards.
                     By the same Author,                     '
   A Series of Plays ;  in which it  is attempted to delineate
 the  stronger Passions of the Mind; each Passion being the Sub-
ject of a Tragedy anc\ a Comedy.  The Fifth Edition,  in^VolsTi
j 8vo; Price 18s. in Boards.                                    "*


   XX.  The  POETICAL WORKS, of.  HECTOR  MAC*4
 NE'lLLj'Esq. containing Scotland'^ Sca|th ; or the History
!of Will  and Jean and the Waes o'  War, or. the  Upshot of
,Will and Jean.  '
 A New Edition; corrected' and ephtrgpd, in Two Vols.. Foolscap
'■   ..     ^c.UtVo, embellished with'elegaiit Engravings,  "  -
*                      Price 13s. in Boards. 
4
  XXI.  The  BIRDS of SCOTLAND;  and other Poimi.
                By  James Grahame,  Esq.
            Author of " Tht* Sabbath," a Poem.
     In One Volume, Foolscap Octavo, Price 7s. in Boards.


  XX1T.  The POETICAL WORKS of Sir DAVID LYNDSAY
of the Mount,  Lion King at Arms, under James V.
          A  new Edition,  corrected  and enlarged ;
With a Life  of  the Author;  Prefatory  Dissertations;   and  an
                    appropriate Glos:-ary.
            By George Chalmers, F.R.S. S.A.
   In Three Volumes, Crown Octavo, Price il. 16s. in Boards.


  XXIII. SERMfNS, on EDUCATION, REFLECTION,  the
GREATNESS of GOD in the WORKS ofNATURE, and in the
GOVERNMENT of the WORLD, CHARITY, and on various
other Topics.  From the German of
         The Rev. George Joachim Zollikofer,
       Minister  of the Reformed Congregation at Leipsic.
          By the  Rev. William Tookt, F. R. S.
     In Two large Volumes, Octavo, Price il.  is. in Boards.
  The very favourable, daily increasing  Acceptance found with
the discerning and judicious Public, by  the former Publications
from the Pen of this venerable and amiable Divine, renders it here
barely needful to state, that the Sermons in the present Collection
are characterised by the same convincing Scheme of Thought,  the
same persuasive Flow  of Eloquence,  the same assimilating and
transforming Efficacy, the same full and complete Demonstration
of  the Gospel, as the Blessing and the Balm  of Human Life, as
the Power of God unto Salvation to every one that believes.
   *** For the  highest  possible  Commendations on this truly
Evangelical Preacher, this Christian Cicero, as he is often  styled,
see all  the Reviews and Critical Journals both at Home and
Abroad.
                    By the same Author,
   1.  Sermons  on  the  Dignity of Man. In 2 large vols. 8vo.
 Price  il. is. Boards.
   2. Sermons on the Evils that are in  the World, and on various
other Topics.  In 2 large Vols. 8vo. Price il. is.  Boards.


   XXIV. LETTERS to DISSENTING MINISTERS, and to
 STUDENTS for the MINISTRY,
               From the Rev. Mr. Job  Ortos.
Transcribed from his original Short-hand, with Notes Explanatory
   and Biographical.
                       By S. Palmer.
           In Two Volumes, 121110. Price  8s. in Boards.
   These Letters were addressed  to the Rev.  Dr.  Ashworth,  the
Rev. Messrs. Clark, Seddon, Robins, Hughes, Palmer, &c. in all
upwards of Seventy; besides several to and from Persons of a dif-
ferent Description, introduced in the Memoirs and Appendix.

                  Also, lately published,
   Letters from the Rev. Mr. Job Orton, and the Rev.  Sir
James Stonehouse, Bart. M D. to the Rcv.ThomasStedman,
M.A. Vicar of St. Chad's, Shrewsbury.   The  Second Edition, in
Two Volumes, Foolscap Octavo, Price' 10s. 6d. in Boards.


  XXV.  SERMONS, on the EXISTENCE of  the DEITY,
the IMMORTALITY of the SOUL, the EXCELLENCE of the
CHRISTIAN RELIGION, and other important Subjects.
             By the Rev. John Adams, A. M.
Master of the Academy at Putney, and Author of " The History
                   of Great Britain," &c.
       In One Volume, Octavo, Price 7s. 6ct. in Boards.
  •« This is a performance of infinite utility, in which there is much
•hat ought to be often rc^ea'.t t, and exVbitetl in such various forms,
as the vinous u1e-it*of writers may afford.  The most  important
truths are expressed in plea-ing, elegant and perspicuous language.
The more learned readers will find their minds agreeably refreshed
by the essence of many valuable disquisitions reduced to the bulk.
of popular discourses, and young persons will b<- induced to pu^li
their enquiries farther than the present  plan admitted."
                                          Literary Journal.


  XXVI.  The ORIGIN of the DISTINCTION  of RANKS,
or, an Inquiry into the Circumstances which give  Rise to Influence
and Authority in the different Members of Society.
                  By John Millar, Esq.
        Prosessor of Law in the University of Glasgow.
                    To which is prefixed,
      An Account of the Life and Writings of the Author,
                   By John Craig,  Esq.
               The Fourth Edition, corrected.
         In One Volume, Octavo, Price 9s. in Boards.


   XXVII.  LECTURES on BELLES LETTRES and LOGIC.
          By the late William Barron, F. A. S. E.
And Professor of  Belles Lettres and Logic in  the University of
                        St. Andrews.
      In Two Volumes Octavo, Price One Guinea in Boards.
   " This work is well calculated for the  initiation of the young into
the arts of  criticism and rhetoric.  The style is remarkably per-
spicuous, and at the same time  animated;  while the neatness and
distinctness ot the arrangement merit every praise."
                                Literary Journal, April, 1806.


c-rX?CJrII!;^EXERCrSES forthe  MEMORY and  UNDER-
b 1 AN DING ; consisting of Fables and Narratives, Selections on
Natural and Civil History, with Moral  and Religious  Extracts in
Prose and Verse; together with a Series of Questions adaptei to the

              By Thomas and John Holland.
       The Fourth Edition, in i2mo. Price 5s. bound.

1  'W^***  seIections are made with great judgment, and with a
 audable attention to variety,  and contain a great body of useful
knowledge 2nd elegant writing.  They are in our eyes valuable, on
account of the great  number of passages they contain  in favour of
humanity, patriotism", and religion."
                             Mont'ly Repository, April, 1806.


topXvXvS OBSERVATIONS on the NATURAL HIS-
TORY of BEES.
                    By Francis Huber.
                Translated from the Original.
         In One Volume, 12010. Price 5s. 6d. in Boards,


ffK^;XTX-  A  TREATISE  on the LANDED  PROPERTY of
ENGLAND; comprising the  Purchase,  the Improvements, and
the executive Management of Landed Estates; and moreover con-
taining what relates to the ge.1er.1l Concerns of Proprietors, as
well as to such subjects  of Political Economy,  as are  intimately
connected with the  Landed Intent :  being submitted to the
Attention ot Men of Fortune, and to Landed Gentlemen in

                    By Mr.  Marshall.
In One Volume, Quarto,  elegantly printed, and  illustrated by
           Diagrams, Price Two Guineas, in /Joards.

                    Also, just published,
  In One Volume, Octavo,  Price Half a Guinea, in  Boards   an
Abstract of the same  Work,  for 1 he Use of Professiovai
Men;  including whatever relates to the Business  of Est»t«
Agency.                                               ti
H. Bryer, t'r.nter, Brk%t>5trt,», Bhu kfrj* r». 
                                                      AUGUST i, i8©6-.
         This Day is published, price One Shilling and Six-pence,
                           £MBELUSHED WITH
                AX HIGHLY  FINISHED PORTRAIT

                                 OF THE

   &t.  Rev. BEILBY PORTEUS,  D.  D.
                         Lord Bishop cf London;
                           ACCOMPANIED WITH
         MEMOIRS OF HIS  LIFE AND WRITINGS,
                                  THE

    UNIVERSAL    MAGAZINE

                       FOR JULY, 1806.

             (Being No.  I. of VOL. VI. NEW SERIES,)
            Continued regularly oh the First Day of every Month;
Each. Number containing at least Six Sheets of Letter-press Enriched with a
   correct  Ukentss, finely  engraved, from an accredited  Portrait of some
   distinguished  Character, accompanied with authentic  Biographical Me-
   moirs.
                It also contains, besides a most valuable series of

                  ORIGINAL COMMUNICATIONS,
                                    IN
     HISTORY, PHILOSOPHY, BELLES-LETTRES, POLITICS^
                           AMUSEMENTS,
          THE PROCEEDINGS OF LEARNED  SOCIETIES,
Including Modern Discoveries and Improve-
  ments in  Arts, Sciences, Description of
  Patents, &c.
Domestic and Foreign Intelligence, Litera-
  ry, Scientific, and Biographical
State of Public Affairs
Original Criticism, with a Review of New
  Music
Correct Last of New Publications
Agriculture, and Rural (Economy
Commerce
The Drama
Genuine unpublished Poetry
Parliamentary Proceedings
Historical Register of Public  Transactions
Domestic-Incidents, important Marriages,
  Deaths, &c. in and near London, with
  Biographical Notices of Eminent Persons
  deceased
Provincial Occurrences, under     Heads
  of the different Counties arranged in
  Alphabetical Order
Meteorological Journal
Prices of Stocks
Average Prices of Cowi
Agricultural Report
Alphabetical Lut of Bankruptcies and Di-
  vidends
Medical Report
Bill of Mortality.
  These constitute the leading divisions  of the work.  There remain other inci-
dental heads, which, though peculiar to its arrangement, a Prospectus could not ade-
quately describe.                   ~
                               LONDON:
          Printed for the Proprietors; and published by H. D. SYMONDS,
                           No. 20, Patenioster-Row.
                         ADD RESS.
  To maintain in its original excellence an undertaking whose ascendancy in the ranks
of Literature has been extensively acknowledged, must be considered as essentially con-
tributing to the common sources of entertainment and instruction.  Every human in-
stitution, however providentially contrived, is subject to vicissitude and decay.  But
if the plan were rationally disposed, and the superstructure has stood the trial of expe-
rience; if there be that in it which is inherently and substantially good,  susceptive of
renovation, and even of improvement—if there be this, in  any establishment, there is
always enough to encourage hope, and  to stimulate activity.
  It has accordingly been the endeavour of the present Proprietors of the  Univer-
sal Macaz 1 ne  to  render their Publication unexceptionably interesting.  Those
who iuspect the materials of which  Perioiical Miscellanies are frequently formed 
                                 (  2
must  conceive,  that, losing sight of their primary designation, they become devoted
to subjects uninteresting to the majority of readers ; that  they do not aim, as necessa-
rily they ought, at once to impart satisfaction to the inquisitive, relaxation to the stu*
dious, and gratification even to the indolent.  To accomplish, therefore,  these desirable
ends is the  first wish of the Proprietors and Editor of the Miscellany here offered to
the world.  Without arrogating to themselves  the praise of superlative exertion*, they
confidently refer  to the  latter numbers of their work,  as the criterion of their increas-
ing reputation ; and in support of their  claim to an extensive proportion of the public
patronage.                                           ._               .
   Of a publication designed to  convey accurate representations of men and things, the
complexion must necessarily vary with the changing features of the age.  It must
adapt itself, and be adapted,  to circumstances.  Concerning such a depository of events ,
and sentiments, it cannot be distinctly asserted  what direction it may appear eligible to
pursue, to what objects it may be extended, or  in what  discussions- it shall be engaged.
If, however, there be found impartiality and judgment in its selections,  choice and va-
liety in its contents, information and liberality  in its opinions, and a moral consistency
in its conduct, let it be presumed that the Universal Magazine will continue to
stand well in the general estimation.

 Thirty-two Numbers of this Work are now before the  Public, comprehending
   from January. 180-i, to June, 1806,  containing, besides a great Variety of
   valuable Jr'lic/cs on every  subject  of Human Knowledge,  LIVES and
   P0P7T RAITS of the following eminent Public Characters:-----

                                        18. Benjamin West, Esq.  F. R. S.
                                        19.  Samuel Whitbread, Esq. M.  P.
                                        20. His Grace the Duke of Roxburgh
                                        21.  Lord Viscount Melville
                                        22. The  Rt. Hon.  Earl St. Vincent.
                                        23.  William Paley, D. D.  Archdeacon
                                             of Carlisle
                                        24. Right Hon. Lord Nelson
                                        26. Alexander I. Emperor of Russia
                                        27-  Marquis Cornwallis
                                        28. Lord Co'llingwood
                                        29.  Charles, Archduke of Austria.
                                        30.  Rt. Hen. Lord Henry Petty
                                        31. Richard Cumberland, Esq.
                                        32. Beilby Porteus,, Bishop of London.
L
    Dr. Richard Watson,  Lord Bishop
      of Landaff
 2.  Dr. Lettsom
 3.  Lord Sidrnouth
 4.  General Moreau
 5.  Dr. Joseph Priestley
 6.  General Pichegru
10.  Dr. James Sims, Pies. Med. Socie-
     ty, London
11.  Wm. Coxe, A. M. F. R. S. F. A. S.
12.  John Pinkerton, Esq.
13.  The Young Roscius, in the Character
     of Frederic
U  Col. Sir R. T. Wilson, K. M. T.
15.  Right.  Hon. Wm. Pitt
16.  Right.  Hon. Charles James Fox
                         Also the following Plates:—
A Map  of the Windward Islands of the West Indies....Plan of the
   Battle off Trafalgar....Fac Simile of Lord Nelson's Hand Writ-
   ing....Machine for raising Water by Wind.
  Every Six Numbers form a handsome Volume, price lOs. 6d, neatly halkbound,
                         with calf backhand lettered.

  (£lr Communications, directed to the  Editor of the Universal Magazine*
to the care of the Publisher (Post-paid), will receive  every Attention their
Merits demand.   Such as are of public Utility and Beneiit will of course de-
serve our highest Regard.  Those on Agriculture, Commerce, Manufactures*
and public Improvement, will be thankfully received,  as will also any Infor-
mation connected with  improving the Comforts and Convenience of  Man,
and ameliorating the Condition of the Labouring Classes,  the  Object of this
Work being general in its Plan, and liberal in its Conduct.

  *^* Persons residing abroad, and who ivlsh to be suppliedis'ith this Work every month, as pub-
lished, nay have 'it sent to them, Free of Postage, to Neiv York,  Half ax, Quebec, and every
part of the West Indies, at Ttvo Guineas per annum, by Mr. Thornhill, of the General
Post-Office, 21, Sherborne Lane ;  to Hamburgh,  Lisbon, Gilralrcr, or any part of the
Mediterranean, at Two Guineas per annum, by Mr. Bishop, of the General Post-Office,
22,  Sherborne Lane ;  to any part of Ireland,  at One Guinea and a Half per annum, by Mr.
Smith, ot the General Post-Office, 3, Sherborne Lane ; and to the Capeof Good Hope,
er any part of the East Indies, at Thirty Shilling; per annum,  by Mr. Guy, at the East-India
Hous*.                                                   [C. Stewer, Printer. 
 
 
/ 
 
"%
Vitt
Bell, John, Anatomy of the human body, WZ 290 B435e 1804
Condition when received: Upon deinstallation, two pages
were noted to bear several pieces of brown packing tape. The
tape secured several tears in plates located on two pages
immediately preceding p. 103. The tape consisted of a dark
brown water-based adhesive.
Conservation treatment: The tape carrier was humidified and
removed using a methylcellulose poultice (A4M, Talus). The
residual adhesive was reduced using a cellulose powder
poultice (Sigma) and deionized water. Tears were mended
using kizukishi Japanese paper (Japanese Paper Place) and
Wheat Starch Paste (Zin Shofu, University Products). Pages
were brought into plane between blotters using mild pressure.
Treatment carried out by Rachel-Ray Cleveland,
HMD Paper Conservator, 9/2003.
SUrS.
JO?
Shown in Dream Anatomies Exhibition
At 5-10 footcandles (no UV) for 10 months
Page  /3.Z-I33     ___________
# 
NATIONAL LIBRARY OF MEDICINE
NLM 01113521  E

I

'■y: •
NLM011935292